Pasolink NLiteN FULL Manual

ROI-S05748-05DE CONTENTS August, 2007

CL-1

NLite E6-38 GHz SONET DIGITAL RADIO SYSTEM

Section I DESCRIPTION

CONTENTS

TITLE PAGE

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-12 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND CHARACTERISTICS ••• 2-12.1 System Configuration •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-12.2 Performance Characteristics•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-142.2.1 General System ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-14

2.2.2 LAN Interface (1000 Base-SX/1000 Base-T) (GbE)••••• 2-15

2.2.3 Service Channel (SC)•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-16

2.2.4 LCT (PNMT) Interface•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-16

2.2.5 PNMS Interface•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-16

2.2.6 RF I/O Port•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-16

2.2.7 ODU (Outdoor Unit) and System performance ••••••••• 2-17

2.2.8 IDU (Indoor Unit) and System performance ••••••••••••• 2-19

2.3 Interconnection between ODU and IDU •••••••••••••••••• 2-232.4 Hybrid Combiner/Divider ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-242.4.1 10 dB Coupler ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-25

2.4.2 OMT (Ortho-Mode Transducer) ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-26

2.5 RF Channel Plan •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-272.6 Power Supply•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-28

CONTENTS ROI-S05748

CL-22 pages

(This page is intentionally left blank.)

ROI-S05748 CONTENTS

CL-3

ROI-S05748 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1-1

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

This section provides descriptive information on the NLite E radios which are used for the wide/narrow band point-to-point digital microwave radio links.

The Indoor Unit (IDU) provides digital SDH (1 × STM-1) and/or LAN (2P × 10/100BASE-T(X), 4P × 10/100BASE-T(X) or 1P × 1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-T) signal transmission by the change of the data signal interface card. It can select the modulation method 32QAM/128QAM, by software selection depending on the transmission capacity that is configured in the modulator/demodulator unit.

The Outdoor Unit (ODU) can be applied for a wide range of RF frequency bands from 6/7/8/10/11/13/15/18/23/26/32/38 GHz.

Applications using the following redundancy configurations, Unprotected (1+0), 2 × (1+0)*1, Protected (1+1), 2 × (1+1)*1 are available for NLite E radio systems.

Notes: *1; XPIC

Cross Polarization Interference Canceller (XPIC) system is applied for dual polarized systems using the same frequency in 2 × (1+0) and 2 ×(1+1) configurations.

CONTENTS ROI-S0575

ATTENTION: TO REMAIN COMPLIANT WITH FCC PART 15 RULES INSTALLERS MUST UTILIZE SHIELDED CABLE WHEN CONNECTING TO THE “XPIC CTRL” CONNECTOR.

ATTENTION: TO REMAIN COMPLIANT WITH FCC PART 15 RULES INSTALLERS MUST UTILIZE SHIELDED CABLE WHEN CONNECTING TO THE “SC IN/OUT” CONNECTOR.

CL-2 2 pages

1+0 1+1 XPIC ETSI (RACK)LABEL( EN FR ES DE IT)

NWM-001846-001 MADE IN JAPAN

0678Nlite EMDP-150MB-1AA INDOOR UNIT

INTFC(1) STM1-E STM1-0 LAN/WS GbE 16E1( ) 48E1 OTHER( )INTFC(2) STM1-0 LAN/WS OTHER( )

TRP-( )G-1B0678NLite E

TRP-( )G-1BOUTDOOR UNIT (NHG)SHIFT FREQUENCY MHz SUB BAND

(NWA-009034)

WEIGHT 3.5kg/ - 48V 0.5ANEC Corporation TOKYO JAPAN MADE IN JAPAN

CAUTIONNon-ionizingradiation

0678

-48V INPUTPower down IDU beforedisconnection orconnection of cable.

NLite E

TX HIGH/LOW




MHz TX FREQUENCY

OUTDOOR UNIT (NHG)SHIFT FREQUENCY MHz SUB BAND

TX HIGH/LOW

SERIAL No. DATE SERIAL No. DATE

(NWA-009034)

PASOLINK NEO

FGIFLMONRX LEV

IDU 1+1

ODU

1+0 1+1 XPIC ETSI (RACK)LABEL( EN FR ES DE IT)

NWM-001846-001 MADE IN JAPAN

0678NLite EMDP-150MB-1AA INDOOR UNIT

INTFC(1) STM1-E STM1-0 LAN GbE 16E1( ) 48E1 OTHER( )INTFC(2) STM1-0 LAN/WS OTHER( )

IDU 1+0

MDP-150MB-1AA

WEIGHT: 4 kg (WITH OPTION)SER. No. DATE , INDOOR UNIT

−48 V 2.5A (WITH ODU & OPTION)NEC Corporation TOKYO JAPAN MADE IN JAPAN

(H2930)0678

MODEM(1) INTFC (1) INTFC (2)

MODEM(2) CTRL

IDU Package Label

IDU Name Plate

ODU Name Plate

NLite E

SELV

!

AUX/ALMNMS NE

ALM

SC IN/OUT EOW

PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

NLite E NEO

LCT

OC-3 INOC-3 OUT

PULL

ALM

OC-3 INOC-3 OUT

(Blank)

ONLINEONLINE GG

G

SELV

!

AUX/ALMNMS NE

ALM

SC IN/OUT EOW

PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

NLite E NEO

LCT

OC-3 OUT OC-3 IN

PULL

SELV

!

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

PULL

ALMOC-3 OUT OC-3 INONLINE ONLINE G

G

G

G

GENERAL DESCRIPTION ROI-S05748

1-22 pages

ROI-S05748 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND CHARACTERISTICS

2-1

2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND CHARACTERISTICS

This section provides outline of the system configuration, system performance, RF channel plan, external alarm items and House keeping input/output, and power supply.

2.1 System Configuration

The system consists of the MDP-150MB-1AA Modulator-Demodulator (Indoor Unit (IDU)) and TRP-(*1)G-1B Transmitter-Receiver (Outdoor Unit (ODU)), Hybrid Combiner/Divider*2 or Orthogonal Mode Transducer (OMT)*3 and the antenna.

The TRP-( )G-1B is available with frequency bands of 6 GHz to 38 GHz.

Notes: *1:ODU Type depends on the frequency band used, such as TRP-(13)G-1B is applied for 13 GHz band.

*2:The Combiner/Divider is used in (1+1) single antenna configuration for antenna direct mount type ODUs.

*3:The OMT is used in XPIC systems with antenna direct mounting ODUs.

ODU IDUDATA IN/OUT

1+0 IDU

IF Cable

ODU IDUDATA IN/OUT

1+0 IDU

IF Cable

ODU (Working)

HYBNo.1

DATA IN/OUT

ODU (Standby)

1+1 IDUIF Cable

IF CableNo.2

ODU IDU DATA IN/OUT

1+0 IDU

IF Cable

ODU IDU DATA IN/OUT

1+0 IDU

IF Cablef1

f1’

ODU (Working)

HYBNo.1

DATA IN/OUT

ODU (Standby)

1+1 IDUIF Cable

IF CableNo.2

f1

f1’

f1

f1’

ODU (Working)

HYBNo.1

DATA IN/OUT

ODU (Standby)

1+1 IDUIF Cable

IF CableNo.2

ODU (Working) No.1DATA IN/OUT

ODU (Standby)

1+1 IDUIF Cable

IF Cable No.2

f1’

ODU (Working)

HYB

No.1

DATA IN/OUT

ODU (Standby)

1+1 IDUIF Cable

IF Cable

f1

f1’RF Cable

No.2

ODU (Working)

HYB

No.1

DATA IN/OUT

ODU (Standby)

1+1 IDUIF Cable

IF Cable

RF Cable

No.2

ODU (Working) No.1DATA IN/OUT

ODU (Standby)

1+1 IDUIF Cable

IF Cable No.2

f1’ODU (Working)No.1DATA IN/OUT

ODU (Standby)

1+1 IDUIF Cable

IF CableNo.2

f1

f1

f1

ODU (Working)

HYBNo.1

DATA IN/OUT

ODU (Working)

1+1 IDUIF Cable

IF CableNo.2

ODU (Working)

HYBNo.1

DATA IN/OUT

ODU (Working)

1+1 IDUIF Cable

IF CableNo.2

f1

f1’f2

f2’

RF Cable RF Cable

1+0 with Waveguide/Coaxial Cable Connection

1+0 with Antenna Direct Connection

1+1HS/HS with Coaxial Cable Connection

1+1 HS/HS with Antenna Direct Connection

1+1 HS/Hybrid SD with Antenna Direct Connection

1+1 HS SD with Antenna Direct Connection

1+1 Twin-path FD with Antenna Direct Connection

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND CHARACTERISTICS ROI-S05748

2-2

Fig. 2-1 Protected/Unprotected System Configuration (1/2)

ODU (Working) IDUDATA1 IN/OUT

ODU (Working)

IDU DATA2 IN/OUT

IDU X IF Cable

1+0 IDUIF Cable

IF Cable

1+0 IDU

V (H)

H (V)

H (V)

ODU (Working)

OMT

IDUDATA1 IN/OUT

ODU (Working)

IDUDATA2 IN/OUT

IDU X IF Cable

1+0 IDUIF Cable

IF Cable

1+0 IDU

V (H)

H (V)

ODU (Working)

OMT

IDUDATA1 IN/OUT

ODU (Working)

IDUDATA2 IN/OUT

IDU X IF Cable

1+0 IDUIF Cable

IF Cable

1+0 IDU

V (H)

H (V)

ODU (Working)

HYBNo.1

DATA1 IN/OUT

ODU (Standby)

1+1 IDUIF Cable

No.2

ODU (Working)

HYB

No.1DATA2 IN/OUT

ODU (Standby)1+1 IDU

IF CableNo.2

IDU X IF Cable IDU XPIC

CTRL Cable

No. 1

No. 2

No. 1

No. 2

H (V)

V (H)

V (H)

H (V)

ODU (Working)

OMT

IDUDATA1 IN/OUT

ODU (Working)

IDU DATA2 IN/OUT

IDU X IF Cable

1+0 IDUIF Cable

IF Cable

1+0 IDU

V (H)

H (V)

ODU (Working)

OMT

IDUDATA1 IN/OUT

ODU (Working)

IDUDATA2 IN/OUT

IDU X IF Cable

1+0 IDUIF Cable

IF Cable

1+0 IDU

V (H)

H (V)

RF Cable

ODU (Working)IDUDATA1 IN/OUT

ODU (Working)

IDUDATA2 IN/OUT

IDU X IF Cable

1+0 IDUIF Cable

IF Cable

1+0 IDU

V (H)

H (V)

RF Cable

2(1+0) XPIC with Antenna Direct Connection

2(1+0) XPIC with Waveguide/Coaxial Cable Connection



ODU (Working)

HYBNo.1

DATA1 IN/OUT

ODU (Standby)

1+1 IDUIF Cable

No.2

ODU (Working)

HYB

No.1DATA2 IN/OUT

ODU (Standby)1+1 IDU

IF CableNo.2

IDU X IF CableIDU XPIC

CTRL Cable

No. 1

No. 2

No. 1

No. 2

H (V)

V (H)

V (H)

H (V)

IDU XPIC CTRL Cable

IDU XPIC CTRL Cable

IDU XPIC CTRL Cable

IDU XPIC CTRL Cable

IDU XPIC CTRL Cable

IDU XPIC CTRL Cable

f1f1f1’f1’

f1f1f1’f1’

f1f1f1’f1’

f1f1f1’f1’


2-3

Fig. 2-1 Protected/Unprotected System Configuration (2/2)

ODU

IDUMAIN DATA INTFC (Selectable)

OC-3 (155 MB OPT) G.957, S-1.1/L-1.1

SC (2 × 64 KB V.11 + 2 × 9.6 KB RS-232C) + EOW (1)

1000 Base T/SX IEEE 802.3z 6 to 38 GHz

128QAM

32/128QAM

ALM/HK/SC (AUX) INTFC

6 ALM OUT (4 HK OUT/4 Cluster OUT) 32/128QAM

6 HK IN/4 Cluster IN 32/128QAM

10/100 Base T(X) 2-Port LAN IEEE802.3

2 MB + 64/128/192/256 KB SC- LAN 128QAM

LAN INTFC (Additional)

OC-3 (155 MB OPT) ITU-T G.957, S-1.1/L-1.1 128QAM

MAIN DATA INTFC (for APS)

1+0/1+1 Configuration

32QAM10/100 Base T(X) 4-Port LAN (100 MB) IEEE802.3 +


2-4

Fig. 2-2 Signal Interface/Capacity (1/2)

ODU

ODU

6 to 38 GHz

OMT

OC-3 (155 MB OPT) G.957, S-1.1/L-1.1

SC (2 × 64 KB V.11 + 2 × 9.6 KB RS-232C) + EOW (1 )

1000 Base T/SX IEEE 802.3z

128QAM

ALM/HK/SC(AUX)

6 ALM OUT (4 HK OUT/4 Cluster OUT)

6 HK IN/4 Cluster IN

10/100 Base T(X) 2-Port LAN IEEE 802.3

2 MB + 64/128/192/256 KB SC- LANSC-LAN INTFC (Additional)

OC-3 (155 MB OPT) G.957, S-1.1/L-1.1


MAIN DATA INTFC (Selectable)

OC-3 (155 MB OPT) G.957, S-1.1/L-1.1

SC (2 × 64 KB V.11 + 2 × 64 KB RS-232C) + EOW (1)

1000 Base T/SX IEEE 802.3z

128QAM

ALM/HK/SC(AUX)

6 ALM OUT (4 HK OUT/4 Cluster OUT)

6 HK IN/4 Cluster IN

10/100 Base T(X) 2-Port LAN

2 MB + 64/128/192/256 KB SC- LANSC-LAN INTFC (Additional)

OC-3 (155 MB OPT) G.957, S-1.1/L-1.1


MAIN DATA INTFC (Selectable)

No.2

No.1

IDU

IDU

XPIC Configuration


2-5

Fig. 2-2 Signal Interface/Capacity (2/2)

Unprotected Systems (IDU)

SELV

!

AUX/ALMNMS NE

ALM

SC IN/OUT EOW

PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

NLite E NEO

LCT

OC-3 INOC-3 OUT

PULL

Equipped with OC-3 Optical Interface for APS

SELV

!

AUX/ALMNMS NE

ALM

SC IN/OUT EOW

PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL

PULL

PWR

NLite E NEO

LCT

Equipped with OC-3 Optical Interface in XPIC

SELV

!

AUX/ALMNMS NE

ALM

SC IN/OUT EOW

PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL

PULL

PWR

NLite E NEO

LCT

ALM

OC-3 INOC-3 OUT

(Blank)

(Blank)

(Blank)

(Blank)

SELV

!

AUX/ALMNMS NE SC IN/OUT EOW

PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL

PULL

PWR

NLite E NEO

LCT

Equipped with DC-DC CONVSELV

PWR PULL

PWRALMFUSE (250V/8AH)

− 43V

GOUT

ONLINEONLINE

(Blank)

GG

GG

GG

GG

STD

G

G

G

G

G

ALM (Blank)

SELV

!

AUX/ALMNMS NE

ALM

SC IN/OUT EOW

PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL

PULL

PWR

NLite E NEO

LCT

SELV

!

AUX/ALMNMS NE

ALM

SC IN/OUT EOW

PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

NLite E NEO

LCT

OC-3 OUT OC-3 IN

PULL

Equipped with OC-3 Optical Interface

Equipped with OC-3 Optical Interface in APS

SELV

!

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

PULL

SELV

!

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

PULL

ALMOC-3 OUT OC-3 IN

(Blank)

ONLINE ONLINE

GG

GG

G

G

G

G

Protected Systems (IDU)

SELV

!

AUX/ALMNMS NE

ALM

SC IN/OUT EOW

PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL

PULL

PWR

NLite E NEO

LCT

Equipped with OC-3 Optical Interface in XPICSELV

!

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

PULL

SELV

!

AUX/ALMNMS NE

ALM

SC IN/OUT EOW

PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL

PULL

PWR

NLite E NEO

LCTSELV

!

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

PULL

(Blank)

(Blank)

GG

GG

G

G

G

G

OC-3 OUT OC-3 IN ONLINE

ONLINE

ONLINEOC-3 OUT OC-3 IN

OC-3 OUT OC-3 IN

OC-3 INOC-3 OUT

OC-3 INOC-3 OUT

OC-3 INOC-3 OUT


2-6

Fig. 2-3 IDU e/w Standard and Optional Interface (1/2)

SELV

!


PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL

PULL

PWR

NLite E NEO

LCT

SELV

!


PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

NLite E NEO

LCT

PULL

Equipped with GbE Interface with SC LAN Interface (SONET) 153 MB

GG

GG

G

G

ALM

WS IN/OUT100M PORT 1 PORT 2 100M

WSALMOC-3 OUT OC-3 IN ONLINE

ALM


WSALM

OUT

1000BASE-SX

PORTIN

(Blank)

(Blank)

SELV

!


PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

NLite E NEO

ALM

LCT

PULL

Equipped with 4P LAN Interface 32 QAM 100MB

(Blank)

GG

G

100M PORT 3 PORT4 100M100M PORT 1 PORT 2 100M

SELV

!


PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL

PULL

PWR

NLite E NEO

LCT

Equipped with LAN Interface for Main LAN (SONET) 2 x FE

G

GALM


WS

(Blank)

M S.

G

Equipped with OC-3 Optical Interface with SC LAN Interface (SONET) 155MB


2-7

Fig. 2-3 IDU e/w Standard and Optional Interface (2/2)

Antenna

Waveguide Connection (1+0)

ODU

Antenna Direct Mounting 2(1+0)

ODU

OMT

Coaxial Cable Connection 6/7/8GHz 2(1+0)

ODU

OMT

Coaxial Cable Connection 6/7/8GHz (1+0)

ODU

Waveguide Connection 2(1+0)

ODU

Dual Pol. Antenna

Dual Pol. Antenna

Dual Pol. Antenna

ODU

Antenna Direct Mounting (1+0)


2-8

Fig. 2-4 Configuration of the ODU (1/3)

Waveguide Connection (1+1 SD)

ODU

ODU

Antenna Direct Mounting (1+1)

ODU

HYB

Coaxial Cable Connection 6/7/8 GHz (1+1)

ODU

HYB


2-9


Waveguide Connection 2(1+1) XPIC

ODU

ODU

ODU

ODU

Dual Pol. Antenna

Dual Pol. Antenna

(REG)

(PROT)


2-10


Fig. 2-5 System Block Diagram (1/3)

IN/OUT

( )INTFC *1

CTRLNMSLCT

EOW

MODEM

DC-DCCONV

LAN/WS INTFC *3SC-LAN

RF

PS

CKT

SYNTH(LO)

CTRL

IDU ODU

ALM IN/OUT

OC-3 (OPT)/BPF(TX)

BPF(RX)

ODUINTFC

ODUINTFC

DPU/FEC

SC IN/OUT

NE

128QAMMODEM

OC-3 (OPT)

1+0 CONFIGURATION FOR SONET

2-PORT LAN

fH(L)

fL(H)

6 to 38 GHz

GbE

EOW(JACK)

LPF/EQL

PS IN

Notes: *1 :Optional*2:Provides for APS*3:Provides for auxiliary signals

( )INTFC *2


2-11


RF

PS

CKT

SYNTH(LO)

CTRL

ODU

BPF(TX)

BPF(RX)

ODUINTFC

RF

PS

CKT

SYNTH(LO)

CTRL

ODU

BPF(TX)

BPF(RX)

ODUINTFC

fH(L)

fL(H)

6 to 38 GHz

HYB

IN/OUT

( )INTFC *1

CTRLNMSLCT

EOW

MODEM

DC-DCCONV


IDU

ALM IN/OUT

OC-3 (OPT)/ODUINTFC

DPU/FEC

SC IN/OUT

NE

128QAM/MODEM

( )INTFC *2OC-3 (OPT)

2-PORT LANGbE

EOW(JACK)

MODEM

DC-DCCONV

ODUINTFC

DPU/FEC

MODEM128QAM/

1+1 CONFIGURATION FOR SONET

LPF/EQL

LPF/EQL

PS IN

PS IN



2-12


RF

PS

CKT

SYNTH(LO)

CTRL

ODU

BPF(TX)

BPF(RX)

ODUINTFC

1+0 CONFIGURATION FOR XPIC SONET

RF

PS

CKT

SYNTH(LO)

CTRL

ODU

BPF(TX)

BPF(RX)

ODUINTFC

fH(L)

fL(H)

6 to 38 GHz

OMT

IN/OUT

( )INTFC *1

CTRLNMSLCT

EOW

MODEM

DC-DCCONV


IDU

ALM IN/OUT

OC-3 (OPT)/ODUINTFC

DPU/FEC

SC IN/OUT

NE

128QAM/MODEM


2-PORT LAN/GbE

EOW(JACK)

MODEM

DC-DCCONV

ODUINTFC

DPU/FEC

MODEM128QAM/

H(V)V(H)

V(H)H(V)

IN/OUT

( )INTFC *1

CTRLNMSLCT

EOW


ALM IN/OUT

OC-3 (OPT)/

SC IN/OUT

NE


2-PORT LANGbE

EOW(JACK)

IDU

LPF/EQL

LPF/EQL

PS IN

PS IN



2-13

Table 2-0 System Performance Characteristics

STANDARD (STD)

ITEM SONET LAN

Capacity 155 Mbps *2 Up to 150 Mbps

Interface Optical: LCUp to 2 × OC-3 *3

RJ-45 (2 Ports): 10/100 BASE-T(X)RJ-45: 1000 BASE-TLC: 1000 BASE-SX

Interconnecting Connector, Cable impedance and Cable length (IDU-ODU)

ODU side: N type female, 50 ohms (Coaxial)IDU side: TNC type female, 50 ohms (Coaxial)300m (in case 8D-FB cable or equivalent cable)

Channel Spacing * 32QAM LAN Not Applicable

128QAM 28 (27.5) MHz 28 (27.5) MHz

EnvironmentalRequirement

GuaranteedOperation

ODU: −33 to +50°CIDU: −5 to +50°C

WorkableOperation

ODU: −40 to +55°CIDU: −10 to +55°C

Transportation/Storage

ODU, IDU: −40 to +70°C

Relativehumidity

ODU: 100% applicableIDU: Less than 90% at +50°C (Non-condensing)

EMC Conforms to EN301 489-4

Safety Conforms to EN60950

Power Requirement −48 VDC (−40.5 to −57 VDC), Conforms to EN300 132-2

Power Consumption (Typical)

ODU/Unit 30 W (6 to 11GHz), 23 W (13 to 52 GHz)

IDU Card/Unit

MODEM 10 W

OC-3 INTFC 5 W -

LAN INTFC - 5 W

CTRL 7 W

MechanicalDimension

ODU 237(W) × 237(H) × 101(D): Approx. 3.5 kg/Unit

IDU 482(W) × 44(H) × 240(D): Approx.4 kg

Notes *1: 27.5 MHz is applied for 18 GHz.*2: 2 × 155Mbps using 2 sets for XPIC*3: 2 for APS configuration


2-14

2.2 Performance Charactersitics2.2.1 General System

(3) 4 Port LAN

Table 2-1 4 Port LAN 100 Mbps (32QAM)

LAN Setting Capacity *

Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 LAN [Mbps]

P1 - P4 = 100 M shared 100

P1 & P2=50M separated P3 & P4=50M separated 100

P1 = 25M separated

P2 = 25M separated

P3 = 25M separated

P4 = 25M separated

100

Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 0


2-15

Note: * Total capacity: 108 Mbps.

2.2.2 LAN Interface (1000 Base-SX/1000 Base-T) (GbE)

Table 2-2 GbE LAN

Type 1000 Base-SX (IEEE 802.3z) 1000 Base-T (IEEE 802.3ab)

Throughput 150 Mbps 150 Mbps

Connector type LC RJ-45

Port Number 1 port 1 port


2-16

2.2.3 Service Channel (SC)

• SC1 to SC4 : RS-232C, 9.6 kbps async., : V.11, 64 kbps (Contra/Co-directional: Selectable)

• SC5 : EOW 1 channel• Connector : High Density D-sub 44 ways• LAN Interface : SC LAN Interface

(throughput: 64/128/256 kbps)

2.2.4 LCT (PNMT) Interface• Serial Interface : Connector type USB-B

2.2.5 PNMS Interface• 10 Base T : Connector RJ-45

2.2.6 RF I/O Port• Interface Port Type:

Antenna direct mount interface:exclusive NEC flange (11-38 GHz) is attached to the RF IN/OUT port in

standardCoaxial cable interface : 6/7/8 GHz: N (Female)Waveguide feeder interface* (Remote mount):

6 GHz: PDR707/8 GHz: PDR8410/11 GHz: PDR10013 GHz: PBR120 or PBR14015 GHz: PBR14018/23 GHz: PBR22026 GHz: PBR26028/32/38 GHz: PBR320

Polarization : Field changeable (Vertical or Horizontal)

Note: For the ODU of waveguide connection type, waveguide flange adapter is attached to the RF IN/OUT port of remote mount ODU in standard.

Table 2-3 System Performance for 32QAM/ODU

Frequency Band (GHz) 6 7-8 10-11 13 15 18 23 26 28 32 38 Guaranteed

Range [GHz] 5.925-7.11

7.12-8.5

10.15-11.7

12.75-13.25

14.25-15.35

17.7-19.7

21.3-23.6

24.25-27.5

27.5-29.5

31.8-33.4

37.0-40.0

−

Interfacetype

Direct Mount

N/A N/A NEC Original −

Remote

mount*2N type or PDR 70

N type or PDR 84

PDR100

PBR120

PBR140

PBR220

PBR220

PBR260

PBR320

PBR320

PBR320

−

Output Power, nominal (dBm) (Measured at ODU output port)

+25 +21 +21 +21 +19 +19 +18 +18 +17 +14.5 6-28G:±1.5 dB 32-38G:+1.5/−2.5 dB

Power Control (1 dB step, variable)

0 to 23 dB*30 to 23 dB*4 ±1.0 dB

ATPC (1 dB step) 0 to 23 dB*4 −

Frequency Stability ± 6 ppm ±10 ppm

Threshold Level (dBm), (Measured at ODU input port) at BER = 10-6 +3.0 dB

Channel Separation (CS)=

28 (27.5) *1 MHz

−75.5 −74.5 −74.5 −75 −75 −74.5 −74.5 −73 −73 73

BER = 10-3 Above value −1.5 dB

System Gain (dB), (Measured at ODU input port) at BER = 10-6 −3.0 dB


28 (27.5) *1 MHz

100.5 95.5 95.5 96 94 94 92.5 92.5 92.5 90 87.5

BER = 10-3 Above value +1.5 dB

Maximum Input Level −20 dBm for the BER less than 10-3 −

Residual BER Less than 10-12 at RSL=−30 dBm −


2-17

*1 27.5 MHz is applied for 18 GHz.

*2 For the ODU of waveguide connection type, flange adapter is attached to the RF IN/OUT port of remote mount ODU in standard.

*3 Additional attenuation (5 dB maximum) is available.

*4 Additional attenuation is unavailable.

2.2.7 ODU (Outdoor Unit) and System Performance

Table 2-4 System Performance for 128QAM/ODU

Frequency Band (GHz) 6 7-8 10-11 13 15 18 23 26 28 32 38 Guaranteed

Range [GHz] 5.925-7.11

7.12-8.5

10.15-11.7

12.75-13.25

14.25-15.35

17.7-19.7

21.3-23.6

24.25-27.5

27.5-29.5

31.8-33.4

37.0-40.0

−

Interfacetype

Direct Mount

N/A N/A NEC Original −

Remote

mount *2N type or PDR 70

N type or PDR 84

PDR100

PBR120

PBR140

PBR220

PBR220

PBR260

PBR320

PBR320

PBR320

−

Output Power, nominal (dBm) (Measured at ODU output port)

+25 +21 +21 +21 +19 +19 +18 +18 +17 +14.5 6-26G:±1.5 dB 28-38G:+1.5/−2.5 dB

Power Control (1 dB step, variable)

0 to 20 dB*30 to 20 dB*4 ±1.0 dB

ATPC range) 0 to 20 dB*40 to 20 dB*4 −

Frequency Stability ± 6 ppm ±10 ppm

Threshold Level (dBm), (Measured at ODU input port) at BER = 10-6 +3.0 dB


28 (27.5)*1 MHz

−69.5 −68.5 −68.5 −69 −69 −69 −68.5 −68.5 −67 −67

BER = 10-3 Above value −1.5 dB

System Gain (dB), (Measured at ODU input port) at BER = 10-6 −3.0 dB

Channel Separation =

28 (27.5)*1 MHz

94.5 89.5 89.5 90 88 88 86.5 86.5 84 81.5

BER = 10-3 Above value +1.5 dB

Maximum Input Level −20 dBm for the BER less than 10-3 −

Residual BER Less than 10-12 at RSL=−30 dBm −


2-18

*1 27.5 MHz is applied for 18 GHz.

*2 For the ODU of waveguide connection type, flange adapter is attached to the RF IN/OUT port in standard.

*3 Additional attenuation (5 dB maximum) is available.

*4 Additional attenuation is unavailable.

Note: XPIC system has the same condition as above.


2-19

2.2.8 IDU (Indoor Unit) and System performance

Table 2-5 System Performance for IDU

No. ItemSpecification

SONET LAN

1 IDU type 1+0 Expandable/1+12 Modulation Type 128QAM 32/128QAM3 Baseband Interface 155.52 Mbps ±20 ppm 10/100 Base-T(X)

1000 Base-SX1000 Base-T

75 ohm/S-1.1/L-1.1IEC 169-29 (1.0/2.3) RJ-45 (10/100/1000 Base-T(X))

LC (1000 Base-SX)Channel Number 1/2* 1/2Total Capacity 155 Mbps 100+50,

75+75 Mbps4 Service Channels V.11 (Contra/Co-directional) × 2 channels, RS-232C × 2 channels5 EOW IDU-IDU6 External alarm &

House keepingSee table below

7 Security level by LCT 2 levels8 Control &Setting by

LCT/PNMTSerial Interface (USB connector)

Loop Back a) Far End Baseband Loop Backb) Near End Baseband Loop Backc) IF Loop back

BER Alarm Adjustable 10-3/ 10-4/ 10-5 (High BER) 10-6/ 10-7/ 10-8/ 10-9 (Low BER)

Frequency setting Direct entry or Table Download entry: Available when using PNMx (optional)TX output Control Manual control, Automatic control, Mute control

9 Performance monitoring (PMON)/Metering

PMON Items;a) OFS, b) BBE, c) ES, d) SES, e) UASMetering Itemsa) Output power level (TX PWR), b) Received signal level (AGC V) c) Bit error rate (BER MON)LAN monitoring Items;a) RX Unicast, b) RX Broadcast, c) RX Multicast, d) RX Pause, e) RX CRC error

10 LED Display CTRL IDU Alarm (Red)Maintenance (Amber)Memory Access (Amber)

MODEM Operating PWR (Green)ODU Alarm (Red)MD/CBL Alarm (Red)TX status (Green)RX status (Green)XPIC Reset (Amber)*

SONET INTFC Module alarm (Red)Online (Green)**

LAN INTFC Module alarm (Red)

* This value is available with 2 IDUs per 1 RF CH with XPIC system.

** This indicates the online status which is selected from Working/Standby in APS system or Working in w/o APS system.


2-20

Table 2-6 Alarm & House Keeping Output Items

#Alarm Itemdisplayed

on LCT/PNMTCondition

ALM LED Indication

(IDU’s front)

Summarized Alarm Output(Form-C) <Note 1,2,3,7>

RL1 RL2 RL3 RL4 RL5 RL61 MAINT System under maintenance MAINT MASK MASK MASK MASK2 IDU CPU ALM IDU CPU failure -3 PS ALM1 PS1 failure (only1+1) PWR4 PS ALM2 PS2 failure (only1+1) -5 ODU ALM1 ODU1 total alarm ODU √6 ODU ALM2 ODU2 total alarm √7 ODU CPU/CBL

OPN ALM1ODU1 CPU failure or IF cable is open

ODU Blinking

√

8 ODU CPU/CBL OPN ALM2

ODU2 CPU failure or IF cable is open

√

9 TX PWR ALM1 ODU1 output power decrease ODU10 TX PWR ALM2 ODU2 output power decrease11 TX INPUT ALM1 ODU1 TX IF input level decrease ODU12 TX INPUT ALM2 ODU2 TX IF input level decrease13 APC ALM1 ODU1 LO OSC APC loop out of

lockODU

14 APC ALM2 ODU2 LO OSC APC loop out of lock

15 RX LEV ALM1 ODU1 Receiving level decrease ODU16 RX LEV ALM2 ODU2 Receiving level decrease17 IF CABLE SHORT

ALM1IF Cable connected to ODU1 short IDU

MD/CBLBlinking18 IF CABLE SHORT

ALM2IF Cable connected to ODU2 short

19 IDU ALM IDU total alarm IDU √20 MOD ALM1 MOD PLL APC loop out of lock,

MOD output level down or TX DPU CLK loss in MODEM1

IDUMD/CBL

21 MOD ALM2 MOD PLL APC loop out of lock, MOD output level down or TX DPU CLK loss in MODEM2

22 DEM ALM1 Carrier Asynchronous,Frame Asynchronous at DPU in MODEM1

IDUMD/CBL

23 DEM ALM2 Carrier Asynchronous,Frame Asynchronous at DPU in MODEM2

24 HIGH BER ALM1 BER > 10E-3 to -5 (selectable) in MODEM1

IDUMD/CBL

√

25 HIGH BER ALM2 BER > 10E-3 to -5 (selectable) in MODEM2

√

26 LOW BER ALM1 BER > 10E-6 to -9 (selectable) in MODEM1

IDUMD/CBL

27 LOW BER ALM2 BER > 10E-6 to -9 (selectable) in MODEM2

28 LOF1 Loss of Radio frame synchronization in MODEM1

IDU MD/CBL

29 LOF2 Loss of Radio frame synchronization in MODEM2

30 OC-3(1/2) LOS(MUX)

Loss of input data streamfrom MUX <Note 1>

IDU INTFC<Note5>

31 OC-3(1/2) LOS(DMR)

Loss of input data streamfrom DMR <Note 1>

IDU INTFC<Note5>

32 OC-3(1/2) TF ALM

Loss of OC-3 signal output toMUX <Note 1>

IDU INTFC<Note5>


2-21

Note 1: It is not possible to change capacity between OC-3 and Ethernet under working condition.

Note 2: In MAINT status, excepting HK-OUT and Cluster ALM, alarm outputs are masked to normal condition.

Note 3: The summarization of alarm outputs is fully user programmable; The sign in above table shows fixed item and can not be changed. The sign √ only shows the factory settings. The sign output can be assigned for plural items. The sign

input/output can not be assigned. Either HK output or Cluster ALM output in each channel can be assigned.

Note 4: Above Table shows Alarm output matrix for 1+1 configurationNote 5: Only apply to SONET system.Note 6: Only apply to XPIC system.Note 7: Assign to relays 3 to 6 only one category, either NLite E Alarm, House Keeping

Control out or Cluster Alarm out.

Output Port condition Interface circuit: Relay Form C

Maximum Current: 0.2 AMaximum Voltage: 100 V (AC+DC)

Event/ Alarm Open (Normally closed)

Event/ Alarm Close (Normally open)

COM

Relay

33 INTFC (1/2) LAN LINK PORT

Loss of SC LAN Link IDU INTFC<Note5>

34 XCTRL ALM1 Control failure or REFSignal failure

IDU INTFC<Note6>

35 XCTRL ALM2 Control failure or REFSignal failure

IDU INTFC<Note6>

36 XREF ALM1 Control failure or REFSignal failure

IDU INTFC<Note6>

37 XREF ALM2 Control failure or REFSignal failure

IDU INTFC<Note6>

38 HK-OUT1 House keeping Control out1 Only showPNMT




42 Cluster ALM out1 This item received fromopposite site. Item 1

Only showPNMT


Only showPNMT


Only showPNMT


Only showPNMT

Table 2-6 Alarm & House Keeping Output Items (Cont’d)

#Alarm Itemdisplayed

on LCT/PNMTCondition

ALM LED Indication

(IDU’s front)

Summarized Alarm Output(Form-C) <Note 1,2,3,7>

RL1 RL2 RL3 RL4 RL5 RL6

Table 2-7 House keeping input Items

#House keeping Item

displayedon LCT/PNMT

Condition Event IndicationSummarized Alarm Input

(Photo coupler)

IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN61 HK-IN1 House keeping Event inport1 Only show PNMT2 HK-IN2 House keeping Event inport2 Only show PNMT3 HK-IN3 House keeping Event inport3 Only show PNMT4 HK-IN4 House keeping Event inport4 Only show PNMT5 HK-IN5 House keeping Event inport5 Only show PNMT6 HK-IN6 House keeping Event inport6 Only show PNMT7 Cluster ALM input1 This item transmits to opposite site. Item 1 Only show PNMT8 Cluster ALM input2 This item transmits to opposite site. Item 2 Only show PNMT9 Cluster ALM input3 This item transmits to opposite site. Item 3 Only show PNMT

10 Cluster ALM input4 This item transmits to opposite site. Item 4 Only show PNMT


2-22

Note 1: Unused channel/interface is masked according to the bit rate.Note 2: In the 2-WAY mode, Cluster ALM is transmitted in parallel for DIR-A and DIR-B.

Normally Open

Control Closed

+3.3 V +3.3 VInput Port condition Normal OPEN (> 200 k ohms)

Control CLOSE (< 50 ohms)Interface circuit: photo coupler with bias circuit


2-23

2.3 Interconnection between ODU and IDU

Table 2-8 IF Cable

No. Item Specification

1 Interconnection Single coaxial cable /50 ohms

2 Standard Type of Cable 5D-FB, 8D-FB (standard), 10D-FB

3 Signals IF signal, alarms, control, monitoring and power source

4 Maximum Cable Length 150 m (5D-FB)300 m (8D-FB)350 m (10D-FB)

5 Cable Equalization Automatic level equalization

6 Guaranteed temperature range −33°C to +50°C (workable : −40°C to +55°C)

Note 1 : In case of employing hitless protection, set each length of two IF cables same or the difference of their cable length shall be less than 100 meters.

Note 2 : Salt damage (custom order) In case of operating in the sea or around the coast area (within 3 km from coastline), measure must be taken for the ODU against salt damage. Please contact NEC for the countermeasure.

Note 3 : Water Proof N type connector The waterproof N type connectors must be used for IF cable of ODU side, because DC voltage power is supplied in it.

Note 4 : IDU IF connector = TNC (Female), ODU IF connector = N (Female)

Note 5 : TNC (Male) L-angle connector for the 8D-FB IF cable is used to connect it to the IDU. When the N (Male) straight connector is attached to the 5D-FB or 10D-FB IF cable, the TNC (Male) - N (Female) L-angle adapter is used.


2-24

2.4 Hybrid Combiner/Divider

There are two types of hybrid combiner/divider used in 1+1 protected systems, one is coaxial cable connection type for 6/7/8 GHz Bands and the other is ODU Direct Mount type for 11 - 38 GHz Bands. The following NEC Hybrid Combiner/Divider is suited for Andrew or RFS Antenna, and all NEC ODUs.

6/7/8 GHz Hybrid 11 - 52 GHz Hybrid

Fig. 2-6 Hybrid

Table 2-9 Characteristics

FrequencyBand[GHz]

FrequencyRange[GHz]

1-2 PORTVariationMax.(dB)

Loss Max. (dB)

Isolation Min.(dB)

VSWR Max. Interface

(ANT Side) (ODU Side)

L6 5.925 - 6.425 0.5 3.7 20 1.3 UDR70 N ConnectorU6 6.43 - 7.11 0.5 3.7 20 1.3 UDR70 N Connector7 7.125 - 7.9 0.5 3.7 20 1.3 UDR84 N Connector8 7.7 - 8.5 0.5 3.7 20 1.3 UDR84 N Connector11 10.5 - 11.7 0.5 3.5 20 1.2

NEC original

NEC original

13 12.75 - 13.25 0.5 3.5 20 1.215 14.5 - 15.35 0.5 3.5 20 1.218 17.7 - 19.7 0.5 3.5 20 1.223 21.2 - 23.6 0.5 3.5 20 1.226 24.5 - 26.5 0.5 3.8 20 1.232 31.8 - 33.4 0.5 3.8 20 1.238 37 - 39.5 0.5 3.8 20 1.2

* Custom ordered for 28 GHz.


2-25

2.4.1 10 dB Coupler

There are two types of NEC 10 dB Coupler; one is coaxial cable connection type for 6/7/8 GHz bands and the other is ODU Direct Mount type for 11 - 38 GHz Bands. The following 10 dB Coupler is suited for Andrew or RFS Antenna, and all NEC ODUs.

6/7/8 GHz Coupler (N-Type) 11 - 38 GHz Coupler

Fig. 2-7 10 dB Coupler


Frequency Band[GHz]

Frequency Range [GHz]

1-2 PORTVariation Max.(dB)

Loss Max.(dB)

Isolation Min.(dB) VSWR Max. Interface

(ANT Side) (ODU Side)

L6/U6 5.925 - 7.125 0.5 1.2 20 1.3 UDR70 N Connector7/8 7.125 - 8.5 0.5 1.2 20 1.3 UDR84 N Connector11 10.5 - 11.7 0.5 1.2 20 1.2

NEC original NEC original

13 12.75 - 13.25 0.5 1.2 20 1.215 14.5 - 15.35 0.5 1.2 20 1.218 17.7 - 19.7 0.5 1.2 20 1.223 21.2 - 23.6 0.5 1.2 20 1.226 24.5 - 26.5 0.5 1.2 20 1.232 31.8 - 33.4 0.5 1.2 20 1.238 37 - 39.5 0.5 1.2 20 1.2

* ODU for 6/7/8 GHz: Separate Type* ODU for 11 - 38 GHz: Direct Mount Type* Custom ordered for 28 GHz.


2-26

2.4.2 OMT (Ortho-Mode Transducer)

The OMT enables dual polarization feature to double the transmission capacity for the NLite E system using the same frequency. The following NEC OMT has ODU Direct Mount type for 11-38 GHz Bands, which is suited for RFS Antenna and all NEC ODUs.

Fig. 2-8 OMT Transducer


Frequency Band[GHz]

Frequency Range [GHz]

XPD Min.[dB]

LOSS Max.[dB]

P-P ISOLATION

Min.[dB]VSWR Max. INTERFACE WG

INNER DIA. (mm)(ANT Side)

INTERFACE (ODU Side)

11 10.5 - 11.7 35 0.6 38 1.3 18.0

NEC original

13 12.75 - 13.25 35 0.6 38 1.3 15.015 14.5 - 15.35 35 0.6 38 1.3 13.5 18 17.7 - 19.7 35 0.6 38 1.3 10.5 23 21.2 - 23.6 35 0.6 38 1.3 9.0 26 24.5 - 26.5 35 0.8 38 1.3 8.0 32 31.8 - 33.4 35 1.0 38 1.3 6.538 37 - 39.5 35 1.0 38 1.3 5.5


2-27

2.5 RF Channel Plan

Radio frequencies in 6 to 38 GHz applicable to NLite E are shown in the following Table: For details of frequency range in each Sub Band RF frequency band listed below, refer to the Appendix attached in this Section 1.

Table 2-12 RF Frequencies

RF BAND [GHz] Tx-Rx Shift Frequency [MHz]L6 GHz : 5.925 - 6.425 252.04/

266U6 GHz : 6.43 - 7.11 3407 GHz : 7.125 - 7.9 154/

161/ 196/ 245

8 GHz : 7.7 - 8.5 119/ 126/ 151.614/ 154/ 266/ 294.44/ 305.56/ 310 311.32

11 GHz : 10.15 - 11.7 49013 GHz : 12.75 - 13.25 26615 GHz : 14.5 - 15.35 315/

420/ 470/ 490/ 644/ 728

18 GHz : 17.7 - 19.7 340/ 1560

23 GHz : 21.2 - 23.6 120026 GHz : 24.5 - 26.5 855/

1008/ 1123.5

28 GHz : 27.5 - 29.5 100832 GHz : 31.8 - 33.4 81238 GHz : 37 - 39.5 700/

1000/ 1260/


2-28

2.6 Power Supply

The power supply systems are shown in Fig. 2-9 (1/3) to (3/3). The DC-DC CONV module in the MODEM module produces regulated +3.6 V DC from −48 V *1 DC input for the component modules on the IDU. Also, this module supplies a −48 V DC to the ODU.

The DC V to the ODU is supplied through the coaxial cable which is also used for the IF and other signals. The PS circuit on the ODU produces +7/+8/+9/−7/−8/−9 * and −15 V DC for the component modules from the −48 V DC supplied from the IDU.

Note: *: Necessary voltages in the ODU vary depending on the ODU type.

DCINPUT (1/3)

(2/4)

ODU (NEO)

PSSELV

−48 V

TX IF

−15 V

MODEM

DC-DC

IDU

−48 V

SEP/COMB

FIL

CTRL, OC-3 INTFC, LAN INTFC, GbE INTFC

CONV

ODU INTFC

G

−48 V SEP/COMB

FILRX IF

SV/CTRL

TX IFRX IF

SV/CTRL

FUSE

PWR−7/−8/−9 V+7/+8/+9 V

−48 V

*1

*1

*2

Notes: *1: The inner voltages vary depending on the ODU type.*2: Optional

For 1+0 Configuration


+3.6 V−48 V

Fig. 2-9 Power Supply System Block Diagram (1/3)

DCINPUT (1/3)

(2/4)

ODU (NEO)

SELV

−48 V

TX IF

−15 V

MODEM

DC-DC

IDU

−48 V

SEP/COMB

FIL


CONV

ODU INTFC

G

−48 V SEP/COMB

FILRX IF

SV/CTRL

TX IFRX IF

SV/CTRL

FUSE

PWR−7/−8/−9 V+7/+8/+9 V

−48 V

*1

*1

DCINPUT (1/3)

(2/4)

ODU (NEO)

SELV

−48 V

TX IF

−15 V

MODEM

DC-DC

−48 V

SEP/COMB

FIL

CONV

ODU INTFC

G

−48 V SEP/COMB

FILRX IF

SV/CTRL

TX IFRX IF

SV/CTRL

FUSE

PWR

−7/−8/−9 V+7/+8/+9 V

−48 V

*1

*1



*2

PS

PS

+3.6 V

+3.6 V


2-29


DCINPUT

(1/3)

(2/4)

ODU (Excepting NEO)

PSSELV

(−)TX IF

−15 V

MODEM

DC-DC

IDU

−43 V

SEP/COMB

FIL


CONV

ODU INTFC

(+) −43 V SEP/COMB

FILRX IF

SV/CTRL

TX IFRX IF

SV/CTRL

FUSE

PWR+3.6 V

−7/−8/−9 V+7/+8/+9 V

−43 V

*1

*1


DC-DC CONV

(1/3)

(2/4)SELV

FUSE

PWR

FUSE

−20 to −60 V/+20 to +60 V

(1)

(2) −43 V

OUT

G

*2DC-DC CONV

*2


Connecting Other Type NLite E ODU


2-30


ROI-S05754-05AE CONTENTS August, 2007

CL-1


APPENDIX RADIO FREQUENCY PLAN FOR NLite E

CONTENTS

TITLE PAGE

L6 GHz Band ...................................................................................... A-3Table A-1 L6 GHz, Sub-band E versus Frequency Range

(TX-RX frequency spacing: 252.04 MHz): STANDARD ...................................................................... A-3

Table A-2 L6 GHz, Sub-band F versus Frequency Range (TX-RX frequency spacing: 266 MHz): OIRT.................................................................................. A-4

11 GHz Band ...................................................................................... A-5Table A-3 11 GHz, Sub-band A/B/C/D versus Frequency

(TX-RX frequency spacing: 490 MHz): STANDARD ...................................................................... A-5

18 GHz Band ...................................................................................... A-6Table A-4 18 GHz, Sub-band A versus Frequency Range

(TX-RX frequency spacing: 1560 MHz): USA/BRAZIL..................................................................... A-6

23 GHz Band ...................................................................................... A-7Table A-5 23 GHz, Sub-band A/B/C versus Frequency Range

(TX-RX frequency spacing: 1200 MHz): USA................................................................................... A-7

38 GHz Band ...................................................................................... A-7Table A-6 38 GHz, Sub-band A/B/C/D/E/F versus Frequency Range

(TX-RX frequency spacing: 1260 MHz): STANDARD ...................................................................... A-7

ROI-S05754 APPENDIX

A-1

APPENDIX RADIO FREQUENCY PLAN FOR NLite E

This provides frequency range used in each RF frequency band (6 to 38 GHz). Refer to Note 1, Note 2 and Note 3 for corresponding frequency band of the system.

SELECTABLE MODEM SYSTEM

CHANNEL SEPARATION FOR TRAFFIC CAPACITY

3.5 MHz 7 MHz 14 (13.75)* MHz 28 (27.5)* MHz

128QAM − 155 MB

Note 1:When 13 to 38 GHz band is applied, each data transmission system have to take following channel separation or more.

Usually, RF channel frequency must be assigned that is shifted a half of channel separation from Start and Stop frequency values within frequency range of Sub Band.

*: 13.75 and 27.5 MHz apply for 18 GHz.

Note 2: When 6/7/8 GHz Band is applied , the TX/RX BPFs are adjusted to the point frequency which is indicated in the ODU name plate. Therefore, to change the point frequency over the variable range the TX/RX BPFs replacement and LCT resetup are required (excepting Sub Band K/L/M/N/P)*. * When Sub Band K/L/M/N/P in 6/7/8 GHz Band is applied, RF channel frequency is assignable depending on the transmission capacity within frequency range of Sub Band as above Note 1 for 13 to 38 GHz band. Refer to start and stop frequency in the frequency table corresponded channel separation.

Note3:When 10/11 GHz Band is applied, refer to start and stop frequency in the frequency table corresponded channel separation.

APPENDIX ROI-S05754

A-2

The change of the BPF varies depending on the Frequency Band and Sub Band to be used, so contact NEC before changing the ODU Sub Band whether the change of the BPF is necessary or not.

Caution: ODUs that have been used outside should NOT be opened. Silica Gel Packs should be replaced with new ones every time the customer opens the ODU and also the air leakage test operation should be performed by using the air leakage tester (NEC made, sold separately).

Table A-1 L6 GHz, Sub-band E versus Frequency Range (TX-RX frequency spacing: 252.04 MHz): STANDARD

Table A-2 L6 GHz, Sub-band F versus Frequency Range (TX-RX frequency spacing: 266 MHz): OIRT

Table A-3 11 GHz, Sub-band A/B/C/D versus Frequency (TX-RX frequency spacing: 490 MHz): STANDARD

Table A-4 18 GHz, Sub-band A versus Frequency Range (TX-RX frequency spacing: 1560 MHz): USA/BRAZIL

Table A-5 23 GHz, Sub-band A/B/C versus Frequency Range (TX-RX frequency spacing: 1200 MHz): USA

Table A-6 38 GHz, Sub-band A/B/C/D/E/F versus Frequency Range (TX-RX frequency spacing: 1260 MHz): STANDARD

ROI-S05754 APPENDIX

A-3

1. L6 GHz Band

Table A-1 L6 GHz, Sub-band E versus Frequency Range(TX-RX frequency spacing: 252.04 MHz): STANDARD

ODU Type Sub-Band

TX Radio Point Frequency Range

RX Radio Point Frequency Range TX HIGH/LOW

NWA-009024( ) E

1 1’2 2’3 3’4 4’5 5’6 6’7 7’8 8’9 9’

10 10’11 11’12 12’13 13’14 14’15 15’16 16’

Note: It is required to define point frequency which is to be used. The BPF for 6/7/8 GHz is set to each frequency though it is within the same Sub Band. To change the point frequency, not only LCT setup, but also the change of BPF is needed.

5930.375 to 6152.750 MHz 6182.415 to 6404.790 MHz Lower Band

6182.415 to 6404.790 MHz 5930.375 to 6152.750 MHz Higher Band

TX Low TX High

RFCH TX Point Freq. RX Point Freq. RF

CHTX Point

Freq.RX Point

Freq.5930.375 6182.415 6182.415 5930.375 5945.200 6197.240 6197.240 5945.200 5960.025 6212.065 6212.065 5960.025 5974.850 6226.890 6226.890 5974.850 5989.675 6241.715 6241.715 5989.675 6004.500 6256.540 6256.540 6004.500 6019.325 6271.365 6271.365 6019.325 6034.150 6286.190 6286.190 6034.150 6048.975 6301.015 6301.015 6048.975 6063.800 6315.840 6315.840 6063.800 6078.625 6330.665 6330.665 6078.625 6093.450 6345.490 6345.490 6093.450 6108.275 6360.315 6360.315 6108.275 6123.100 6375.140 6375.140 6123.100 6137.925 6389.965 6389.965 6137.925 6152.750 6404.790 6404.790 6152.750

Table A-2 L6 GHz, Sub-band E versus Frequency Range (TX-RX frequency spacing: 252.04 MHz): MEXICO

ODU Type Sub-Band

TX Radio Point Frequency Range

RX Radio Point Frequency Range TX HIGH/LOW

NWA-009024( ) E

1 1’2 2’3 3’4 4’5 5’6 6’7 7’8 8’9 9’

10 10’11 11’12 12’13 13’14 14’15 15’16 16’17 17’18 18’19 19’20 20’21 21’22 22’23 23’24 24’

APPENDIX ROI-S05754

A-4


Note: Refer to Note.2 on the first page for 6/7/8 GHz Band.


5935.317 to 6162.633 MHz 6187.357 to 6414.673 MHz Lower Band

6187.357 to 6414.673 MHz 5935.317 to 6162.633 MHz Higher Band

TX Low TX High

RFCH TX Point Freq. RX Point Freq. RF

CH TX Point Freq. RX Point Freq.

5935.317 6187.357 6187.357 5935.3175945.200 6197.240 6197.240 5945.2005955.083 6207.123 6207.123 5955.0835964.966 6217.006 6217.006 5964.9665974.850 6226.890 6226.890 5974.8505984.733 6236.773 6236.773 5984.7335994.616 6246.656 6246.656 5994.6166004.500 6256.540 6256.540 6004.5006014.383 6266.423 6266.423 6014.3836024.266 6276.306 6276.306 6024.2666034.150 6286.190 6286.190 6034.1506044.033 6296.073 6296.073 6044.0336053.916 6305.956 6305.956 6053.9166063.800 6315.840 6315.840 6063.8006073.683 6325.723 6325.723 6073.6836083.566 6335.606 6335.606 6083.5666093.450 6345.490 6345.490 6093.4506103.333 6355.373 6355.373 6103.3336113.216 6365.256 6365.256 6113.2166123.100 6375.140 6375.140 6123.1006132.983 6385.023 6385.023 6132.9836142.866 6394.906 6394.906 6142.8666152.750 6404.790 6404.790 6152.7506162.633 6414.673 6414.673 6162.633

Table A-3 11 GHz, Sub-band A/B/C/D versus Frequency(TX-RX frequency spacing: 490 MHz): STANDARD

ODU Type Sub-Band TX Radio Point Frequency Range

RX Radio Point Frequency Range

TX HIGH/LOW

NWA-009032( )

A 10715 to 10825 MHz 11205 to 11315 MHz

Lower BandB 10835 to 10945 MHz 11325 to 11435 MHz

C 10955 to 11065 MHz 11445 to 11555 MHz

D 11075 to 11195 MHz 11565 to 11685 MHz

A 11205 to 11315 MHz 10715 to 10825 MHz

Higher BandB 11325 to 11435 MHz 10835 to 10945 MHz

C 11445 to 11555 MHz 10955 to 11065 MHz

D 11565 to 11685 MHz 11075 to 11195 MHz

ROI-S05754 APPENDIX

A-5

2. 11 GHz Band

Note: When the channel separation of 28 MHz applies in the Sub-Band A, the channel frequency must be assigned within from (Start frequency + 6 MHz) to (Stop frequency − 6 MHz).

When the channel separation of 28 MHz applies in the Sub-Band B/C/D, the channel frequency must be assigned within from (Start frequency) to (Stop frequency − 6 MHz).

Table A-4 18 GHz, Sub-band A versus Frequency Range(TX-RX frequency spacing: 1560 MHz): USA/BRAZIL



TX HIGH/LOW

NWA-009038( )

A 17700 to 18140 MHz 19260 to 19700 MHz Lower Band

A 19260 to 19700 MHz 17700 to 18140 MHz Higher Band

Table A-5 23 GHz, Sub-band A/B/C versus Frequency Range(TX-RX frequency spacing: 1200 MHz): USA



TX HIGH/LOW

NWA-009040( )

A 21200.00 to 21802.00 MHz 22400.00 to 23002.00 MHz

Lower BandB 21498.00 to 22100.00 MHz 22698.00 to 23300.00 MHz

C 21798.00 to 22400.00 MHz 22998.00 to 23600.00 MHz

A 22400.00 to 23002.00 MHz 21200.00 to 21802.00 MHz

Higher BandB 22698.00 to 23300.00 MHz 21498.00 to 22100.00 MHz

C 22998.00 to 23600.00 MHz 21798.00 to 22400.00 MHz

APPENDIX ROI-S05754

A-6

3. 23 GHz Band

Sub-Band A and C cover full band.

Table A-6 38 GHz, Sub-band A/B/C/D/E/F versus Frequency Range(TX-RX frequency spacing: 1260 MHz): STANDARD



TX HIGH/LOW

NWA-009048( )

A/D 37016.00 to 37620.00 MHz 38276.00 to 38880.00 MHz

Lower BandB/E 37316.00 to 37920.00 MHz 38576.00 to 39180.00 MHz

C/F 37616.00 to 38220.00 MHz 38876.00 to 39480.00 MHz

A/D 38276.00 to 38880.00 MHz 37016.00 to 37620.00 MHz

Higher BandB/E 38576.00 to 39180.00 MHz 37316.00 to 37920.00 MHz

C/F 38876.00 to 39480.00 MHz 37616.00 to 38220.00 MHz

ROI-S05754 APPENDIX

A-7

4. 38 GHz Band

ROI-S05750-05HE CONTENTS August, 2007

CL-1


Section III INSTALLATION AND INITIAL LINE UP

CONTENTS

TITLE PAGE

1 GENERAL ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-12 INSTALLATION •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-12.1 Packages••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-22.2 Unpacking of IDU and ODU•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-102.3 IDU Mounting •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-152.4 I/O BOARD Mounting (Optional)•••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-182.5 DC-DC CONV UNIT Mounting (Optional) ••••••••••••••••• 2-212.6 ODU Mounting••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-222.6.1 Mounting•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-24

2.7 Feeder Connection••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-652.8 Cable Termination•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-732.9 Wiring and Forming•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-1062.10 Frame Grounding••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-1102.11 Waterproof Protection••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-1133 INITIAL LINE UP••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-13.1 Start-up••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-23.2 Shut-down ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-83.3 Initial Setting•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-93.3.1 Equipment Setup ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-10

3.3.2 Provisioning Setup for SONET ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-11

3.4 Antenna Orientation ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-123.5 Lineup Test••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-27

CONTENTS ROI-S05750

CL-22 pages


ROI-S05750 NLite E GENERAL

1-1

1.NLite E GENERAL

This section provides installation and initial line up information on the NLite E used for the 6-38 GHz SONET microwave radio systems.

NLite E GENERAL ROI-S05750

1-22 pages


ROI-S05750 INSTALLATION

2-1

2. INSTALLATION

The standard installation is summarized in this section. Included herein is information on typical installation work flow and guides for IDU installation, ODU installation, Antenna (ANT) installation, waveguide connection and coaxial cable connections. The installation flow diagram is shown below.

This product is a part of radio link system, and is intended to be connected with a external antenna.

This product will be installed and operated by professional.

After installation, the professional person shall make sure that the system shall comply with the relevant limits for general public exposure specified as basic restrictions or reference levels in the council Recommendation 1999/519/EC.

Unpacking of IDU(see para 2.2)

Unpacking of ODU(see para 2.2)

ODU Mounting(see para 2.6)

IDU Mounting(see para 2.3)

Feeder Connection(see para 2.7)

Frame Grounding(see para 2.8)

Cable Termination(see para 2.10)

Waterproof Protection

(see para 2.9)

Fig. 2-1 Typical Installation Flow Diagram

INSTALLATION ROI-S05750

2-2

2.1 Packages

Each unpacked component of the [ ] GHz [ ] MB digital radio system must be checked as shown below.

CONTENS LIST DRAWING NO.

IDU and ODU Fig. 2-2

Mounting Bracket Fig. 2-3

Installation Kit Fig. 2-4 and Fig. 2-5

Note: *1 One more ODU and MODEM module are provided for HS/Twinpath configuration.

*2 One spare fuse is provided in the MODEM module.

No. DESCRIPTION

1 TRP-( )G-1B / TRP-52G-5A (ODU)

2 MDP-150MB-1AA (IDU)

3 O-Ring (Attached to the waveguide type ODU)

4 Power Connector (Molex Housing M5557-4R (x1ea) and Socket Contact (5556TL (x4 each))

5 Cylindrical Fuse ((RKS-F91000-0107) (6.3A) (x1ea) *2)

6 XPIC CTRL Cable (×1) (apply for XPIC configuration only)

7 X-IF Coaxial Cable (×2) (apply for XPIC configuration only)

31

2

4

5

6 7

FGIFLMONRX LEV

(*1)NLite E

SELV

!

AUX/ALMNMS NE

ALM

SC IN/OUT EOW

PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

NLite E NEO

LCT

OC-3 INOC-3 OUT

PULL

ALM

OC-3 INOC-3 OUT

(Blank)

ONLINEONLINE GG

G


2-3

Fig. 2-2 Contents of Basic Unit Package

No. DESCRIPTION

1 H3042K I/O BOARD Bracket

2 NWA-011060-001 DC-DC CONV UNIT (see Fig. 2-7 for details)

1

H3042K I/O BOARDSER No. DATE WEIGHT kg

MADE IN JAPAN

SELV

PWR PULL


− 43V

GOUTSTD

G

SELV

PWR PULL


− 43V

GOUTSTD

GNWA-011060-001 DC-DC CONV UNIT

SER No. DATE , WEIGHT 2.5kg

MADE IN JAPANNEC Corporation TOKYO JAPAN

1+0 System STD Input : 20 60V 3.4A 1.0A Output : − 43V 1.3A 1+1 System STD Input : 20 60V 1.3A×2 3.4A 1.0A×2 Output : − 43V

2


2-4

Fig. 2-3 Contents of Optional Unit Package

(Supplied with antenna)

3

1 2

No. DESCRIPTION

1 Pole Mounting Bracket for Coaxial Cable Connection Type (6/7/8 GHz)

2 Pole Mounting Bracket for Wave Guide connection Type

3 Pole Mounting Bracket for Antenna direct Mounting Type


2-5

Fig. 2-4 Pole Mounting Bracket


2-6

NLite E

Fig.

2-5

Ins

talla

tion

Kit

Pack

ing

List

of I

DU

and

OD

U fo

r 1+0

Sys

tem

IDU

No.

1 O

DU

SELV

!

AUX/

ALM

LCT

NMS

NESC

IN/O

UTEO

WPRO

TECT CA

LLM

MC

MAI

NTM

EMO

RY IDU

XIF

INXI

F O

UT

IF IN

/OUT

TX RX

RESE

TXP

IC C

TRL

XPIC

PWR

ODU MD/

CBL

PWR

NLite

E

PULL

MO

LEX

CO

NN

ECTO

R/ (

FEM

ALE

)LU

GD

-SU

B Ac

cess

ory

cabl

e/(M

ALE

)

D-S

UB

CO

NN

EC

TOR

/(MA

LE)

D-S

UB

CO

NN

ECTO

R/(M

ALE

)M

OD

ULA

R C

ON

NE

CTO

R/(M

ALE

)M

OD

ULA

R C

ON

NE

CTO

R/(M

ALE

)U

SB C

ON

NE

CTO

R/(M

ALE

)

FGIF

LM

ON

RX

LEV

N-P

CO

NN

ECTO

R

(MA

LE)

TNC

-P C

ON

NE

CTO

R (M

ALE

)

OC-

3 IN

OC-

3 O

UT

ALM

OC

-3 IN

TFC

IEC

169

-13

(P) C

ON

NE

CTO

RIE

C 1

69-1

3 (P

) CO

NN

EC

TOR

ALM

OC-

3 IN

OC-

3 O

UTO

NLIN

E

OC

-3 IN

TFC

(150

M)

(OPT

)

LC (

P) C

ON

NE

CTO

RLC

(P)

CO

NN

EC

TOR

LUG

(BLA

NK

)

G

G

G

Not

e: I

t is

rec

omm

ende

d th

at T

NC

(M

ale)

L-a

ngle

con

nect

or f

or t

he 8

D-F

B IF

cab

le i

s us

ed t

o co

nnec

t it t

o th

e ID

U. W

hen

the

N (M

ale)

stra

ight

con

nect

or is

atta

ched

to th

e 5D

-FB

or 1

0D-

FB IF

cab

le,

use

of th

e TN

C (M

ale)

- N

(Fem

ale)

(NJ-

TNC

P-LA

) L-a

ngle

ada

pter

is n

eede

d.

LAN

INTF

C(S

ON

EAL

M

WS

IN/O

UT10

0MPO

RT 1

PORT

210

0M

WS

ALM

WS

IN/O

UT

100M

PORT

3PO

RT4

100M

100M

PORT

1PO

RT 2

100M

ALM

2M IN

/OUT

ALM

OUT10

00BA

SE-S

X

PORT

IN

LAN

INTF

C

4P L

AN

IN

TFC

LC (

P) C

ON

NEC

TOR

LC (

P) C

ON

NE

CTO

RM

OD

ULA

R C

ON

NEC

TOR

/(MA

LE)

105

3J8A

(P) A

cces

sory

cab

le 1

053J

8A (P

) Acc

esso

ry c

able

D-S

UB

CO

NN

EC

TOR

/(MA

LE)

D-S

UB

CO

NN

EC

TOR

/(MAL

E)

D-S

UB

CO

NN

ECTO

R/(M

ALE

)

MO

DU

LAR

CO

NN

EC

TOR

/(MA

LE)

MO

DU

LAR

CO

NN

EC

TOR

/(MA

LE)

MO

DU

LAR

CO

NN

EC

TOR

/(MAL

E)

MO

DU

LAR

CO

NN

EC

TOR

/(MA

LE)

MO

DU

LAR

CO

NN

EC

TOR

/(MAL

E)

MO

DU

LAR

CO

NN

EC

TOR

/(MA

LE)

GbE

INTF

C(S

ON

ET)

(SO

NET

)

Not

e: T

he L

AN/W

S IN

TFC

whi

ch is

put

a [

M.S

] la

bel m

ay b

e in

stal

led

into

eith

er S

lot1

or

Slot

2 on

th

e ID

U in

the

SON

ET sy

stem

.

M S

Note: *1 One more ODU and MODEM module are provided for HS/Twinpath configuration.

*2 Two spare fuses are provided in the DC-DC CONV module.

No. DESCRIPTION

1 NWA-011060-001 DC-DC CONV UNIT

2 H3040 DC-DC CONV

3 Power Cable (NWM-005773-001, attached to the DC-DC CONV)

4 Power Connector (Molex Housing M5557-4R (x1ea) and Socket Contact (5556TL (x4 each))

5 Cylindrical Fuse ((CBE-006255-001) (8A) (x2 ea) *2)

SELV

PWR PULL


− 43V

GOUTSTD

G

SELV

PWR PULL


− 43V

GOUTSTD





SELV

!

AUX/ALMLCT NMS NE SC IN/OUT EOW

PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

NLite E

PULL

G

G

G

OC-3 IN OC-3 OUT

ALM

SELV

!

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

PULLG

OC-3 IN OC-3 OUT

ALM

MOLEX CONNECTOR/ (FEMALE)

MOLEX CONNECTOR/ (FEMALE)

D-SUB CONNECTOR/ (FEMALE)

D-SUB CONNECTOR/ (FEMALE)

DC-DC CONV UNIT(Optional)

4

5

1

3

RE

SER

VE

RE

SER

VE

CA

UTIO

N

HOT SURFACEAvoid contact.

!

2


2-7

Fig. 2-6 Installation Kit Packing List of DC-DC CONV UNIT for 1+1 System


2-8

2.2 Unpacking of IDU and ODU

The unpacking procedures for the IDU and ODU are shown in following chart.

• IDU : Chart 2-1• ODU : Chart 2-2

Note: When conveying the IDU or ODU to another place, the original packing should be used to avoid damage.

Chart 2-1 Unpacking Method for IDU

Step Procedure

1 Cut the p.p. tape at top of the carton (1 to 3). Then open the carton,

2 1

3


2-9

Chart 2-1 (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

2 Take out the accessories, IDU carton and cushioning materials,

CUSHIONING MATERIAL

CARTON (ACCESSORIES)

CARTON (IDU)

CUSHIONING MATERIAL (IDU)


2-10


Step Procedure

3 Remove the cushioning materials from the carton (IDU),

4 Take out the IDU wrapped with antistatic bag from the carton,

ANTISTATIC BAG IDU

CARTON (IDU)

5 Take out the IDU from the antistatic bag,

6 Inspect the IDU.


2-11

Chart 2-2 Unpacking Method for ODU

Step Procedure

1 Take off the hook of a cover as shown below. Then, open the top cover,

HOOK


2-12


Step Procedure

2 Take out cushioning material, buffer material and poly sheet,

POLY SHEET

ODU

TOP PAD

3 Take out the ODU from carton,

4 Inspect the ODU.


2-13

2.3 IDU Mounting

The installation procedure for the IDU explains in Chart 2-3. The IDU should be installed in the radio station.

Chart 2-3 Mounting Methods of the IDU

Step Procedure

1 Change the two brackets to desired position on the IDU, if necessary,

FRONT POSITION

CENTER POSITION

SIDE VIEW

1+0/1+1 SYSTEM


2-14


Step Procedure

2 Align the IDU to the mounting position on the 19-inch rack,

SCREW FLAT WASHER

SCREW FLAT WASHER

SPRING WASHER

SPRING WASHER

3 Fix each side of the IDU to the 19-inch rack with the two screws,

IDU


2-15


Step Procedure

4 To mount the IDU in a 19-inch rack, take a space more than 200 mm to the rear section and space for one unit to the top and bottom.

At least one rack unit *

At least one rack unit *

More than 200 mm *

Note: * Normal setting for free space. When free space is closed within one rack unit, keep the environment temperature is lower than +40°C.

WALL

This Page Not Used


2-16

2.4 DC-DC CONV UNIT Mounting (Optional)

The installation procedure for the DC-DC CONV UNIT (optional) explains in Chart 2-5. The DC-DC CONV UNIT(optional) should be installed in the radio station.

Chart 2-4 Mounting Methods of the DC-DC CONV UNIT

Step Procedure

1 Fix the DC-DC CONV UNIT to the 19-inch rack using the two screws.

At least 0.5 rack unit *

IDU

DC-DC CONV UNIT

SCREW

SPRINGWASHER

SCREW

FLAT

SPRINGWASHER

WASHER

2U 0.5U

IDU

DC-DC CONV UNIT

DC-DC CONV UNIT

RACKupperscrew hole

lowerscrew hole

Note: * Space 0.5 rack unit in the upper or lower DC-DC CONV UNIT.

2U

FLATWASHER

DC-DC CONV UNIT

RACK


2-22

2.6 NLite E SONET OC-3ODU Mounting

The procedures for mounting and demounting the ODU are described here. There are two types of mounting for the antenna direct mounting type and waveguide connecting type. The ODU should be installed in the radio station. The tools for installation are listed in Table 2-1.

Caution 1. How to use small and large O-rings are shown in following table. Two (small and large) O-rings are attached in 18 to 38 GHz band Andrew/RFS direct mount antenna. 11/13/15 GHz band antenna does not have small O-ring (Small O-ring is not used for Andrew/RFS direct mount antenna). If the small O-ring is used for ODU direct mount installation, a gap may occur between ODU and antenna for RF interface. Therefore it may happen transmit or receive level down.

Caution 2. Do not apply silicon grease at O-ring.

Notes:11/13/15 GHz antenna for direct mount is not possible to connect the ordinary waveguide flanges.

Table 2-1 Tools

TOOLS

Wrench or Monkey wrench

Screwdriver

Torque Wrench

SYSTEMATTACHENENT POSITION OF

O-RING (BETWEEN:)

O-RINGREMARKS

SMALL SIZE LARGE SIZE

1+0ANT ⎯ ODU Not used Used Antenna direct mounting

ANT ⎯ WG/ODU(18-38 GHz BAND)

Used Not used Waveguide connection

1+1ANT ⎯ HYB Not used Used Antenna direct mounting

ANT ⎯ WG/HYB(18-38 GHz BAND)

Used Not used Waveguide connection


2-23

Notes: 1. Do not use both small O-ring and large O-ring simultaneously.

2. O-ring size is different with frequency band as follows:

POSITION OF LARGE SIZE O-RING

POSITION OF SMALL SIZE O-RING

FOR WAVEGUIDE CONNECTION FOR ANTENNA DIRECT MOUNTING

ANDREW ANTENNA


POSITION OF SMALL SIZE O-RING

FOR WAVEGUIDE CONNECTION FOR ANTENNA DIRECT MOUNTING

RFS ANTENNA

32mm

35mm

LARGE SIZE O-RING FOR ANTENNA DIRECT MOUNTING

26 GHz BAND

40mm

10-11 GHz BAND 13-23 GHz BAND

4 m

m

4 m

m

4 m

m

18/23 GHz BAND 32/38 GHz BAND

15.6m

m

SMALL SIZE O-RING FOR WAVEGUIDE CONNECTION

10.8m

m

1.8

mm

1.8

mm


2-24

2.6.1 Mounting

The method of mounting is listed in Table 2-2 to Table 2-4.

Table 2-2 Antenna Direct Mounting

Change of Polarization ODU/Bracket HYB TX SPAN

ATT OMT

Chart 2-6ANT/ODU/HYB/TX SPAN ATT

Chart 2-7 Chart 2-8 Chart 2-9 Chart 2-11

Table 2-3 Waveguide Connection

Using 1+1 HYB 1+0 or Connecting Two Antennas

Chart 2-10 Chart 2-12

Table 2-4 Coaxial Cable Connection

With/Without HYB

Chart 2-13


2-25

Chart 2-6 Change of Polarization (Antenna Direct Mounting)

Step Procedure

CHANGE OF POLARIZATION

ODU DIRECT MOUNTING TYPE ANTENNA (Example (ANDREW) 1/2)

Note: The details are referred to the installation manual which is attached to the antenna. The installation or removal of the antenna requires qualified experienced personnel.

Note: The antenna is set to V-polarization when shipped from the factory.

1 Keep the antenna stand horizontally,

2 If you change to H polarization, loosen the four screws with the Allen key wrench and then rotate the Transition hub of feed, keeping the antenna stand horizontal.

Transition hub

2 SCREWS

2 SCREWS


2-26


Step Procedure

Note: Do not remove the screw complete from the screw hole. Hold the feed horn with hand.

3 Holding the feed with hand, rotate the feed 90 degrees,

Check that the aperture part of the Transition hub is rotated 90 degrees, then fix it with the screws that were loosened in step 2,

4 Check that the aperture part of the Transition hub is rotated 90 degrees, then fix it with the screws that were loosened in step 2

Note: When a large and a small gasket are included in the antenna package. Please use the large one (The small gasket is not used in antenna mount)

Polarization V

Polarization H

Top Top


2-27


Step Procedure


ODU DIRECT MOUNTING TYPE ANTENNA (Example (ANDREW) 2/2)



1. Keep the antenna stand horizontally,

2. Loosen six screws with Allen wrench until transition can rotate freely,

Note: Do not remove the screw complete from the screw hole.

Note: Because of the screwtight is applied, the strength to loosen screw is necessary.

3 Rotate the transition hub 90 degrees until timing pin locates in timing concavity,


2-28


Step Procedure

Tighten six screws when transition hub is located. (Tightening torque is 5.0 N·m ± 10%.)

Vertical Polarized Application Horizontally Polarized Application

Transition hub

Transition hub

Timing PinTransition Hub


2-29


Step Procedure


ODU DIRECT MOUNTING TYPE ANTENNA (Example (RFS))



RFS SB1

1. Unscrew the 4 screws M3 at the refined steel ring,

2. Hold the feed tightly at the waveguide,3. Rotate carefully the feed 90 degrees,4. Mount the feed to the refined steel ring

and lock the 4 screws M3.

1. Loosen the 4 screws M3,2. Hold the feed tightly at the waveguide,3. Rotate the casting plate carefully the

feed 90 degrees,4. Lock the 4 screws M3.

RFS C-Mount

Drain PlugDrain Plug

4 screws (M3)

Polarization V Polarization H


2-30


Step Procedure

CHANGE OF POLARIZATION OF THE HYB

NEC HYBRID

Note:The hybrid is set to V-polarization when shipped from the factory.

1 If you change the polarization from V to H, loosen two screws, rotate the transition hub and put it to the HYB.

1Note: There are two types NEC HYBRID. One uses two pieces transition hubs and another uses one piece.

2 Then fix it with the two screws that were loosened in step 1.

TRANSITIONHUB

V POLARIZATION

GUIDE PIN

HYB

V POLARIZATION H POLARIZATION

Two Pieces Transition Hub Type

H POLARIZATIONV POLARIZATION

One Piece Transition Hub Type(Only for 13/15/18/23 GHz HYBRID)

M2.6(2ea)

Cross- Recessed Head Machine Screw

Cross-RecessedHead Machine Screw

M2.6 (2ea)


2-31


Step Procedure

Quasar HYBRID

Note: The hybrid is set to V-polarization when shipped from the factory.

1 If you change to H polarization, loosen two screws, rotate the antenna connection unit and put the HYB horizontally.

2 Check that the aperture of the connection unit is rotated as shown below, then fix it with the two screws that were loosened in step 1.

HYB

ANTENNACONNECTION UNIT

V POLARIZAION

GUIDE PIN

SCREW

Quasar HYB

V POLARIZATION

H POLARIZATION


2-32


Step Procedure

CHANGE OF POLARIZATION OF THE TX SPAN ATT

TX SPAN ATT

Note: The TX ATT is set to V-polarization when shipped from the factory.

1 If you change to H polarization, loosen two screws, rotate the antenna connection unit and put the TX ATT horizontally.

2 Check that aperture of the connection unit is rotated as shown below, then fix it with the two screws that were loosened in step 1.

TX ATT

ANTENNACONNECTION UNIT

V POLARIZATION

GUIDE PIN

Cross-Recessed Head Machine Screw

M2.6(2ea)

Plate-2

Plate-1

H POLARIZATIONV POLARIZATION38 GHz Band TX SPAN ATT Polarization Change


2-33

NLite EStep Procedure

CHANGE OF POLARIZATION OF THE ODU

1. When vertical polarization is required, rotate the ODU so as to go up the plate marked V,

2. When horizontal polarization is required, remove the guide pin fixed on the plate marked with V,

3. Screw in the guide pin removed in step 2 to the screw hole of the plate marked H,

4. Rotate the ODU so as to go up the plate marked H,

PLATE MARKED WITH V

UP

V POLARIZATION

PLATE MARKED WITH H

UP

H POLARIZATION

FGIFLMONRX LEV

FGIFL

MO

NR

X LEV

GUIDE PIN

PLATE MARKED WITH VGUIDE PIN

PLATE MARKED WITH H

Antenna Mounting ODU (11-38 GHz Band)

Note: When the ODU is mounted on to the NEC HYB, only V polarization is applied.

Note: When the Waveguide or coaxial cable is connected between the ODU and antenna, the ODU in V polarization for up position is recommended for installation.

V/H Polarization Conversion10-38 GHz ODU

NLite E

NLite E


2-34

Chart 2-7 ODU Antenna Direct Mounting (11 - 38 GHz)

Step Procedure

ANTENNA DIRECT MOUNTING (10-38 GHz Band ODU)

Note: The details are referred to the installation manual which is attached to the antenna.

INSTALLATION OF BRACKET

1 Install the bracket to the antenna pole,

2 Mount antenna to the bracket,

ANDREW POLE MOUNT BRACKET

WASHERLOCK WASHER

NUT*WASHER

* Tightening torque of 22 N·m for M10.

Three(3) screws* (Apply screwtight to threads before fitting to antenna)

NUT*

PROTECTIVE CAPLOCK WASHER

Three(3) screws* (Apply screwtight to threads before fitting to antenna)


2-35


Step Procedure


RFS SB1 TYPE BRACKET


2-36


Step Procedure

Note: The values in the following table are valid for screws and bolts which have been greased according to the installation instructions.

Torques for RFSBolt M5 5 Nm

M6 8 NmM8 17 NmM10 35 NmM12 50 Nm

U-Bolt, V-Bolt (Pipe mount & safety collar) M10 20 NmHexagonal brass nut of fine adjustment (Azimuth, Elevation) M8 5 Nm

M10 10 NmM12 17 Nm

Hexagonal socket stainless steel screws (Feed systems install on aluminium mounting plate) M3 0.2 NmM4 0.4 Nm

ExceptionsFixing screw of the azimuth fine adjustment spindle M8 x 30 8 Nm

M12 x 55 17 NmSpecial application: NOT greased

Fixing screw of the plastic radome B4.2 3 Nm


2-37


Step Procedure


Pipe diameter: 48-114mm

RFS C-Mount TYPE BRACKET

MOUNT ASSEMBLY (RFS C-Mount Type)


2-38


6

7


2-39


Step Procedure

3 Fix the ODU to the bracket by tightening the M6 screws (four locations),

Notes: 1. Figure shows V polarization.2. Be careful not to damage the O-ring (Antenna).3. The tightening torque is 4.0 N·m ± 10%.

O-RING

HOLE FOR GUIDE PIN

ODU

O-RING

HOLE FOR GUIDE PIN

ODU

ANDREW VHLP TYPE BRACKET


2-40



RFS SB1 TYPE BRACKET

O-RING

HOLE FOR GUIDE PIN

ODU

Note: Set the ODU to the bracket after polarization of the ODU is confirmed.

O Ring


HOLE FOR GUIDE PIN


2-41


Step Procedure

4. Insert guide pin on the hole of bracket to set the position of screws,

GUIDE PIN

Caution: Align flanges on antenna and ODU correctly, and fix the ODU with four screws.

ODU

ODU FLANGEANTENNA FLANGE

ANTENNA

5. Fix the ODU to the bracket with four screws.

Note: Torque: 4.0 N·m ± 10%

SCREWS

SCREWS


2-42

1+1 SD System

POLE

POLE

(S) MEMBER OF TOWER

1+0 System

MEMBER OF TOWER

POLE

Note: Antenna separation (S) is given by path calcuration depending on the system parameter.

No.1 ODU

No.2 ODU

ODU


2-43

Chart 2-8 NLite E SONET OC-3Antenna Direct Mounting Using HYBRID

Step Procedure

ANDREW VHLP TYPE BRACKET

MOUNTING HOLE FORHYB

HOLE FOR GUIDE PIN

The tightening torque is 4.0 N·m ± 10%. Be careful not to damage the O-ring(Antenna).

MOUNTING

Note: The details are referred to the installation manual which is attached to the antenna.

O-RING


2-44


Step Procedure

Note: The tightening torque is 4.0 N·m ± 10%. Be careful not to damage the O-ring (Antenna).

HOLE FOR GUIDE PIN

O-RING

RFS SB1 TYPE BRACKET RFS C-Mount TYPE BRACKET

MOUNTING HOLE FOR HYB

O-RING

HOLE FOR GUIDE PIN

MOUNTING HOLE FOR HYB


2-45


Step Procedure

1 Fix the bracket and handle to the HYB used for 11-52 GHz ODU.

2 Check the polarization and install the HYB to the antenna by tightening the M6 screws (four locations).

M5 HEAD CAP SCREW

Note: Tightening torque is 3.0 N·m ± 10%.

PUSH


M5X12(10ea)

Bracket

Hybrid

Handle M5 HEAD CAP SCREW

For 2 screws Type Bracket

For 4 screws Type Bracket


2-46


Step Procedure

3 Insert the O-rings to the two ODU ports of the HYB.

4 Install the two ODUs with hex screws (four locations) using the Allen key wrench.

Note: Be careful not to damage the O-rings (Hybrid).

ANT

FLAT WASHER M6 SCREWGUIDE PIN

O-ring

SHORT PLATE

MOVE THE SHORT PLATEHYB

ODU PORTO-ring


Note: Be careful not to damage the O-ring.

O-ring

ODU

O-ring

ODU

ODU

For 11-52 GHz ODU



2-47


Step Procedure

DEMOUNTING

FROM HYB

1 Remove the four (or six) fixed bolts from the ODU.

2 Then demount the ODU.

Note: When demounting the ODU from HYB, mount the attached SHORT PLATE to the demounted port of the HYB to avoid RF power leaking from the hybrid and for waterproofing.

MOUNTING SHORT PLATE TO THE ODU PORT

MOUNTING HOLE FOR SHORT PLATE

SHORT PLATE



2-48

Chart 2-9 Antenna Direct Mounting Using TX SPAN ATT

Step Procedure

MOUNTING

TX SPAN ATT

Step Procedure

1 Check the polarization of the antenna connection unit of the TX ATT (Refer to CHANGING POLARIZATION description for the TX ATT.)

2 Fix the TX ATT to the antenna by tightening the M6 screws (four locations).

Antenna Connection Unit

TX ATT

Antenna

Guide Pin

TX ATT

Flat Washer M6 (4ea)

Packing (Supplied by Antenna)

Installation to antenna

1 2

3 4Note; Tightening torque (M6) is 4.0 N·m ± 10%.

Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw M6 x 30 (4ea)

38 GHz Band ODU Mounting Using NEC TX SPAN ATT (1/2)

Tighten the each screw equally and carefully by wrench at diagonal position.

38A


2-49


Step Procedure

3 Insert the O-rings to port of the ODU.

4 Fix the ODU with hex screws (four locations) using the Allen key wrench.

Note: Be careful not to damage the O-rings (TX ATT).

Attachment of ODU

Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw M6(Supplied by NEC with ODU)

O-Ring(Packing)

O-Ring(Packing)

ODU Connection Unit

NEC ODU

TOP VIEW

SIDE VIEW

TX ATTODU

Antenna

TOP

TX ATT

ODU should be attached by turning “V” up.


38 GHz Band ODU Mounting Using NEC TX SPAN ATT (2/2)

38A


2-50

Chart 2-10 11-38 GHz Band ODU Mounting with HYB (Waveguide Connection)

Step Procedure

WAVEGUIDE CONNECTION FOR 1+1 HYB

Notr:*For 4 screws Type Bracket

1 Assemble the bracket and handle to the HYB.

No. Parts Name Q’ty

1 Hybrid (Waveguide Flange Interface Type) 1

2 Bracket 2

3 Handle 1

4 O-ring (for ODU) 2

5 O-ring (for Waveguide) 1

6 M5 × 12 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw (SS) 10(14)*

7 M3 ×10 Hexagon Head Screw with Washer (×4) (SS) 4

M5 HEAD CAP SCREW



2-51


Step Procedure

2 Assemble parts of the pole mounting bracket used to mount the HYB,

No. Parts Name Q’ty

1 Mount Arm 2

2 Mount Holder 2

3 Truss 1

4 M12 × 200 Hexagon Head Screw with Nut (×2), Flat Washer (×2)(ST) 4

5 M6 ×25 Hexagon Head Screw with Nut (x1), Flat Washer (×2), Spring Washer (SS) 4

6 M6 × 35 Hexagon Head Screw with Nut ( ×2), Flat Washer (×2)(SS) 4

Mount Arm

Truss

Mount Holder

M12 × 200 Screw


2-52


Step Procedure

3 Screw the Mount Arm and the Truss with the M6 × 25 Screw, Flat Washer (×2), Spring Washer (1), Nut, at four positions,

Tightening Torque

M6 4.0 N·m ± 10%

M12 47 N·m ± 10%

Mount Arm

Mount Arm

M6x25 Screw, Nut, Flat Washer x 2Spring Washer

Truss

Truss

Ab.144.3 mm

Mount ArmTruss

M6 x 25 Screw

Flat WasherSpring Washer

Flat Washer

Nut


2-53


Step Procedure

4 Determine centre off set,

5 Fit the guide pin of the HYB to the Guide Pin Hole of the Mount Arm,

6 Install the HYB onto the bracket with the M6 × 35 Screw, Flat Washer (×2), Nut (×2), at four positions,

Mounting PipeMounting Pipe

Centre Off SetCentre Off Set

Guide Pin Hole(HYB Top)

Guide Pin Hole(HYB Top)


2-54


Step Procedure

HYB

M6x35 Screw, Nut x 2

Flat Washer x 2

HYB Top

M6x35 Screw

Flat Washer

NutNut

Flat Washer

HYB

Guide Pin

Short Plate

Note: When either Main or Standby ODU is removed, attach the short plate over the ODU port. Tightening torque is 3.0 N·m ± 10%.

ODU PortShort Plate

ODU Port

Mount ArmM6 x 35 Screw

Flat Washer

Flat Washer

NutNut

HYB


2-55


Step Procedure

7 Install the HYB to the mounting pole using the M12 × 200 Screw, Flat Washer, Nut,

Mount Holder Pole Diameter: ø50 to ø115mm

Mount Holder


Flat Washer x 2


Flat Washer x 2

Mount Holder

M12 x 200 Screw

Flat Washer

Flat Washer

NutNut

HYB

Mounting Pole

Mount HolderFlat Washer

NutNut

Flat WasherM12 x 200 Screw

Mounting Pole

Guide Pin Hole


2-56


Step Procedure

8 Adjust direction of the Bracket for Waveguide Port of the HYB orientation,

9 Confirm the ODU Type, which is Master or Slave,

Caution: The same type must be installed onto the HYB.

Tighten double nut after orientation for waveguide connection has been decided.

Double Nut tighteningDetermination of the attachment direction.

Waveguide Port

HYB


2-57


Step Procedure

10 Install the ODU onto the HYB,

Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw

Main ODU

O-ring

Note: The ODU should be attached by turning the plate marked “V” up position for both Main ODU and Standby ODU.

Standby ODU

O-ring

Guide PinMark V to Top

Mark V to Top

(Top View)

(Top View)

Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw

Guide Pin


2-58


Step Procedure

11 Connect the flexible waveguide (WG) to the ODU and fix the waveguide to the ODU with four (4) bolts.

Note: Before connecting the WG to the antenna, confirm which polarization is applied to the Master and Slave ODU.

O-ring

WG PortHYB

Mounting Pole

Pole Mounting Bracket

HYB

WG

Note:Be careful not to damage the O-ring.

Main ODU

Standby ODU



2-59

Chart 2-11 11-38 GHz Band ODU Mounting with OMT (Antenna Direct Mounting)

Step Procedure

This section explains the installation of the OMT for XPIC system.

There are two types of O-rings for antenna mounting to the OMT depending on the frequency band.

Caution : Do not apply silicon grease to O-ring.

Notes: 1. O-ring size is different with frequency band as follows:


FOR ANTENNA DIRECT MOUNTING RFS ANTENNA


FOR ANTENNA DIRECT MOUNTING ANDREW ANTENNA

32mm

35mm

LARGE SIZE O-RING FOR ANTENNA DIRECT MOUNTING26-38 GHz BAND13-23 GHz BAND

4 m

m

4 m

m

40mm

10-11 GHz BAND

4 m

m

13-23 GHz BAND 38 GHz BAND

15.6m

m

SMALL SIZE O-RING FOR WAVEGUIDE CONNECTION

10.8m

m

1.8

mm

1.8

mm


2-60


Step Procedure

For the antenna direct mounting of the ODU, following OMT is used in the XPIC system.

Caution : For connecting the OMT to the antenna, the circular type waveguide flange of the antenna is applied to the XPIC system. When the V/H flange is mounted to the antenna, it must be changed to a circular type.

Caution : When mounting the ODU to the OMT, confirm the polarization for Main Master and SUB Master ODU. The installation of the corresponding ODUs in the opposite station must have the same polarization in order to make into line Main Master and SUB Master MODEMs.

FREQUENCY BAND

FREQUENCYRANGE (GHz)

OMTCODE No.

INTERFACE WG INNER DIA.(mm)

(ANT Side)

INTERFACE(ODU Side)

11G 10.7 −11.7 GHz G9380A 18.0 R100

13G 12.75 −13.25 GHz G9381A 15.0 R140

15G 14.5 −15.35 GHz G9382A 13.5 R140

18G 17.7 −19.7 GHz G9383A 10.5 R220

23G 21.2 −23.6 GHz G9384A 9.0 R220

26G 24.5 −26.5 GHz G9385A 8.0 R260

32G 31.8 −33.4 GHz G9387A 6.5 R320

38G 37 −39.5 GHz G9388A 5.5 R320


2-61


Step Procedure

1 Fix the bracket and handle to the OMT.

2 Fix the OMT to the antenna by tightening them with M6 screws (four locations),

M5 HEAD CAP SCREW


ANT

FLAT WASHER M6 M6 SCREWGUIDE PIN

O-ringSHORT PLATE

MOVE THE SHORT PLATE

SCREW

Note: Tightening torque is 4.0 N·m ± 10%. Note: Be careful not to damage the O-ring.



2-62


Step Procedure

3 Loosen the two screws and move the short plate if it is fixed to the ODU port. (see figure in step 9),

4 Set the two ODUs to vertical polarization for OMT mounting. If the guide pin behind the plate marked H is mounted, remove the guide pin,

Note: The ODU should be attached by turning the plate marked "V" up position for both Main Master ODU and SUB Master ODU.

5 Insert the guide pin removed in step 4 behind the plate marked V,

Note: Remove the protection metallic plate covering the waveguide hole on ODU.

GUIDE PIN

PLATE MARKED WITH V

Main Master Sub Master

PLATE MARKED WITH V

UP

FGIFLMONRX LEV

FGIFLMONRX LEV

NLite E NLite E


2-63


Step Procedure

6 Insert the O-rings to the two ODU ports of the OMT (see figure in step 9),

7 Insert the guide pin into the hole of the OMT and set the position of screws,

8 Confirm which polarization is applied to the Master ODU. Check the indication of polarization on the upper side of OMT.

9 Fix the two ODUs with hex screws (four locations) using the allen key wrench,

Note: Be careful not to damage the O-rings.

GUIDE PIN

O-ring

ODU

O-ring

ODU

ODU

HEX SCREWHPOLARIZATIONSIDE

VPOLARIZATIONSIDE

HEX SCREW



2-64


Step Procedure

Cautions: 1. Tighten all screws with lighter torque at first, then full torque as specified.

2. When either ODU is demounting for ODU replacing or other reasons, fix the attached short plate to the demounted port of the OMT to avoid leaking of RF power from the OMT and for waterproof.

3. To avoid occurrence of bit errors due to microphonic properties, when installing the SUB Master ODU, protect the Main Master ODU from mechanical knocks.

FIXED SHORT PLATE TO THE ODU PORT

FIXING HOLE FOR SHORT PLATE

SHORT PLATE



2-65

2.7 Feeder Connection

The connection method of the waveguide type ODU is described in following procedure.

Chart 2-12 Wave Guide Connection

Step Procedure

1 Mount a waveguide to the ODU, fix the waveguide to the ODU with four bolts.

WASHER

O- RING

WAVEGUIDEBOLT (M4)SPRING WASHER

THIN NUTTHICK NUT

SPRING WASHER

FLAT WASHER

U-BOLT

MOUNTING BRACKET

M6Tightening torque: 4.0 N·m ± 10%



Notes: 1. Use suitable flange adapter between ODU and waveguide depending on the waveguide type.

2. Connection of the waveguide is the same way as ODU is wall mounted or 19-inch rack mounted.

The wave guide for the antenna direct mounting type ODU is flange adapter is required. Refer to the following procedure.


2-66


Step Procedure

1 Mount the attachment with adapter to the ODU bracket using ten bolts,

ATTACHMENT

SPRING WASHER

WASHER

ODU BRACKET

PBR ADAPTER

Note: Color of adapter is white.

BOLT (M5 ×10)

Tightening torque: 3.0 N·m ± 10%.

2 Loosen eight nuts and remove the two U-bolts from the ODU bracket,

U-BOLTODU BRACKET

NUT


2-67


Step Procedure

3 Mount the ODU bracket to the pole with two U-bolts,

ODU BRACKET

U-BOLT

POLE

FLAT WASHERSPRING WASHER

THIN NUT (M10)THICK NUT (M10)

Tightening torque: 34.0 N·m ± 10%

Note: The diameter of the pole is from 48.5 to 114.5 millimeters.

4 Mount the ODU to the ODU bracket with attached four bolts (Align the guide pins on the ODU and the guide holes on the bracket),

ODU BRACKET

Antenna direct mounting type ODU with NEC special flange.

O-RING (Note)

GUIDE PIN




2-68


Step Procedure

5. Make sure that the ODU and the ODU bracket are fixed at specified values.

6 Mount the waveguide to the ODU with four bolts.

BOLT (M4)SPRING WASHER

WASHER O-RING

WAVEGUIDEWITH PBR( ) FLANGE


Note: Be careful not to damage the O-ring attached to the PBR adapter.


2-69

Chart 2-13 ODU Mounting for Connecting Coaxial Cable

Step Procedure

6/7/8 GHz ODU MOUNTING (Connecting Coaxial Cable)

1. Mount the bracket to the pole, point to the opposite station and tighten it with two U-bolts,

Note:The diameter of pole is from 48.5 to 114.5 millimeters.

THIN NUTTHICK NUT

SPRING WASHER

FLAT WASHER

U-BOLT

MOUNTING BRACKET

2. Mount the ODU on to the bracket and tighten four bolts (M6) at upper and lower parts of the ODU,M6

3. Check that the ODU and the bracket are fixed firmly,




2-70


Step Procedure

4. Connect the Coaxial cable to the RF IN/OUT connector of the ODU,

5. Down the cable fix bracket to fix the Coaxial cable, then tighten the two bolts,

6. Install the Coaxial cables between the antenna and ODU.

Note: Fix the coaxial cable to the pole or member with cable hanger or cable ties after antenna orientation has been completed.

Caution: Wrap the coaxial cable connection points with a self-bonding tape for waterproof.


COAXIALCABLE

ODUBRACKET

TIGHTEN BOLTS (M5)

POLE

ODU

COAXIALCABLE

Tightening torque: 3.0 N·m± 10%

O-Ring

ANTENNAWasher

Spring Washer

Bolt (M4)Transducer


Nut

(When the wave guide flange is provided to the antenna port, fit the transducer with eight bolts.)

Caution

When connecting the IF cable to the ODU, tighten the N-male connector with engage connector nut only using fingers and holding the cable with another hand.

Tighten the engage connector nut only for the L-angle connector also.

(Tightening Torque : 0.7 to 1.2 N•m (7 to 12 kg•cm))

ODU

ODU

IF CABLE

IF CABLE

ODU

IF CABLE

Straight Type

L-Angle Type

L Angle Type

If rotate other parts of the L-angle connector as illustrated left, it can cause connector damage.


2-71


2-72


Step Procedure

POLE

No.1 ODU

No.2 ODU

HYB

BOLTANT

N-Type *

COAXIALCABLE*

Note: * When coaxial cable with SMA connector is used, the connectors are supplied by NEC.

USING HYB FOR 1+1 SYSTEM

SIDE VIEW

Caution: Wrap the coaxial cable connection points with a self-bonding tape for waterproof.

COAXIALCABLE

ODU

BRACKET

TIGHTEN BOLTS (M5)


Tightening torque: 3.0 N·m± 10%


2-73

2.8 Cable Termination

In this section, list of tools and material and the method for cable termination method are described. The following cables are described for reference.

• D-sub connector (refer to Chart 2-14)*• TNC-P connector of the L angle type for IDU (refer to Chart 2-15)**• N-P connector of the L angle type for ODU (KOMINE made) (refer

to Chart 2-16)**• N-P connector of the L angle type for ODU (HIROSE made) (refer to

Chart 2-17)**• N-P connector of the straight type for ODU (HIROSE made) (refer to

Chart 2-18)**• N-P connector of the straight type for ODU (KOMINE made) (refer

to Chart 2-19)**• Molex 5557-04R connector (refer to Chart 2-20)• BNC connector soldering type (refer to Chart 2-21)• BNC connector crimping type (refer to Chart 2-22)• D-Sub High Density Crimp Contacts assembly (refer to Chart 2-23)*

Notes: 1. *Use D-sub connectors of less than 16 mm in height as illustrated below.

HEIGHT

D-SUB CONNECTOR

2. *Use D-sub 44-pins connector for the CTRL of less than 57 mm in width as illustrated below.

D-SUB 44 PIN CONNECTOR for the CTRL

WIDTH

3. **In 1+1 system, the difference between the No.1 channel IF cable length and the No.2 channel IF cable length should be within 100m. (differential absolute delay time : within 500 ns).

Note: Use shielded cables which are connected to the D-Sub/RJ-45 connector to suppress interference from affecting the signal and to reduce electromagnetic radiation which may interfere with other signal cables.


2-74

The tools and materials summarized in Table 2-5 are necessary.

Table 2-5 Tools and Material List

No. NAME REMARKS1 Soldering Iron2 Solder3 Knife4 Measure/Ruler5 Wire Stripper6 Adjustable Wrench

7 Hand Crimping Tool

CL250-0012-2/CL250-0013-5

For D-Sub connector

57026-5000/ 57027-5000

For Molex connector

09 99 000 0596/ 09 99 000 0513

For D-Sub High density connector


2-75

Chart 2-14 Terminating Supervisory Cables with D-Sub Connector

Step Procedure

1 Strip back the cable sheath, taking care not to damage the braided shield.

50 mm

CABLE

Note: Use shielded cables which are connected to the D-Sub connector to suppress interference from affecting the signal and to reduce electromagnetic radiation which may interfere with other signal cables.

2 Fold back the braided shield (do not separate the strands) and trim it as shown.

WIRE

3 Remove 4 mm of insulation from the end of the wire.

CONFORMABLE WIRE SOCKET CONTACT

AWG#20-24 :CD-PC-111

AWG#24-28 :CD-PC-121

WIRE4 mm


2-76


Step Procedure

4 Insert the cable into the socket contact.

WIRE SOCKET CONTACT

5 The cable should be fitted so that insulation and bare wire are arranged as shown.

6 Insert the socket contact into the hand crimping tool.

CONFORMING WIRE SOCKET CONTACT

AWG#20-24 :TC-CD-111

AWG#24-28 :TC-CD-121

HAND CRIMPING TOOL(HRS TC-CD-111/TC-CD-121)


2-77


Step Procedure

7 Recheck that the wire position is as shown in step 5 before crimping the socket contact (see illustration below).

WIRE SIDE

SOCKET CONTACT

WIRE

8 Wind the metallic shield tape over the braided shield.

METALLIC SHIELD TAPE

9 Set the cable into the plug case as shown in figure below. Then, fix the cable using the cable clamper and two screws.

CABLE CLAMPER

PLUG CASE


2-78


Step Procedure

10 Referring to circle A, fix the drain wire with screw.

11 Referring to circle B, insert each wire to the specified position (Refer Interface Terminals and Jacks for IDU in Section II OPERATING EQUIPMENT.). Insert the socket contacts into the upper and lower row positions while taking care that the socket contacts are inserted the right way.

CIRCLE A

SCREW

DRAIN WIRE

CIRCLE B


2-79


Step Procedure

12 Fix the plug case with two screws, as shown in the figure.

SCREW

PLUG CASE


2-80

Chart 2-15 Terminating IF Coaxial Cable with TNC-P Connector (L Angle Type) (HIROSE made) used for IDU IF IN/OUT

Step Procedure

Note: It is recommended that TNC (Male) L-angle connector for the 8D-FB IF cable is used to connect it to the IDU. When the N (Male) straight connector is attached to the 5D-FB or 10D-FB IF cable, use of the TNC (Male) - N (Female) (NJ-TNCP-LA) L-angle adapter is needed.

1 Pass the tightening nut, the washer and the gasket on the cable in the order shown in the figure. Then, strip the cable jacket in the diameter shown in the figure. [Applicable cable : 8D-FB-E]

Note: Be careful of insertion direction for the gasket and the tightening nut.Note: Be careful not to damage the outer conductor.Note: Do not reuse the gasket because the clamp deforms it after

tightening.

2 Insert the clamp to clamp the stripped cable jacket end. Open the end of the outer conductor a little,

3 Insert the hood between the plastic tape with aluminium foil and the outer conductor,

ClampHood

Note: Use the insertion stick to open the hole of about φ9. No gap is allowed in between the clamp, the outer conductor and the hood.


2-81


Step Procedure

4 After inserting the hood, cut off the plastic tape with aluminium foil and the dielectric at A-surface,

5 Cut off the part of the outer conductor exceeding the clamp rim with a knife,

6 Check that distance between the tip of the center conductor and A-surface is 6 to 7 mm, If it is more than 7 mm, cut the center conductor to correct length,

Clamp

Note: Be careful not to damage the center conductor,

Note: Chamfer at the tip of the center conductor,

Note: There shall be no evidence of deviation or deformation or burr at the tip of the center conductor.


2-82


Step Procedure

7 Insert the insulation washer over the center conductor, and engage it with the F/F contact,

Note: No gap is allowed in between the F/F contact, the insulation washer, and the dielectric.

Note: The assembly unit after the completion of this process is called “block”.

8 Combine the convex part of the clamp to the concave part of the gasket, Then insert this block to the shell,

Note: Insert the hood until it hits the B-surface.


2-83


Step Procedure

9 Tighten the tightening nut sufficiently until the gasket is cut by the clamp and the tip of the clamp hits the washer,

Note: Torque for the tightening nut shall be 8 to 30N•m.

Note: When tightening the nut, tighten with wrench at the wrench at the wrench flat.

Note: Distance between the tightening nut and the LP shell is 1.85 to 2.1 mm for reference. Tighten the nut sufficiently.

L-type dimension and cutting length of the cable.

Specified length L: Cutting length L−25.


2-84

Chart 2-16 Terminating Coaxial (IF Signal) with N-P Connector (L Angle Type) used for ODU IF IN/OUT (KOMINE made)

Step Procedure


1 First fit the tying metal, washer and gasket on the cable.

GASKET WASHER TYING METALCABLE

2 Strip back the cable sheath, taking care not to damage the braided shield, and fit the clamp.

CLAMP

9 mm

3 Fold back the braided shield (separating the strands of the braid) and trim it.

Note: Pay attention not to damage the plait.

4 Insert the ferrule.

FERRULE


2-85


Step Procedure

5 Fit the bushing.

BUSH

6 Cut the aluminium foil and inner insulator away along the bushing and retain the inner conductor.

7 Taper the edge of the center conductor using a file as shown in the enlarged view below.

Note: Pay attention not to let protrusions and indents to occur.


2-86


Step Procedure

8 Mount the contact onto the center conductor and mount the insulator onto the contact.

INSULATOR CONTACT

9 Insert the cable into the shell.

10 Tighten the tying metal by wrench using the wrench points. (Tighten with torque of 4 to 10 N·m)

WRENCH POINT

LESS THAN 0.1 mm(USUALLY NO GAPS)


2-87

Chart 2-17 Terminating IF Coaxial Cable with N-P Connector (L Angle Type) used for the ODU IF IN/OUT (HIROSE made)

Step Procedure


1 Pass the tightening nut, the washer and the gasket on the cable in the order shown in the figure. Then, strip the cable jacket in the diameter shown in the figure. [Applicable cable : 8D-FB-E]

Note: Be careful of insertion direction for the gasket and the tightening nut.Note: Be careful not to damage the outer conductor.Note: Do not reuse the gasket because the clamp deforms it after

tightening.

2 Insert the clamp to clamp the stripped cable jacket end. Open the end of the outer conductor a little,

3 Insert the hood between the plastic tape with aluminium foil and the outer conductor,

Note: Use the insertion stick to open the hole of about φ9. No gap is allowed in between the clamp, the outer conductor and the hood.


2-88


Step Procedure

4 After inserting the hood, cut off the plastic tape with aluminium foil and the dielectric at A-surface,

5 Cut off the part of the outer conductor exceeding the clamp rim with a knife,

6 Check that distance between the tip of the center conductor and A-surface is 6 to 7 mm, If it is more than 7 mm, cut the center conductor to correct length,

Note: Be careful not to damage the center conductor,

Note: Chamfer at the tip of the center conductor,

Note: There shall be no evidence of deviation or deformation or burr at the tip of the center conductor.


2-89


Step Procedure

7 Insert the insulation washer over the center conductor, and engage it with the F/F contact,

Note: No gap is allowed in between the F/F contact, the insulation washer, and the dielectric.

Note: The assembly unit after the completion of this process is called “block”.

8 Combine the convex part of the clamp to the concave part of the gasket, Then insert this block to the shell,

Note: Insert the hood until it hits the B-surface.


2-90


Step Procedure

9 Tighten the tightening nut sufficiently until the gasket is cut by the clamp and the tip of the clamp hits the washer,

Note: Torque for the tightening nut shall be 8 to 30N•m.

Note: When tightening the nut, tighten with wrench at the wrench at the wrench flat.

Note: Distance between the tightening nut and the LP shell is 1.85 to 2.1 mm for reference. Tighten the nut sufficiently.

L-type dimension and cutting length of the cable.

Specified length L: Cutting length L−25.


2-91

Chart 2-18 Terminating IF Coaxial Cable with N-P Connector (Straight Type) used for ODU IF IN/OUT (HIROSE made)

N-type connector is used for the ODU side.

Note: When the N (Male) straight connector is attached to the IF coaxial cable for the IDU IF IN/OUT, use of the TNC (Male) - N (Female) (NJ-TNCP-LA) L-angle adapter is needed.

Step Procedure

1 First fit the lock nut, washer and gasket on the cable as shown.

CABLE

LOCK NUT WASHER GASKET

2 Strip back the cable sheath, taking care not to damage the braided shield, and fit clamp A.

CLAMP A

X

CONNECTOR CABLE X

N260 5D-FB 25 mm

N227 8D-FB 25 mm

N228 10D-FB 27 mm

N229 12D-FB 27 mm

3 Fold back the braided shield (separating the strands of the braid) and trim it.


2-92


Step Procedure

4 Cut away the insulation from the center conductor and fit clamp B. Be sure not to cut or scratch the conductor while stripping the insulation.

1.0 mm CLAMP B

CUT

5 Cut the center conductor. Taper the end of the center conductor using a file as shown in the enlarged view below.

12 mm

6 Mount the center contact onto the center conductor as shown.

Note: Insert the center contact into insulator (1.5 mm).

1.5 mm

CENTER CONTACT


2-93


Step Procedure

7 Mount the insulator onto the center contact.

TAPERING SIDE

INSULATOR

8 Insert the cable into the connector shell.

CONNECTOR SHELL

9 Tighten the lock nut.

LOCK NUT

Less than 0.5 mm


2-94

Chart 2-19 Terminating IF Coaxial Cable with N-P Connector (Straight Type) used for ODU IF IN/OUT (KOMINE made)

N-type connector is used for the ODU side.

Note: When the N (Male) straight connector is attached to the IF coaxial cable for the IDU IF IN/OUT, use of the TNC (Male) - N (Female) (NJ-TNCP-LA) L-angle adapter is needed.

Step Procedure

1 The clamp nut, the washer and the gasket are inserted in the cable,

GASKET WASHER CLAMP NUT

CABLE

2 Strip the cable as below and disentangle the braid and insert the clamp in the cable,

BRAIDCLAMP

25 mm

Do not scratch the braid wire.

3 Turn the braid on the clamp inserted and cut the braid according to the paragraph,

BRAIDINSULATOR

FOIL PARAGRAPH


2-95


Step Procedure

4 Cut the cable-insulator according to the surface that is turned the braid and insert the ferrule,

FERRULE

CENTER CONDUCTOR

The surface that is turned the braid.

Do not scratch the center conductor.

5 Insert the insulator,

INSULATOR

6 Cut the center-conductor as following size. Process the tip of center-conductor like a taper with a file. (Do not have a curve and burr.) Insert the center-contact in the center-conductor and insert the insulator in the center-contact,

12 mm

CENTER CONTACTINSULATOR

Processing chart of the tip of the center-conductor.


2-96


Step Procedure

7 Connector body is fit to the cable. Fit in the cable end into the body and screw the clamp nut by your hand first and tighten it with a torque wrench. Confirm the space that it is less than 0. 5 mm between the body and the cramp nut.

BODY CLAMP NUT

18/2 flats less than 0.5 mm

Tightening torque is more than 9.8 N•m (100kgf•cm)

Note: Use torque wrench.


2-97

Chart 2-20 Terminating Power Supply Cables with Molex Connector

Step Procedure

Note: Do not bend this part.

1 Remove 3.0 to 3.5 mm of insulation.

CABLE

AWG#18-24

POWER SUPPLY CABLE

3.0 to 3.5 mm

FOR 48 V, 1A


2-98


Step Procedure

2 Set the socket contact to position 1 or 2 of the hand crimping tool.

HAND CRIMPING TOOL57026-5000 Molexor 57027-5000( )

HAND CRIMPING TOOL TYPE

57026-5000

57027-5000

OUTSIDE DIAMETER OF CABLE

φ 1.5 to 1.8φ 1.8 to 2.2φ 2.3 to 2.6φ 2.6 to 3.1

SET POSITION

21

12

12

3 Squeeze the handle of the hand crimping tool, insert cable into socket contact.

4 The cable should fit, so insulation and bare wire are arranged as shown.

5 Squeeze the handle of the hand crimping tool until the ratchet is released.

INSULATION BARREL WIRE BARREL

WIRE STRIP LENGTH


2-99


Step Procedure

6 Twist cables for the power supply,

Note: Twist power cables to suppress inductive interference signals.

7 Insert the socket contacts into the power connector until they lock.

−48 V (*1)

GND (*2)POWER CONNECTOR

Note : For H3040 DC-DC CONV, (*1):−20 to −60 V (or 0 V) (*2):0 V (or +20 to +60V)


2-100

Chart 2-21 BNC Connector for 3C-2V Coaxial Cable Assembling, Solder Type

The following explains how to assemble BNC solder type as an example.

LOCK NUT CLAMP 1 CLAMP 2 SHELL

Step 1. Slide the lock nut onto the cable. Strip the cable sheath, taking care not to damage the braided shield wires, and fit CLAMP 1.

(15.5 mm)*(39/64”)*

Note *:Stripping measurements vary depend on the BNC

Step 2. Fold back the braided shield wire around the CLAMP 1 (without separating the strands of the braid) and trim it.trim

Step 3. Cut away the insulator from the centre conductor and fit CLAMP 2. (Be sure not to cut or scratch the conductor while stripping the insulation.)

(7 mm)*(9/32”)*

Note *:Stripping measurements vary depend on the BNC

Step 4. Solder the pin contact to center conductor. Use a knife to remove excess solder.

SOLDERING

Step 5. Insert the connectorized cable into the BNC shell and fasten the lock nut with a wrench.


2-101

Chart 2-22 BNC Connector for 3C-2V Coaxial Cable Assembling, Crimping Type

The following explains how to assemble BNC crimping type as an example.

Step 1. Strip coaxial cable as illustrated left, (taking care not to damage braided shield wire),

Step 2. Cut braided shield wire (without unravel the strands of braid) and trim it,

Step 3. Cut dielectric, (be sure not to cut or scratch the centre conductor while stripping the dielectric),

center conductordielectric

shield wire

Sheath

(15 mm)*(6.3 mm)*

(4 mm)*

STRIPPING

Note*: Stripping measurements vary depending on the BNC type.

AB

C

contraction sleeve

ferrule

pin contact BNC shell

BNC plug

contraction sleeve ferrule

Step 4. Slide contraction sleeve and ferrule onto the cable,

Step 6. Slide pin contact until it bottoms against the centre conductor,

insulator

Step 6. Slide braid tube and insulator among braided shield wire and dielectric,

braid tube

Step 5. Fan braided shield wire,

braid tube

insulator

pin contact


2-102


Step 7. Crimp pin contact,

crimp

pin contactcrimping tool

crimping area

crimp

Step 8. Slide carefully the cable into BNC shell until insulator butts against BNC body,

Step 9. Slide ferrule over shield wire until it bounds against the BNC shell body,

ferrule

Step 10.Crimp ferrule as close as possible to the BNC shell body and trim the excess of braid,

crimping tool

Crimp ferrule as close as possible.

trim

use suitable crimping size


2-103


Step 11.Position contraction sleeve over ferrule and BNC,

Step 12.Heat contraction sleeve until it contracts.

contraction sleeve

heated air


2-104

Chart 2-23 D-Sub High Density Crimp Contacts Assembly

The following explains how to assemble high density crimp contacts used for HARTING hand crimp tool as an example.

Step 1. Strip the jacket for 2.5 −0/+0.5 mm as shown left and check if stranded wire is not damaged,

Step 2. Place the handles in the open position as shown left,

JacketStranded wire

2.5 −0/+0.5 mm

Step 3. Select the suitable chamber for the selected wire,

Step 7. Take out the crimped contacts from the chamber. Check if it should not be scratched or transformed.

Step 4. Insert contact in the selected chamber,

Applicable wire size : 0.14 - 0.22 mm2 (AWG26 - 24),stranded, maximum insulation: φ1.38 mm

Crimp Tool(09 88 999 0596)

Note: When the handles are in close position, squeeze handles completely until safety ratchet is released.

Jacket

Chamber for 0.22 mm2 (AWG 24)

Chamber for 0.14 mm2 (AWG 26)

Indication of the part number

Step 5. Insert the prepared wire in the contact,

Step 6. Squeeze the handles together completely until the safety ratchet clicks to open,

Stamped male contacts : 09 56 000 8175 (Level S4),High density male connectors : 09 56 300 5601 (#44)

Crimping/inserting contacts process


2-105


Step 8. After crimping the stranded wire to the contact using a hand tool, insert the contact into the contact chamber with the tool, working from the wiring side,

Step 9. You can here the contacts snap home, audible “click”,

Removing crimp contacts

Step 1. Position the tool from the wiring side as shown left and insert into the contact chamber. The contact can then easily be removed from the wiring side together with itself and reinserted in a different chamber.

Step 10.Check if they are securely in place with giving the wire a gentle pull.

Insertion and removal tool(09 99 000 0513)

Wire

Connector

Insertion and removal tool

[Removal]Contact can be removedtogether with wire.

[Insertion]Contact can be insertedtogether with wire.

Contact chamber

Insertion and removal toolPosition the


2-106

2.9 Wiring and Forming

Chart 2-24 Wiring and Forming

1 Connect cables for, signal interface, power supply, IF IN/OUT and ground to the proper connector of the IDU. (1) Connect ground cable to the ground terminal(2) Connect IF cable to IF IN/OUT connector.(3) Connect power supply cable to SELV connector.(4) Connect OC-3 NLite E, Aux. signal cables to proper

connectors.(5) Connect XIF coaxial cables to opposite IDU. (XPIC

configuration only.)(6) Connect XPIC CTRL cables to opposite IDU. (XPIC

configuration only.)

Note: When disconnect cables, perform it in revers steps.

2 Fix the cables using cable binder to the rack as like as indicated position.

Notes: 1. Do not cross the cables on front of indicators and power switch used for maintenance.

2. Take suitable bend radius to wiring the IF cable. (e.g. 10D-FB: 70 cm)

3. For the IF cable connection, it is recommended to use adapter. (Applicable adapters are listed table below).

Table 2-6 IF Cable Adapter

IF CableAdapter

TNC(P) - N(J) TNC(P) - TNC(J)

5D-FB √

8D-FB √ √

10D-FB √

Caution

Tighten the TNC-male connector of IF cable to the IDU with engage connector nut only using fingers and holding the cable with another hand.


(Tightening Torque : 0.3 to 0.5 N•m (3 to 5kg•cm))

IDU

IDU

IF CABLE

IF CABLE

IDU

IF CABLE

Straight Type

L-Angle Type

L Angle Type



2-107


2-108

NLite E SONET

SELV

!

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

FG

PULL

SELV

!

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

PULL

SELV

!

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

FG

PULL

SELV

!

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

PULL

(1) Connect XIF cable to between XIF IN (Main Master ) and XIF OUT (Sub Master), and XIF OUT (Main Master) and XIF IN (Sub Master).

(2) Connect XPIC CTRL cables to between XPIC CTRL (Main Master) and XPIC CTRL (Sub Master).


PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

NLite EFG

LCT


PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

NLite ESFG

LCT

ALM

OC-3 INOC-3 OUTALM

OC-3 INOC-3 OUT ONLINEONLINE

ALM

OC-3 INOC-3 OUTALM


Fig. 2-8 Cable Wiring for the XPIC System


2-109


2-110

2.10 SONET OC-3 NLite E Frame Grounding

In mounting the IDU and ODU, perform frame grounding. The location of the frame grounding in each IDU and ODU is shown in Fig. 2-8, and the connection for frame grounding is shown in Fig. 2-9.

1+0 SYSTEMFRAME GROUND TERMINAL

FG

1+1 SYSTEMIDU

FGIFLMONRX LEV

6-38 GHz ODU

SELV

!


PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

NLite E

PULL

(Blank)

GG

G

SELV

!


PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

NLite E

PULL

SELV

!

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

PULL

GG

G

G

FRAME GROUND TERMINAL

SELV

PWR PULL


− 43V

GOUTSTD

G

SELV

PWR PULL


− 43V

GOUTSTD





FRAME GROUND TERMINAL FRAME GROUND TERMINAL

DC-DC CONV (Optional)

ALM

OC-3 INOC-3 OUTALM


ALM

OC-3 INOC-3 OUTALM


NLite E

Note: Connect the Frame Ground (G) terminal on the IDU to the mounting rack with the earth cable. In addition, connect the mounting rack to the indoor earth terminal with the earth cable and connect the G terminal on the ODU to the ground (refer to Fig. 2-9).

Fig. 2-10 Location of Frame Ground

EARTH LINE

INDOOR EARTH GROUND TERMINAL

IDU

ODUCOAXIAL CABLE

PROTECT AREA

LIGHTNING ROD

OUTDOOR EARTH GROUND TERMINAL(EXISTING OR CUSTOMER SUPPLIED)

EARTH LINE

GROUNDLEVEL

Cautions: 1. Install the ODU within the area protected by lightning rod.2. To avoid surge currents caused by lightning circulating in the

equipment earth system, connect the equipment earth system (frame ground) to ground of the lightning rod at ground level.

Note:Frame Ground terminal of the IDU (5 mm square cable (means more than 2.5 mm diameter cable (AWG #10) is recommended to apply for the earth grounding. The proper press fix terminal tool shall be used.) This connection is an example.

RACK

30° 30°

(Grounding Resistance: less than 10 ohms)

This is the buried earth wire.This type of wire is not an insulated winding wire and recommends to make a naked wire.

Use a copper grounding conductor to ground the rack.The grounding conductor to the CO GND be connected to the rack.


2-111

Fig. 2-11 Connection for Frame Grounding (1/2)

LIGHTNING ROD

EARTH LINE

ODU

FG

EARTH LINE*

COAXIAL CABLE

INDOOR EARTH

GROUNDLEVEL

IDU

(Grounding-resistance:less than 10 ohms)

Notes:* NEC recommends that frame ground of ODU should be connected to earth line as NEC’s standard installation. EP : Earth Ground Point of tower FG : Frame Ground terminal of the IDU (5 mm square cable (means more than 2.5 mm diameter cable (AWG #10) is recommended to apply for the earth grounding. The proper press fix terminal tool shall be used.) This connection is an example.

ISOLATED FROMTOWER(Grounding-resistance:less than 10 ohms)

(Grounding-resistance of tower: less than

Grounding cable for ODU should be connected to the nearest EP of the tower.

EP

LINE

It lets through the center of the steel tower as much as possible.

The coaxial cable lets through the inside of the steel tower.The earth between ODU-IDU lets through the inside of the steel tower.

COAXIAL CABLE

EARTH LINE

This is the buried earth wire.This type of wire is not an in-sulated winding wire and recommends to make a na-ked wire.

10 ohms)

Use a copper grounding conductor to ground the rack.The grounding conductor to the CO GND be connected to the rack.

TOWER


2-112

Fig. 2-11 Connection for Frame Grounding (2/2)


2-113

2.11Waterproof Protection

After cable connection, the following parts should be wrapped by self-bonding tape for waterproof (see Fig. 2-10).

POLE

ANT

6/7/8 GHz BAND ODU

POLEANT

HYB

ODU

ODU

These parts should be wrapped the self-bonding tape tightly, twice or more around the IF cable connector and IF IN/OUT connector of the ODU for waterproof.

Note A

Note A

Note A

ODU

Caution: Before connecting the IF cable between the IDU and ODU, using the circuit tester, check that the resistance of the I/F cable between center conductor and insulation is more than 100 MΩ.

self-bonding tape

stretch

Wrap twice the IF IN/OUT connector with self-bonding tape for waterproofing.

a half of tape width

ODU

twice

Fig. 2-12 Location of Connector for Waterproof (1/2)

ODU

IF CABLE

SELF-BONDING TAPE

ODU

IFL CONNECTOR

Note: The self-bonding tape should be prepared by customer.

SELF-BONDING TAPE

ODU

IF CABLEIN CASE OF L−ANGLE

6-38 GHz BAND ODU

This part should be wrapped the self-bonding tape tightly, twice or more around the IF cable connector and IF IN/OUT connector of the ODU for waterproof.

Caution: Before connecting the IF cable between the IDU and ODU, using the circuit tester, check that the resistance of the I/F cable between center conductor and insulation is more than 100 MΩ.

self-bonding tape

stretch



ODU

twice

For 6-52 GHz BAND ODU


2-114114 pages



2-115

INITIAL LINE UP ROI-S05750

3-1

3. INITIAL LINE UP

This NLite E Section explains instructions for the initial lineup of the equipment. Included is information on start-up, shut-down, IDU and ODU equipment setting, antenna orientation and lineup test between two stations.

When the NLite E Monitor is used for RX LEV monitoring, connect the X0818 NLite E Monitor to the ODU. The NLite E Monitor operates on a dry battery (6F22/9V).

Notes: 1. Insert the battery with correct polarity.

2. When the NLite E Monitor will not be used for extended periods of time, remove the battery to avoid damage from battery leakage and corrosion.

3. When the NLite E Monitor will be connected to the ODU, control corresponding ODU to Antenna Alignment mode using LCT in Maintenance ON.

ROI-S05750 INITIAL LINE UP

3-2

3.1 Start-up

The procedure for starting the equipment is shown in Chart 3-1.

Warning: 1. The –48 V DC is superimposed on the centre conductor of the IF coaxial cable between the MODEM and the ODU. Connecting test equipment directly to this terminal may damage it and touching the coaxial cable core may cause electrical shock.

2. Do not disconnect the IF cable between the MODEM and the ODU in operating condition, to avoid damaging the NLite E , turn the IDU power OFF before connecting/disconnecting the IF cable.

3. Do not allow open or short circuit of ODU TX output with the TX power on conditions. Perform the TX Mute control in the Maintenance mode or turn the PWR switch off at the IDU before disconnecting cable or feeder from the ODU TX output.

4. After turning ON the equipment, wait at least 1 minute before turning it OFF again. Repeatedly turning the power ON and OFF within a short interval may cause the NLit E to fail.

Caution: 1. In a system using the OPTICAL OC-3 INTFC, do not stare at the laser beam or look at it directly with optical instruments. Otherwise, it may hurt your eyes (Class 1 Laser Product).

2. Be careful top surface above MODEM of the IDU is hot in operation.

3. When replacing the MODEM, OC-3 INTFC or DC-DC CONV (optional) turn off the PWR switch and disconnect all cables connected to the module which is to be replaced.

4. When dismounting the ( ) INTFC, turn off the PWR switch on the MODEM and disconnect all cables connected to the ( ) INTFC.

5. In the SONET XPIC system, the system parameter setup must be performed at the Master station first, then at the Sub Station.

6. In the SONET XPIC system, the Main Master and Sub Master channels must be connected to one dual polarized antenna.


3-3

Chart 3-1 Start-up

Caution: Do not apply a voltage to the equipment that varies sharply. The equipment may operate improperly.

Caution: Do not remove/connect the IF cable with the IDU power ON. Turn the IDU power OFF before connecting/disconnecting the IF cable, or equipment may be damaged.

Apparatus:Suitable ScrewdriverDigital Multimeter

Step Procedure

Notes: 1 The ODU power is supplied from the IDU

1+0 SYSTEM

1 Check that the IF cable between the MODEM and the ODU is firmly connected,

2 Before connecting the power cable connector to the MODEM, check that the SELV input voltage is −48V (allowable range; within –40.5 to –57 V) with the digital multimeter, (see Fig. 3-1),

3 Pull out the PWR switch lever and turn on,

4 Confirm that the PWR indicator on the MODEM is ON.

1+1 SYSTEM

1 Check that the IF cable between the No.1 MODEM and the No. 1 ODU is connected,

2 Before connecting the power cable connector to the No.1 MODEM, check that the SELV input voltage is −48V (allowable range, within –40.5 to –57 V) with the digital multimeter, (see Fig. 3-1),

3 Pull out the PWR switch lever and turn on, (see Fig. 3-1),

4 Confirm that the PWR indicator on the No.1 MODEM is ON.

5 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for No.2 MODEM,

6 Confirm that PWR indicator on the No.2 MODEM is ON.

PWR SWITCH

SELV

1+1 CONFIGURATION

IDU

PWR SWITCH

SELV

!


PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

NLite E

PULL

(Blank)

GG

G

SELV

!


PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

NLite E

PULL

SELV

!

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

PULL

GG

G

G

PWR LED

1+0 CONFIGURATION

IDU

PWR LED

SELV

PWR SWITCHPWR LEDSELV

MODEM

No.1 MODEM

No.2 MODEM

Caution: The NLite E operates only negative voltage (–48 V). Therefore, the power supply system for the existing equipment which is used floating power supply (–20 to –60 V/+20 to +60 V) must not be connected to the NLite E .

4

2 1

3

GND

–48 V

POWER SUPPLY

No.1 POWER SUPPLY

3

12

4 GND –48 V

No.2 POWER SUPPLY

3

12

4 GND –48 V

ALM

OC-3 INOC-3 OUTALM


ALM

OC-3 INOC-3 OUTALM



3-4

Fig. 3-1 DC Power cable Connection and Power ON/OFF (1/2)


3-5


Step Procedure

Note: 1 The ODU power is supplied from the IDU

DC Power Connection-2 (DC-DC CONV)

1+0 SYSTEM1 Check that the IF cable between the MODEM and the ODU is

connected,

2 Connect the power cable to –43 V/OUT of the DC DC CONV and SELV of the MODEM as shown in Fig 3-1 (2/2),

3 Before connecting the power cable connector to the SELV of the DC-DC CONV, check that the rated input voltage is −24V/−48V (allowable range; within –20 to –60 V) or +24V/+48V (allowable range; within +20 to +60 V) with the digital multimeter, (see Fig. 3-1),

4 Pull out the PWR switch lever of the DC-DC CONV and turn on,

5 Confirm that the PWR indicator on the DC-DC CONV is ON,

6 Pull out the PWR switch lever of the MODEM and turn on,

7 Confirm that the PWR indicator on the MODEM is ON.

1+1 SYSTEM1 Check that the IF cable between the No.1 MODEM and the No.

1 ODU, is connected,

2 Connect the power cable to –43 V/OUT of the No.1 DC DC CONV and SELV of the No.1 MODEM as shown in Fig 3-1 (2/2),

3 Before connecting the power cable connector to the SELV of the DC-DC CONV, check that the rated input voltage is −24V/−48V (allowable range; within –20 to –60 V) or +24V/+48V (allowable range; within +20 to +60 V) with the digital multimeter, (see Fig. 3-1),

4 Pull out the PWR switch lever of the No.1 DC-DC CONV and turn on,

5 Confirm that the PWR indicator on the No.1 DC-DC CONV is ON,


3-6


Step Procedure

6 Pull out the PWR switch lever of the No.1 MODEM and turn on,

7 Confirm that the PWR indicator on the No.1 MODEM is ON,

8 Repeat steps 1 to 7 for No.2 MODEM,

9 Confirm that PWR indicator on the No.2 MODEM is ON.

PWR SWITCH (IDU)SELV

IDU

0 V/(or +20 to +60V) –20 to –60V/(or 0V)

SELV

!


PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

NLite E

PULL

GG

G

1+0 CONFIGURATION

POWER SUPPLY

PWR LEDMODEM

No.1 POWER SUPPLY

0 V/(or +20 to +60V) –20 to –60V/(or 0V)

–20 to –60V/(or 0V)

0 V/(or +20 to +60V)

SELV

PWR PULL


− 43V

GOUTSTD

G

SELV

PWR PULL


− 43V

GOUTSTD





SELV

PWR PULL


− 43V

GOUTSTD

G

SELV

!


PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

NLite E

PULL

SELV

!

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

PULL

GG

G

G

Caution: The NLite E operates only negative voltage (–48 V). Therefore, the power supply system for the existing equipment which uses a floating power supply (–20 to –60 V/+20 to +60 V) must not be connected to the NLite E .

No.1 MODEMNo.2 MODEM

No.1 PWR SWITCHNo.1 SELV

No.2 SELVNo.1 SELV

No.2 SELV

No.2 PWR SWITCH

No.1 PWR SWITCH

No.2 PWR SWITCH

–43 V/OUT

No.1 –43 V/OUTNo.2 –43 V/OUT

4

2 1

3

4

2 1

3

No.2 POWER SUPPLY

4

2 1

3

DC-DC CONV UNIT

DC-DCCONV

ALM

OC-3 INOC-3 OUTALM


ALM

OC-3 INOC-3 OUTALM



3-7

Fig. 3-1 DC Power cable Connection and Power ON/OFF (2/2)


3-8

3.2 Shut-down

The shut-down procedures for the equipment is shown in Chart 3-2.

Warning: After turning ON the equipment, wait at least 1 minute before turning it OFF again. Repeatedly turning the power ON and OFF with in a short interval may cause the IDU/ODU to fail.

Chart 3-2 Shut-down

Step Procedure

1+0 SYSTEM1 Pull out the PWR switch lever on the MODEM and turn off the

PWR switch (see Fig. 3-1),2 Confirm that all LED indicators on the IDU are OFF.

1+1 SYSTEM

Note: When turn OFF the IDU and ODU in 1+1 configuration, turn OFF power for standby side first, then working side.

When turn OFF the IDU and ODU in working channel only, switchover the working to standby channel with TX and RX SW using LCT. (see Chart 3-8)

1 Pull out the PWR switch lever on the corresponding MODEM is to be shut down, then turn off (see Fig. 3-1).

2 Confirm that the PWR indicator on the MODEM is OFF.3 Pull out the PWR switch lever on the other MODEM, then turn

off the PWR switch. (see Fig. 3-1).4 Confirm that all LED indicators on the IDU are OFF.


3-9

3.3 Initial Setting

The initial setup of the IDU/ODU is performed using the PC according to Table 3-1.

For the details operation of the PC setup for connecting LCT, refer to the NLite E LCT Operation Manual in Section IV Appendix.

Table 3-1 Initial Setup Items

Setup Order Setup Item LCT

1. Equipment Setup Chapter 3

2. Date and Time Chapter 6.3

3. Provisioning Chapter 7

4. Relay/House Keeping Chapter 7

Note: The “Equipment Setup” must be set properly every items before “Provisioning” setup. The “Provisioning” setup must be performed based on the “Equipment Setup”.

LCT Access Cable

LCT1+1 CONFIGURATION

SELV

!


PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

NLite E

PULL

(Blank)

G

G

G

SELV

!


PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

NLite E

PULL

SELV

!

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

PULL

GG

G

G

1+0 CONFIGURATION

PC for LCT

USB

ALM

OC-3 INOC-3 OUTALM


ALM

OC-3 INOC-3 OUTALM


Fig. 3-2 LCT Connection


3-10

3.3.1 Equipment SetupIn initial lineup, the “Equipment Setup” must be performed using LCT.

Chart 3-3 Equipment Setup

Refer to the NLite E LCT Operation Manual in Section IV Appendix. for the details of “3. Equipment Setup”. The Equipment Setup items to be setup for the SONET systems are as follows:Equipment Setup Items for SONET Systems

• User Interface • Redundancy Setting• INTFC• INTFC Main (WORK) *1• INTFC SUB (PROT) *1• XPIC Usage *2• APS Function *3• Modulation Scheme• Transmission Capacity• TX RF Frequency• RX RF Frequency *5• Frame ID• TX Power Control• LAN Port Usage *4• LAN Capacity *4• TX Start Frequency• TX Stop Frequency• Frequency Step• Shift Frequency• Upper/Lower• Sub BandNotes:*1 For SONET only.

*2 When the SONET XPIC is configured, set Main Master and Sub Master. Set to Not Used in other configurations.

The TX/RX frequency for the Main Master and Sub Master channels must be set to the same values. The Main Master and Sub Master channels must be connected to one dual polarized antenna. The reference local frequency and the action control of the ATPC/MTPC are applied from the Main Master channel to the Sub Master channel.

*3 For SONET APS only.*4 For LAN transmission only.*5 There is two types ODU for the RX RF Frequency setup

mode.Type 1.When the transmitting frequency is set, the receiving

frequency is automatically assigned.Type 2.When the transmitting frequency is set, the receiving

frequency is automatically assigned and assignment of it in manual is also available.


3-11

3.3.2 Provisioning Setup for SONETIn initial lineup, the “Provisioning” Setup must be performed using LCT.

Chart 3-4 Provisioning Setup (SONET)

Refer to the NLite E LCT Operation Manual in Section IV Appendix. for details of the “7. Provisioning Setup”. The Provisioning Setup items to be setup for SONET systems are as follows:

Provisioning Setup for SONET system• BER Threshold Setting• Sub Interface *1• SC Assignment• LAN Port Setting *2• OC-3 Setting• TX Power Control*3• Condition for TX/RX SW• Condition for APS• Relay Setting• TCN Threshold(15min)• TCN Threshold(1day)• PMON Select• Others *3

Note: *1:For LAN transmission only.*2:For LAN transmission only.*3:Set to required TX power level in MTPC mode when it

is going to perform the Antenna Orientation.*4:Optional items


3-12

3.4 Antenna Orientation

After the initial setup has been completed, an antenna orientation will be performed between two stations according to the procedures in Chart 3-6.

Chart 3-5 Antenna Orientation

Apparatus :

Digital Multimeter with test leads or X0818 NLite E Monitor

Wrench

Headset

Step Procedure

1 Connect the PC to the LCT port on the NLite E IDU using USB cable, (see Fig. 3-2)

2 At each station, set “Maintenance1” from Maintenance in LCT Menu,

LCT MENU

Alarm/StatusEquipment SetupInventoryAUX I/OMaintenanceProvisioningMeteringPMON(History)

Maintenance1Maintenance2

Note: In Maintenance “On” condition, every external Alarm outputs, excluding Maintenance/PS/CPU (IDU) ALM, are masked and remote control can not be performed.

3 Click and select for the following control items in “Maintenance1”,

Note: Retain the present status for other control items.

Note: When the TX power control mode is set to ATPC, set it to MTPC and required level for the NLite E link on the “Equipment Setup” and “Provisioning”.


3-13


Step Procedure

• TX SW Manual Control: Fix No.1 or No.2 (in 1+1 configuration)

• RX SW Manual Control: Fix No.1 or No.2 (which is the same side fixed by TX SW in 1+1 configuration)

• TX Power Control: MTPC in Equipment Setup(at opposite site) Required level in Provisioning

• CW Control: When the Antena Alignment Mode is not(at opposite site) selected, set manually to On.

• XPIC Control Local: Fix Forced Reset in XPIC configuration.• Antenna Alignment Mode: Select On (in 1+0 configuration)

(Set No.1 or No.2 which is the same side fixed by TX SW and RX SW in 1+1 configuration)

--- Maintenance 1 ---Item Value SettingMaintenace On Off On SetTX SW Manual Control No.1 Auto No.1 No.2 SetRX SW Manual Control No.1 Auto No.1 No.2 SetRX SW Maintenace Mode ManualMTPC Manual Control(No.1) On Off On SetMTPC Manual Control(No.2) On Off On SetTX Mute Control(No.1) Off Off On SetTX Mute Control(No.2) Off Off On SetCW Control(No.1) Off Off On SetCW Control(No.2) Off Off On SetIF Loopback (No.1) Off Off On SetIF Loopback (No.2) Off Off On SetMain Loopback (Near End) Off Off On SetMain Loopback (Far End) Off Off On SetLinearrizer Control(No.1) Auto Auto Forced Reset SetLinearrizer Control(No.2) Auto Auto Forced Reset SetXPIC Control Local(No.1) Auto Auto Forced Reset SetXPIC Control Local(No.2) Auto Auto Forced Reset SetXPIC Control Remote(No.1) Auto Auto Forced Reset SetXPIC Control Remote(No.2) Auto Auto Forced Reset Set--- Offline Maintenance ---DADE Adjust ... DADE Offset DADE DADE Off SetRF SUB Band Select (No.1) ... A SetRF SUB Band Select (No.2) ... A SetAntenna Alignment Mode(No.1) On Off On SetAntenna Alignment Mode(No.2) On Off On Set

Note: In Antenna Alignment Mode “On” condition, controls between IDU and ODU are restricted.


3-14


Step Procedure

4 At receiving station, remove a cap from the RX LEV MON jack,

5 At each station connect the digital multimeter or NLite E Monitor to the RX LEV MON jack on the ODU,

Note: In order to measure exact performance of AGC V, it is mandatory required to set Antenna Alignment Mode to ON. The AGC voltage indication is not guaranteed outside Antenna Alignment Mode.It is necessary to set to Antenna Alignment Mode when monitor the RX level with the NLite E Monitor unit.

6 At each station, adjust the azimuth and elevation angle of the antenna alternately so that the measured voltage becomes maximum,

Note: The relation of the RX INPUT LEVEL versus RX LEVEL MON(V) is shown below.

RX LEVEL MON vs RX INPUT LEVEL (Typical)

RX INPUT LEVEL [dBm]-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20

0.5

0

1

1.5

2

2.5

3

3.5

4

4.5

RX

LE

VEL

MO

N [V

]


3-15


Step Procedure

RX LEV MON

1 2 3 450

V

OW

NLite E MONITOR

RX LEV/OW INFGIFLMON

RX LEV

Notes 1: It is necessary to set to the Antenna Alignment Mode using PC for LCT when monitor the RX level with the NLite E MONITOR unit.

2: The RX LEV MON terminal on the ODU (conformed to IEC61169-24).3: The RX LEV MON terminal must be capped for waterproof.

ODU

DIGITAL MULTIMETER

NLite E

Fig. 3-3 Antenna Orientation Test Setup

Note: The fixed bolts and nuts to be used for the antenna orientation differ with antenna bracket types, refer to antenna bracket shown in Fig. 3-4 (1/4) to (4/4).


3-16

Safety Guideline for Microwave Radiation Hazard

The Microwave and Millimeter-wave that NLite E series are transmitting is at a very small radiation level and never has been reported to effect human health. Advanced countries concerned about health hazards have started to regulate the radiation levels. The operator should not work near the parabolic antenna during RF transmission. The area in front of and to the side of the antenna show high radiation levels. Please see below figure and calculation sample 1.

The front side of antenna presents a high power density in the antenna beam area. Therefore, the user of this system should pay attention not to radiate the beam against humans at any time. (Please refer below calculation sample 2)

ODU- 90 to +90 degrees

ANTENNA

Hazard Area of Radiation

In addition, the Power density and Field strength level is calculated by equation below.

10 × KPower density S (mW/cm2) = 40 × π × R2

P+G−3010

Where: P = Output power of ODU (dBm), G = Antenna Gain (dBi),

(in consideration of the angle from antenna) K = Reflection factor =2.56 (given), R = Distance between Human and Antenna (m)

Calculation example 1, (90 degree side of antenna)NLite E = 18 GHz/+23 dBm, Antenna diameter = 0.6 m, 0 degree antenna gain = 39 dBi, 90 degrees side antenna gain = −24 dBi, (90 degrees attenuation = −63 dB), Distance = 0.1 m

Power density S (mW/cm2) = 0.0016 ≤ 0.01 Calculation example 2, (0 degree, front side of antenna)

NLite E = 7 GHz/+27 dBm, Antenna diameter = 1.8 m, 0 degree antenna gain = 40 dBi, Distance = 100 m

Power density S (mW/cm2) = 0.01


3-17


Step Procedure

ANTENNA DIRECTO MOUNTING TYPE

A. USING ANDREW VHLP TYPE BRACKET

Azimuth Angle Adjustment

6-1 Loosen bolts (1 in Fig. 3-4 (1/4) A),

6-2 Adjust the azimuth angle by adjusting bolt (2 in Fig. 3-4 (1/4) A),

6-3 Secure bolts loosened in step 6-1,

Elevation Angle Adjustment

6-4 Loosen bolts (3 in Fig. 3-4 (1/4) A),

6-5 Adjust the elevation angle by adjusting bolt (4 in Fig. 3-4 (1/4) A)


B. USING RFS SB1 TYPE BRACKET


6-7 Loosen nuts (1 in Fig. 3-4-B),

6-8 Adjust the azimuth angle by adjusting the nuts (2 in Fig. 3-4 (1/4) B),

6-9 Secure nuts loosened in step 6-7,


6-10 Loosen bolt(s) (3 in Fig. 3-4 (1/4) B),

6-11 Adjust the elevation angle by adjusting the nuts (4 in Fig. 3-4 (1/4) B),

6-12 Secure nut loosened in step 6-7,

6-13 Secure nuts loosened in step 6-10.


3-18


Step Procedure

C. USING RFS C-Mount TYPE BRACKET


6-14 Loosen 3 bolts (1 in Fig. 3-4 (2/4)),

6-15 Adjust azimuth angle by adjusting bolt (2 in Fig. 3-4 (2/4)),

6-16 Secure nuts loosened in step 6-14,


6-17 Loosen 4 bolts (3 in Fig. 3-4 (2/4)),

6-18 Adjust elevation angle by adjusting bolt (4 in Fig. 3-4 (2/4)),


7 At each station, restore the “Antenna Alignment Mode” to “off” using the LCT,

8 At each station, reset control items to original using LCT,

9 At each station, restore the “MAINT Mode” to “off” position using the LCT,

10 At each station, disconnect the digital multimeter or NLite E Monitor from the RX LEV MON connector,

11 At each station, reconnect the cap removed in step 4,

Note: The RX LEV MON connector must be capped for waterproof.


3-19


Step Procedure

XPD Adjustment (For Antenna Directo Mounting Type)Note: The XPD adjustment using cross-polarization signal should be

done more carefully than using co-polarization signal because XPD changes sharply in the axial direction.

1’ Loosen three screws (SCREW1, 2 and 3 in Fig. 3-4 (3/4)) and rotate antenna (connected OMT/ODU) so that the RX LEVEL MON indicates the maximum value at the ODU of the Main Master and Sub Master channels,

2’ At opposite station, turns the ODU of the Sub Master channel power OFF (for both No.1 and No.2 Sub Master channels in 1+1 system),

3’ In this conditions, check the RX LEVEL MON indication value for XPD at the ODU of the Sub Master channel,

4’ Confirm that the XPD is more than 25 dB, if not, repeat Azimuth Angle, Elevation Angle and XPD Adjustment,

5’ At opposite station, turns the ODU of the Sub Master channel power ON,

1. Loosen for adjusting azimuth

2. Adjust azimuth

3. Loosen (1/4 TURN) bolts for adjusting elevation

0.3 φ m Antenna

B. RFS SB1 TYPE BRACKET

4. Adjust elevation

2. Adjust azimuth

1. Loosen (1/2 turn) bolts for adjusting azimuth (top and bottom)

3. Loosen (1/2 turn) bolts for adjusting elevation

4. Adjust elevation

A. ANDREW VHLP TYPE BRACKET


3-20

Fig. 3-4 Location of Adjusting Nuts and Bolts (1/4)

1. Loosen (1/4 turn) bolts for adjusting azimuth

0.6 φ m Antenna

C. RFS C-Mount TYPE BRACKET

3. Loosen (1/4 turn) bolts for adjusting elevation.

2. Adjust azimuth.

4. Adjust elevation.


3-21


POLE

SCREW 2

SCREW 3

SCREW 1

ROTATIONINDICATOR

A. RFS SB1 TYPE BRACKET

B. RFS C-Mount TYPE BRACKET


3-22



3-23


Step Procedure

WAVEGUIDE CONNECTION TYPE

Azimuth Angle Adjustment (Waveguide Connection Type)

Note: Take care that the flexible waveguide is not forcedly twisted by rotating the antenna.

When the HS/SD system is configured, alternately switchover the transmitter to the other channel (No.1 or No.2) at the opposite station and repeat adjustment of elevation and azimuth to obtain satisfactory results in both No.1 and No.2 CH. (Refer to Chart 3-8 for TX SW/RX SW Manual Switchover Operation).

1’ Loosen all strut attachment hardware,

2’ Loosen bolts indicated by arrows in Fig 3-4 (4/4)-A,

3’ Loosen jam nuts and rotate turnbuckle-1 in Fig 3-4 (4/4)-A so that the RX LEVEL MON voltage obtains the maximum value,

4’ Carefully, tighten turnbuckle-1 jam nuts and bolts indicated by arrows in Fig 3-4 (4/4)-A to hold the adjustment,

Elevation Angle Adjustment (Waveguide Connection Type)

5’ Make sure that all strut attachment hardware is loosened,

6’ Loosen bolts indicated by arrows in Fig 3-4 (4/4)-B,

7’ Loosen jam nuts and rotate turnbuckle-2 in Fig 3-4 (4/4)-B so that the RX LEVEL MON voltage obtains the maximum value,

8’ Carefully, tighten turnbuckle-2 jam nuts and bolts indicated by arrows in Fig 3-4 (4/4)-B,

XPD Adjustment (Waveguide Connection Type)

Note: This XPD adjustment using cross-polarization signal should be done more carefully than using co-polarization signal because XPD changes sharply in the axial direction.

9’ At opposite station, turns the ODU of the Sub Master channel power OFF (for both No.1 and No.2 Sub Master channels in 1+1 system),

10’ In this conditions, check the RX LEVEL MON indication value for XPD at the ODU of the Sub Master channel,


3-24


Step Procedure

11’ Confirm that the XPD is more than 25 dB, if it is not obtained, repeat Azimuth Angle, Elevation Angle for the XPD Adjustment,

12’ Tighten all strut attachment hardware, turnbackle jam nuts and bolts indicated by arrows in Fig 3-4 (4/4) A and Fig 3-4 (4/4) B,

13’ At opposite station, turns the ODU of the Sub Master channel power ON (for both No.1 and No.2 slave channels in 1+1 system),

12 At each station, disconnect the digital multimeter or OW/RX LEV Monitor from the RX LEV MON connector,

13 At each station, reconnect the cap removed in step 4,

Note: The RX LEV MON connector must be capped for waterproof.

14 At each station, restore the “Antenna Alignment Mode” to “off” position using the LCT,

15 At the Main Master station, when the TX power control is operated in ATPC, restore the TX Power Control item of System Configuration changed in step 1 to “ATPC” using the LCT,

16 At the Main Master , when the TX power control is operated in MTPC, restore MTPC TX PWR item of “Provisioning Data” changed in step 2 to original setting valu using the LCT.

17 At each station, reset Maintenance to “OFF”.

STRUT TURNBUCKLE-1

A. Azimuth Adjustment

TURNBUCKLE-2

ANDREW VHLP4 TYPE BRACKET

B. Elevation Adjustment


3-25



3-27

3.5 Lineup Test

Lineup SONET NLite E test items between two stations are listed in Table 3-2.

Table 3-2 Lineup Test Items

Item Chart No.

Orderwire Test Chart 3-7

TX/RX SW Switchover Operation Chart 3-8 *1

DADE Adjust Chart 3-9 *2

BER Measurement Chart 3-10

Meter Reading Chart 3-11

PMON Clear Chart 3-12 *3

Note: *1 Chart 3-8 is described about Manual Switchover Operation.

*2 Chart 3-10 is needed only when INTFC is Out-phase in 1+1 configuration.

*3 After the intial lineup has been finished, clear PMON and RMON data for the start of service operation.

Chart 3-7 Orderwire Test

Step Procedure

1 Connect headset to the EOW jack on the IDU,

2 Press the CALL button on the IDU,

Requirement: At the opposite station, the buzzer on the IDU sounds,

3 Check that the orderwire can be used between two stations with headsets,

4 Disconnect headset from EOW jack on the IDU at each station.


PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

NLite E

LCT

EOW CALL

Local Station


PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

NLite E

LCT

EOW CALL

Opposite Station


3-28

Fig. 3-5 OW Test Setup for IDU


3-29

Chart 3-8 TX/RX SW Switchover Operation

Step Procedure

The TX/RX SW switchover operation is performed only in 1+1 configuration.


2 Enter Login name “Admin”, enter Admin password and press the “Login” button,

3 LCT Open window will be displayed, then click “Maintenance” button in the LCT MENU, select “Maintenance1” on background menu,

LCT MENU



4 Select “On” of the Maintenance setting button and click on “Set” button,

5 Select “No.1” or “No.2” of the TX SW setting button and click on “Set” button,

6 Select “No.1” or “No.2” of the RX SW setting button and click on “Set” button,

--- Maintenance 1 ---Item Value Setting

Maintenance On Off On SetTX SW Manual Control No.1 Auto No.1 No.2 SetRX SW Manual Control No.1 Auto No.1 No.2 Set

7 Check that the “Value” box for each item turned to the required status.


3-30

Chart 3-9 DADE Adjustment

Step Procedure

Note: The DADE control applies in 1+1 configuration to adjust delay time for RX hitless switching when the INTFC status is indicated Outphase.

1 Connect the USB cable to the USB port of PC and the LCT port of the IDU (see Fig. 3-2),

2 Login to LCT using Internet Explorer,


4 LCT Open window will be displayed, then click “Maintenance” button in the LCT Menu area, select “Maintenance1” on background menu,

5 Select “DADE Adjust” on the “Maintenance1” table,

---Maintenance1---Item Value SettingMaintenance On Off On SetDADE Adjust --- DADE Offset DADE DADE Off Set

6 Click on setting button “DADE”, “Off set DADE” or “DADE Off” and click on “Set” button,

Note: The DADE adjustment is needed in initial lineup or when the IF CABLE is replaced. It is not needed readjustment when the INTFC status is indicated In-phase. The setting conditions are as follows:DADE:Automatically adjust delay time based on either No.1 signal or No.2 signal

which it is selected by RX SW under the Outphase condition of the INTFC status. The DADE control is processed assuring no interruption of traffic.

Offset DADE:Automatically adjust delay time based on either No.1 signal or No.2 signal which it is selected by RX SW under the Outphase condition of the INTFC status. Since the offset memory minimizes the latency delay, traffic interruption occurs at that moment. This Offset DADE controls the delay time difference to a minimum than DADE control.

DADE off: Set when DADE function is not used. For particularly, when low bit rate (10 to 20 MB) transmission is applied to the system, the DADE control is not required.


3-31

Chart 3-10 BER Measurement

In 1+1 system, BER measurement of both No.1 and No.2 channels should be performed between terminal stations.

Apparatus :

Digital Multimeter with test leads

Screwdriver

SDH/SONET Analyzer

Optical Variable Attenuator

Headset


3-32


Step Procedure

OPTICAL INTERFACE

Caution: Do not stare into laser beam or view directly with optical instruments. Otherwise, it may hurt eyes (Class 1 Laser Product).

1 At the transmitting end, disconnect OPT cable from the OC-3 IN connector on the OC-3 INTFC (see Fig. 3-8),

SELV

!

AUX/ALMNMS NE

ALM

SC IN/OUT EOW

PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

NLite E

LCT

OC-3 OUT OC-3 IN

PULL

SELV

!

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

PULL

ONLINE G

G

G

G

STM/SONETANALYZER

OC-3 INTFC

TRANSMITTING END

IDU

OC-3 (OPT) IN

STM/SONETANALYZER

OC-3 (OPT) OUT

OPTICAL VARIABLE

ATTENUATOR *

RECEIVING END


IDU

SELV

!

AUX/ALMNMS NE

ALM

SC IN/OUT EOW

PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

NLite E

LCT

OC-3 OUT OC-3 IN

PULL

SELV

!

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

PULL

ONLINE G

G

G

G

(Blank)

(Blank)

OC-3 INTFC

Fig. 3-6 BER Measurement for OC-3 Signal

2 At the receiving end, disconnect the OPT cable from the OC-3 OUT connector on the OC-3 INTFC (see Fig. 3-8),

3 At both transmitting and receiving ends, set the STM/SONET Analyzer as follows:


3-33


Step Procedure

OC-3 INTFC(OPTICAL) • Bit rate : 155.52 Mbps• Code format : OC-3, NRZ• Level S-1.1 L-1.1

IN : −8 to −28 dBm/ −10 to −34 dBm OUT : −8 to −15 dBm/ 0 to −8 dBm

• Wave lengthIN : 1310 nmOUT : 1310 nm

Note: Operation of the TX SW and RX SW are not required in 1+0 system.

4 In HS system, set the TX SW to No.1 or No.2 to On condition at transmitting end, (refer to Chart 3-8)

5 At receiving end, set the RX SW to either No.1 or No.2 to On condition,

6 Measure BER and confirm that the values are indicated as follows:Requirement: 1 x 10–12 or less

7 At receiving end, change setting of the RX SW to opposite No.1 or No.2 from it in step 5 and confirm that the measured value satisfies requirement given in step 6,

8 Change setting of the TX SW to opposite No.1 or No.2 from it in step 4 and confirm that the measured value satisfies requirement given in step 6,


10 Restore all connections and controls to normal.


3-34

Chart 3-11 Meter Reading

Step Procedure



3 Click “Metering” button in LCT Menu,

LCT MENU


4 Then, the values of Metering items are displayed as follows: 1+1 Configuration

----Metering---No.1 No.2

TX Power [dBm]*1 +19 +19RX Level [dBm] -49.5 -49.7Power Supply [V] *2 -45 -45BER *3 0.0E-10 Calculating

1+0 Configuration

----Metering---TX Power [dBm]*1 +19RX Level [dBm] -50Power Supply[V] *2 -45BER *3 1.10E-10


3-35


Step Procedure

Notes: *1:TX POWER Level is indicated in 1 dB step. The TX Power varies depending on the propagation condition within setup ATPC range in provisioning, therefore, TX Power may be displayed within limited values listed in Table 3-3. Add attenuation value for Max. and Min. level when additional attenuator is used.

*2:Power supply voltage of the ODU input varies depending on the IF cable length.

*3: During total number of erroneous bits and total number of correctly received bits are calculating, “Calculating” and *E-** are displayed.

Table 3-3 TX Power Output Level

ModulationMode Frequency Band (GHz) 6 7-8 10-11 13 15 18 23 26 28 32 38 52

32QAM Output Power Max. (dBm) (at ATPC 0 dB)

+25 +21 +19 +18 +17 +14.5 -

Output Power Min. (dBm) +2 (−3) −2 (−7) −4 (−9) −5 (−10) −5 −6 −6.5 -

Additional attenuator (dB) 5 NA

128QAM Output Power Max. (dBm) (at ATPC 0 dB)

+25 +21 +19 +18 +17 +14.5 -

Output Power Min. (dBm) +5(0) +1(−4) −1(−6) −2 (−7) −2 −3 −5.5 -

Additional attenuator (dB) 5 NA

Tolerance (dB) +/−3 (except additional attenuator)

Note: ( ) shows the values with additional attenuator.


3-36

Chart 3-12 PMON Clearing

Step Procedure



3 Click the “Maintenance” button in LCT Menu,

4 Click the Maintenance2 button,

LCT MENU



5 Then, the "PMON Clear" button is displayed in the Main Area,

---PMON Clear---

PMON Clear

6 Click the PMON Clear button,

7 Click on the "OK" button in the “WARNING” confirmation window,

8 Disconnect the LCT from the IDU after the PMON Clearing has been finished.

ROI-S05752-05DE CONTENTS August, 2007

CL-1

NLite E 6-38 GHz SONET DIGITAL RADIO SYSTEM

Section IV APPENDIX

NLite E LCT OPERATION

CONTENTS

TITLE PAGE

1 Introduction •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11.1 Accessing the NLITE E •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 21.2 LCT MENU Items •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 111.3 Alarm/Status (SONET) ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 131.4 Equipment Setup (SONET) ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 192 Inventory •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 253 AUX. I/O ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 274 Maintenance------------------------------------------------------------ 284.1 Maintenance1(SONET) •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 294.2 Maintenance2•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 365 Provisioning •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 435.1 Provisioning Setup (SONET)---------------------------------- 446 Metering•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 566.1 PMON (SONET)•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 586.1.1 PMON (History)•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 58

6.1.2 RMON (History) ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 61

7 Installation of USB •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 638 Dial-up Setting ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 669 Java Runtime Install •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7510 LCTWEB (Version 2) Install••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 76

ROI-S05752 Introduction

-1-

1. Introduction

This Local Craft Terminal (LCT) Operation Manual describe how to setup, manage, monitor and controls NLITE E SONET microwave radio systems.

User should prepare the computer (PC), USB cable and necessary peripheral device used for equipment setup.

The following hardware and software for the PC are recommended. Use the latest updated version of the software.

Hardware requirement• HD: 100 MB or higher free capacity• RAM: 512 MB• Display: LCD 1,024 × 768• CD-ROM drive• Serial port• USB port• USB cable with USB-B connector

Software requirement (English version)

• OS: Windows 2000/Xp

• IE6.0 SP2 (LCTWEB Applet Version 1 (Rev.1.xx.xx))

• Java Runtime Environment: V1.5.0_05 is applied. (Refer to Chapter 12 for Java 2 Runtime installation.) It is required for the LCTWEB Applet Rev.2.01.xxx or former version. It is not required for the LCTWEB Applet Rev.2.03.xxx or later version.

Introduction ROI-S05752

-2-

1.1 Accessing the NLITE E

There are two types LCT version corresponded to the IDU F/W version. Check the LCT type indicated on the LCT CD-ROM before connecting the PC to the IDU. The LCTWEB Pallet Version 1 (Rev.1.xx.xx) is installed into the IDU and the LCTWEB Applet Version 2 (Rev. 2.xx.xx) is installed into the PC as follows.

PC (LCT)

NLITE E

PC (LCT)

CD-ROM

LCTWEB Applet IDU PC CD-ROM

Version 1: Rev.1.xx.xx (IDU preinstalled)

CTRL F/W Version 2: Rev.2.x.x - PMC - SMU - LCT WEB Applet

- USB Driver - Java Runtime

Type 001 Version 1.0 LCT WEB Setup Files - USB Driver - Java Runtime

Version 2: Rev.2.xx.xx (Installation from CD-ROM to PC)

CTRL F/W Version 3: Rev. 3.x.x - PMC - SMU

- USB Driver - Java Runtime - LCT WEB Applet (Rev. 2.01.xxx or former)

Type 002 Version 2.x LCT WEB Setup Files - USB Driver - Java Runtime - LCT WEB Applet (Rev. 2.01.xxx or former)

- USB Driver - LCT WEB Applet (Rev. 2.03.xxx or later)

Type 002 Version 2.x LCT WEB Setup Files - USB Driver - LCT WEB Applet (Rev. 2.03.xxx or later)

LCT-WEB Applet(Pre-Installed)

USB DriverJava Runtime


LCT-WEB Setup File

LCT Ver.1.xx



LCT-WEB Setup File

LCT-WEB AppletLCT-WEB Applet

NLITE E IDULCT Ver.2.xx

LCT WEB APPLET (Rev.2.01.xxx or former version)

SELV

!

AUX/ALMNMS NE

ALM

SC IN/OUT EOW

PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

NLite E NEO

LCT

OC-3 INOC-3 OUT

PULL

ALM

OC-3 INOC-3 OUT

(Blank)

ONLINEONLINE GG

G

SELV

!

AUX/ALMNMS NE

ALM

SC IN/OUT EOW

PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

NLite E NEO

LCT

OC-3 OUT OC-3 IN

PULL

SELV

!

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

PULL


G

G

G


-3-

1 Connect the Computer (PC) with a USB cable between the LCT port and the USB port,

Notes: 1. Install the USB modem driver, Java 2 Run Time Module, LctWeb Run Time (for LCT Ver.2 IDU) and create the dial-up connection before trying to connect the LCT. For the details, refer to Chapter 10 to Chapter 13.

2. USB modem driver should be installed first before creating the dial-up connection.

3. The Java 2 Run Time installation is not required when the LCTWEB Applet Rev.2.03.xxx or later version is used.

NLITE E IDU

USB Driver USB DriverLCT-WEB Setup File

LCT Ver.2.xx

LCT-WEB AppletLCT-WEB Applet

Note : For the later version of the LCT WEB Applet Rev. 2.03.xxx, the LCT WEB Applet includes . Runtime.

LCT WEB APPLET (Rev.2.03.xxx or later version)

LCT-WEB Applet

Java

SELV

!

AUX/ALMNMS NE

ALM

SC IN/OUT EOW

PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

NLite E NEO

LCT

OC-3 OUT OC-3 IN

PULL

SELV

!

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

PULL


G

G

G

USB Cable

PC for LCT

USB port

NLITE E IDU

LCT NMS NE

NLite E NEO ODU

LCT port

LCT SETUP

SELV

!

AUX/ALMNMS NE

ALM

SC IN/OUT EOW

PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

NLite E NEO

LCT

OC-3 INOC-3 OUT

PULL

ALM

OC-3 INOC-3 OUT

(Blank)

ONLINEONLINE G

G

G


-4-

2 Click on the “START” menu button, select “Connect to”, “LCT”, then, “Connect LCT” dial-up dialog is appeared,

Note: When type of the LCTWEB and the F/W of the IDU differs, following “ERROR” alert appears.


-5-

For Version 1

3 The dialog box “Connect LCT” appears,

4 Click on the “Dial” button, then the PC is connected to the IDU,

5 Open the Internet Explorer,

6 Enter URL address: Http//172.17.254.253 on the Internet Explorer and press the “Enter” key,


-6-

For Version 2 (Example)

7 The dialog box “Connect LCT” appears,

8 Click on the “Dial” button, then the PC is connected to the IDU,


-7-

Note: When type of the LCTWEB (ver. 2.xx) is applied for the F/W (ver. 2.xx) of the IDU, “ERROR Wrong LCT Type; terminal cannot connect to IDU” alert appears. In that case, start the Internet Explorer and enter URL address: Http//172.17.254.253 on the Internet Explorer and press the “Enter” key.

When type of the LCTWEB (ver. 2.xx) is applied for the F/W (ver. 3.xx) of the IDU, double click on the short-cut icon or select the“Programs” → “NEC_ LCT” → “LCT For STD” from the “start” menu as mentioned above.

10 Enter User ID and password in User/Password entry fields and press the “Login” button,

9 Double click on the short-cut icon or select the “Programs” → “NEC_ LCT” → “LCT For STD” from the “start” menu,


-8-

Default password of Admin is defined as “12345678”

The password can be changed by Administrator privilege. The LCT operator must have the security system privilege to control of NLITE E NEO systems. (The password change is described in Chapter 6.3 Maintenance 2)

11 Following LCT Open View is displayed, (Cascaded Alarm/Status items are displayed in Main area by default.)

User ID Pass Word PrivilegeAdmin ******** Access to the LCT and controlUser (non password) Access to the LCT (monitor only)

NLITE E LCT Open View (Example)


-9-

Symbols in the Open View are described as follows.

Description of the LCT MENU Conventions

LCT MENU

“SET” button appears/disappears depending on the Menu item selected in the “LCT MENU”.

Main area

Menu area

Common area

Alarm StatusEquipment SetupInventoryAUX I/OMaintenanceProvisioningMeteringPMON(History)

LCT MENU

Maintenance ON

Summary Status areaProgress State area

Title

LOGOUT

Common

Progress State:

CloseMaximizeMinimize

Title bar

Summary Status

ODU No.1 Normal MODEM No.1

MODEM No.2ODU No.2 Normal

Normal

Normal

INTFC(Main)

CTRL

Normal

Normal

INTFC(Sub)

Admin

SET

Normal StateMinor AlarmMajor Alarm

Criteria

LCT MENU SETAlarm/Status disappearEquipment Setup appearInventory disappearAUX I/O appearMaintenance disappearProvisioning appearMetering disappearPMON (History) disappear


-10-

Summary Status Area

Following summary items show the operating status.

Note: When the ODU No. 2, MODEM No. 2 or INTFC (Sub) is not mounted, corresponding item is colored gray. INTFC (Main)/INTFC (Sub) are changed to INTFC (WORK)/INTFC(PROT) in APS system.

Progress State Area

Following Response is displayed. When “Set” button is clicked.

Execute all the changes made in the items shown in the main area by the selected “LCT MENU”. Displays confirmation box to Logout. Clicking LOG OUT button, the LCT-Web screen is logged out and the Login screen is displayed. Reload recent data to display.

Common

SET

LOGOUT

RELOAD

For 1+1 Configuration For 1+0 Configuration

Item Status Indication Item Status IndicationMaintenance On (yellow) Off (white) Maintenance On (yellow) Off (white)

ODU No.1 Normal (green) Alarm (red) ODU Normal (green) Alarm (red)

ODU No.2 Normal (green) Alarm (red) IDU Normal (green) Alarm (red)

MODEM No.1 Normal (green) Alarm (red)MODEM No.2 Normal (green) Alarm (red)INTFC (Main) Normal (green) Alarm (red)INTFC (Sub) Normal (green) Alarm (red)CTRL Normal (green) Alarm (red)

SET Control Response

OK - Response OKNG - Response NG

: Menu Button displays pull-down menu

: No Selected

: Selected

Set : Execute control/setup for each item

Symbol;


-11-

1.2 LCT MENU Items

LCT MENU is consisted of the following table.

LCT MENU SUB-MENU REMARKS

Alarm/Status Refer to “2. Alarm/Status”Equipment Setup Refer to “3. Equipment Setup”Inventory Refer to “2. Inventory”AUX I/O Refer to “3. AUX. I/O”Maintenance Refer to “4. Maintenance”


Provisioning Refer to “5. Provisioning”XC Setting *6BER Threshold SettingSUB Interface For SONET onlySC AssignmentLAN Port SettingOC-3 Setting For SONET onlyMS-AIS generation For SONET onlyALS Function *1TX Power ControlCondition for TX/RX SW *2Condition for APS *3Relay SettingTCN Threshold(15min)TCN Threshold(1day)PMON SelectOthers

Metering Refer to “6. Metering”


-12-

Notes:*1 Only provides for SONET OC-3 OPT interface.*2 Only provides for 1+1 configuration.*3 Only provides for APS in SONET for OC-3 OPT interface.*4 Only provides for LAN.*

PMON (History) Refer to “9. PMON”RX Level(24H/15min)RX Level(7days/day)Total(24H/15min) *4Total(7days/day) *4RMON(Line)(24H/15min) *5RMON(Line)(7days/day) *5RMON(DMR)(24H/15min) *5RMON(DMR)(7days/day) *5DMR(W)(7days/day) For SONET onlyDMR(W)(24H/15min) For SONET onlyDMR(P)(7days/day) *3DMR(P)(24H/15min) *3MUX(W)(7days/day) For SONET onlyMUX(W)(24H/15min) For SONET onlyMUX(P)(7days/day) *3MUX(P)(24H/15min) *3

LCT MENU SUB-MENU REMARKS


-13-

1.3 Alarm Status (SONET)

When click on the “Alarm Status” button in “LCT MENU”, following items/status (sample) are displayed in Main Area.

ALM items of SONET are listed in Table 2-2.

Alarm/Status items are displayed in Main area in default when accessing the LCT.

Note: Alarm/Status indication varies depending on the system configuration.

Notes: Item (*1) is displayed in XPIC configuration only. Item (*2) is displayed in Hot Standby configuration only. Item (*3) is displayed in Hot Standby and Twinpath configuration.

Note: Item (*1) is displayed in XPIC configuration only.

---ODU---Item Status

No.1 No. 2TX Power Normal Normal TX Input Normal Normal RX Level Normal Normal APC Normal Normal ODU CPU/Cable Open Normal Normal Mute Status OFF OFFLO REF Normal Normal (*1)TX SW Status No.1 (*2)RX SW Status No.2 (*3)

---MODEM---Item Status

No.1 No. 2Unequipped Normal Normal Module Normal Normal LOF Normal Normal Frame ID Normal Normal High BER Normal Normal Low BER Normal Normal Early Warning Normal Normal MOD Normal Normal DEM Normal Normal Input Voltage Normal Normal Power Supply Normal Normal IF Cable Short Normal Normal Cable EQL Normal Normal XIF Normal Normal (*1)XPIC Status Normal Normal (*1)XREF Normal Normal (*1)Linearizer Function OPR NON OPR Linearizer Normal NormalATPC Power Mode Active Active


-14-

Notes: Item (*1) is displayed in APS configuration only. Item (*2) is displayed in XPIC configuration only.

Note: Item (*1) is displayed in Main LAN configuration only. Click on the corresponding item in status block, following details LAN PORT status in the LAN/WS INTFC appears.

Link: Displaying LINK status for respective Port.Collision: Displaying occurrence of Collision status in Half Duplex mode for respective

Port.LLF: Forced LINK off control status detecting the link loss of the facing

equipment for respective Port.Speed &Duplex:Displaying linked mode for respective Port.

---CTRL---Item Status

CTRL Module NormalMMC Mount Not MountedAPS SW Fail Normal (*1)APS Online Status Working (*1)APS Lock in Status Normal (*1)XCTRL Normal (*2)XPIC Mode Mismatch Normal (*2)

---INTFC (Main) (1)---Item Status

MainUnequipped Normal Type Mismatch Normal Module Normal LOS(MUX) Normal LOF(MUX) Normal E-BER(MUX) Normal SD(MUX) Normal LOS(DMR) Normal LOF(DMR) Normal E-BER(DMR) Normal SD(DMR) Normal LAN LINK Normal (*1)Speed & Duplex Normal (*1)Inphase Inphase TF Normal Output Control Normal

Item Status

Link Collision LLF Speed&DuplexMain PORT1 Link Normal Normal 10M-Half(MDI)Main PORT2 Link Normal Normal 10M-Half(MDIX)

Close


-15-

Following Alarm Status of the INTFC (Sub) is displayed when the LAN/WS INTFC is used.

Note: Click on the corresponding item in status block (*1), following details LAN PORT status in the LAN/WS INTFC appears.

Link: Displaying LINK status for respective Port.Collision: Displaying occurrence of Collision status in Half Duplex mode for respective

Port.LLF: Forced LINK off control status detecting the link loss of the facing

equipment for respective Port.Speed &Duplex:Displaying linked mode for respective Port.

Following Alarm Status of the INTFC is applied in the APS configuration.

---INTFC (Sub) (2)---Item Status

MainUnequipped Normal Type Mismatch Normal Module Normal LAN Link Normal (*1)Speed & Duplex Normal (*1)WS In/out LOS Normal WS AIS Generated GeneratedWS AIS Received Received

Item Status

Link Collision LLF Speed&DuplexSub PORT1 Link Normal Normal 10M-Half(MDI)Sub PORT2 Link Normal Normal 10M-Half(MDI)

Close

---INTFC---Item Status

WORK PROTUnequipped Normal Type Mismatch Normal Normal Module Normal Normal LOS(MUX) Normal Normal LOF(MUX) Normal Normal E-BER(MUX) Normal Normal SD(MUX) Normal Normal LOS(DMR) Normal Normal LOF(DMR) Normal Normal E-BER(DMR) Normal Normal SD(DMR) Normal Normal Inphase Inphase Inphase TF Normal Normal Output Control Normal Normal


-16-

Notes: OFS:Out of Frame SecondUAS:Unavailable SecondES:Errored SecondSES:Severely Errored SecondBBE:Background Block ErrorSEP:Severely Errored Period

---UAE---Item Status

WORK PROTOC-3(1) UAE(MUX) Normal Normal OC-3(2) UAE(MUX) Normal Normal OC-3(1) UAE(DMR) Normal Normal OC-3(2) UAE(DMR) Normal Normal

---TCN RX LEV---Item Status

No.1 No.2 TCN-RX LEV-15min Normal Normal TCN-RX LEV-1day Normal Normal

Item Status

---15min 1day --- WORK PROTTCN-OFS-15min (DMR) Normal Normal TCN-UAS-15min (DMR) Normal Normal TCN-ES-15min (DMR) Normal Normal TCN-SES-15min (DMR) Normal Normal TCN-BBE-15min (DMR) Normal Normal TCN-SEP-15min (DMR) Normal Normal TCN-OFS-15min(MUX) Normal Normal TCN-UAS-15min(MUX) Normal Normal TCN-ES-15min(MUX) Normal Normal TCN-SES-15min(MUX) Normal Normal TCN-BBE-15min(MUX) Normal Normal TCN-SEP-15min(MUX) Normal Normal TCN-OFS-1day (DMR) Normal Normal TCN-UAS-1day (DMR) Normal Normal TCN-ES-1day (DMR) Normal Normal TCN-SES-1day (DMR) Normal Normal TCN-BBE-1day (DMR) Normal Normal TCN-SEP-1day (DMR) Normal Normal TCN-OFS-1day(MUX) Normal Normal TCN-UAS-1day(MUX) Normal Normal TCN-ES-1day(MUX) Normal Normal TCN-SES-1day(MUX) Normal Normal TCN-BBE-1day(MUX) Normal Normal TCN-SEP-1day(MUX) Normal Normal


-17-

Table 1-1 ALM/STATUS List (SONET) (1/2)

No. ALM/STATUS ITEM EVENT STATUS SOURCE OF EVENT

Configuration CriteriaDefault1+0 1+1

1 ODU CPU/Cable Open ALM1 ODU1 CPU failure or IF Cable is open ODU No.1 Major2 ODU CPU/Cable Open ALM2 ODU2 CPU failure or IF Cable is open ODU No.2 *1 Major3 ODU ALM1 ODU1 total alarm ODU No.1 Major4 ODU ALM2 ODU2 total alarm ODU No.2 *1 Major5 TX PWR ALM1 ODU1 output power decreased ODU No.1 Major6 TX PWR ALM2 ODU2 output power decreased ODU No.2 *1 Major7 TX INPUT ALM1 ODU1 TX IF input level decreased ODU No.1 Major8 TX INPUT ALM2 ODU2 TX IF input level decreased ODU No.2 *1 Major9 APC ALM1 ODU1 LO OSC APC loop out of lock ODU No.1 Major10 APC ALM2 ODU2 LO OSC APC loop out of lock ODU No.2 *1 Major11 RX LEVEL ALM1 ODU1 Received level decreased ODU No.1 Major12 RX LEVEL ALM2 ODU2 Received level decreased ODU No.2 *1 Major13 IF CABLE SHORT ALM1 IF cable connected to ODU1short MODEM No.1 Major14 IF CABLE SHORT ALM2 IF cable connected to ODU2 short MODEM No.2 *1 Major15 MUTE STATUS1 ODU1 Mute Status ODU No.1 Status16 MUTE STATUS2 ODU2 Mute Status ODU No.2 *1 Status17 LO REF ALM1 ODU1 LO reference signal is lost ODU No.1 *2 Minor18 LO REF ALM2 ODU2 LO reference signal is lost ODU No.2 *1,*2 *2 Minor19 IDU ALM IDU total alarm CTRL Major20 IDU CPU ALM IDU CPU failure CTRL *1,*3 *3 Major22 MEMORY ALM MMC memory error CTRL Major23 ATPC PWR MODE1 No.1 ATPC failure, Hold/Maximum/Minimum*5 poweroutput CTRL Status24 ATPC PWR MODE2 No.2 ATPC failure, Hold//MaximumMinimum*5 poweroutput CTRL *1 Status25 PS ALM1 No.1 power supply failure (only1+1) MODEM No.1 Major26 PS ALM2 No.2 power supply failure (only1+1) MODEM No.2 *1 Major27 MOD ALM1 PLL APC unlock, output level down, CLK loss in MODEM1 MODEM No.1 Major28 MOD ALM2 PLL APC unlock, output level down, CLK loss in MODEM2 MODEM No.2 *1 Major29 DEM ALM1 Carrier/Frame Asynchronous at MODEM1 MODEM No.1 Major30 DEM ALM2 Carrier/Frame Asynchronous at MODEM2 MODEM No.2 *1 Major33 EARLY WARNING1 EARLY WARNING is detected in No.1 CH MODEM No.1 *1 Status34 EARLY WARNING2 EARLY WARNING is detected in No.2 CH MODEM No.2 *1 Status35 HIGH BER ALM1 High BER (selectable) is detected in MODEM1 MODEM No.1 Major36 HIGH BER ALM2 High BER (selectable) is detected inMODEM2 MODEM No.2 *1 Major37 LOW BER ALM1 Low BER (selectable) is detected in MODEM1 MODEM No.1 Minor38 LOW BER ALM2 Low BER (selectable) is detected in MODEM2 MODEM No.2 *1 Minor39 LOF1 Loss of Radio frame synchronization in MODEM1 MODEM No.1 Major40 LOF2 Loss of Radio frame synchronization in MODEM2 MODEM No.2 *1 Major41 FRAME ID ALM1 ID is no coincidence in MODEM1 MODEM No.142 FRAME ID ALM2 ID is no coincidence in MODEM2 MODEM No.2 *143 CABLE EQL FAIL1 Cable EQL control is lost in MODEM1 MODEM No.1 Major44 CABLE EQL FAIL2 Cable EQL control is lost in MODEM2 MODEM No.2 *1 Major45 LINEARIZER FAIL1 BB LNZ control is lost in MODEM1 ODU No.1 Major46 LINEARIZER FAIL2 BB LNZ control is lost in MODEM1 ODU No.2 *1 Major47 XPIC STATUS1 No. 1 XPIC function is off MODEM No.1 *2 Status48 XPIC STATUS2 No. 2 XPIC function is off MODEM No.2 *1,*2 *2 Status49 XCTRL ALM1 No. 1 XPIC control failure MODEM No.1 *2 Major50 XCTRL ALM2 No. 2 XPIC control failure MODEM No.2 *2 Major51 XIF ALM1 No. 1 XIF signal is lost MODEM No.1 *2 Major52 XIF ALM2 No. 2 XIF signal is lost MODEM No.2 *1,*2 *2 Major53 XREF ALM1 No. 1 XPIC reference CLK is lost MODEM No.1 *2 Minor54 XREF ALM2 No. 2 XPIC reference CLK is lost MODEM No.2 *1,*2 *2 Minor55 INTFC(1) INPAHSE Main INTFC inphase status INTFC *1 Status56 INTFC(2) INPAHSE Prot INTFC inphase status OC-3 INTFC P *1 Status63 OC-3(1) UAE No. 1 OC-3 INTFC UAS is generating OC-3 INTFC W Status64 OC-3(2) UAE No. 2 OC-3 INTFC UAS is generating OC-3 INTFC P *1 Status65 OC-3(1) LOS(MUX) No. 1 OC-3 from MUX, loss of signal is detected OC-3 INTFC Major


-18-

Notes: *1. Not applied.*2. XPIC configuration only.*3. Not displayed on LCT.*4. APS configuration only.*5. Selectable.*6. LAN configuration only.

66 OC-3(2) LOS(MUX) No. 2 OC-3 from MUX, loss of signal is detected OC-3 INTFC *1 Major67 OC-3(1) LOF(MUX) No. 1 OC-3 from MUX, loss of frame is detected OC-3 INTFC Major68 OC-3(2) LOF(MUX) No. 2 OC-3 from MUX, loss of frame is detected OC-3 INTFC *1 Major69 OC-3(1) LOS(DMR) No. 1 OC-3 from DMR, loss of signal is detected OC-3 INTFC Major70 OC-3(2) LOS(DMR) No. 2 OC-3 from DMR, loss of signal is detected OC-3 INTFC Major71 OC-3(1) LOF(DMR) No. 1 OC-3 from DMR, loss of frame is detected OC-3 INTFC Major72 OC-3(2) LOF(DMR) No. 2 OC-3 from DMR, loss of frame is detected OC-3 INTFC *1 Major73 OC-3(1) E-BER(MUX) No. 1 OC-3 from MUX, Excessive-BER is detected OC-3 INTFC Major74 OC-3(2) E-BER(MUX) No. 2 OC-3 from MUX, Excessive-BER is detected OC-3 INTFC Major75 OC-3(1) SD(MUX) No. 1 OC-3 from MUX, Signal Degrade is detected OC-3 INTFC Major76 OC-3(2) SD(MUX) No. 2 OC-3 from MUX, Signal Degrade is detected OC-3 INTFC Major77 OC-3(1) E-BER(DMR) No. 1 OC-3 from DMR, Excessive-BER is detected OC-3 INTFC Major78 OC-3(2) E-BER(DMR) No. 2 OC-3 from DMR, Excessive-BER is detected OC-3 INTFC Major79 OC-3(1) SD(DMR) No. 1 OC-3 from DMR, Signal Degrade is detected OC-3 INTFC Major80 OC-3(2) SD(DMR) No. 2 OC-3 from DMR, Signal Degrade is detected OC-3 INTFC Major81 OC-3(1) TF ALM No. 1 OC-3 output to MUX is failure OC-3 INTFC Major82 OC-3(2) TF ALM No. 2 OC-3 output to MUX is failure OC-3 INTFC Major83 APS SW FAIL APS switch is failure CTRL *4 Major84 LAN LINK LAN LINK status Main INTFC *6 Major85 LAN COLLISION LAN status Main INTFC *6 Status86 LAN LLF ALM LAN Link Loss Forwarding status Main INTFC *6 Status87 SPEED & DUPLEX LAN Port setting Main INTFC *6 Status88 WS INPUT LOSS WS Input signal is lost Main INTFC *6 Minor89 WS AIS RCVD WS AIS signal is received Main INTFC *6 Status90 WS AIS GENERATED WS AIS signal is generated Main INTFC *6 Status95 MODEM ALM1 MODEM1 total alarm MODEM Major96 MODEM ALM2 MODEM2 total alarm MODEM *1 Major97 INTFC(1) ALM Main INTFC total alarm OC-3 INTFC Major98 INTFC(2) ALM Main INTF Sub INTFC OC-3 INTFC/

SUB INTFCMajor

99 CTRL ALM CTRL UNIT total alarm CTRL Major100 MODEM 1 UNEQUIP MODEM1 is unequipped CTRL Major101 MODEM 2 UNEQUIP MODEM2 is unequipped CTRL Major102 INTFC(1) UNEQUIP MAIN INTFC is unequipped CTRL Major103 INTFC(2) UNEQUIP SUB INTFC is unequipped CTRL Minor104 INPUT VOLTAGE ALM1 PS1 input over voltage/lower voltage MODEM No.1 Major105 INPUT VOLTAGE ALM2 PS2 input over voltage/lower voltage MODEM No.2 *1 Major106 INTFC (1) TYPE MISSMATCH Mounted INTFC differs from configuration setting Main INTFC Major107 INTFC (2) TYPE MISSMATCH Mounted INTFC differs from configuration setting Main INTFC Major108 OC-3 (1) OUTPUT CONTROL MS-AIS control for MUX Main INTFC *5 Status109 OC-3 (2) OUTPUT CONTROL MS-AIS control for MUX Main INTFC *5 Status110 OC-3 (1) APS LOCKIN STATUS APS is in lockin Main INTFC *4 Status111 OC-3 (2) APS LOCKIN STATUS APS is in lockin Main INTFC *4 Status

Table 1-1 ALM/STATUS List (SONET) (2/2)

No. ALM/STATUS ITEM EVENT STATUS SOURCE OF EVENT

Configuration CriteriaDefault1+0 1+1


-19-

1.4 Equipment Setup (SONET)

Note: Click on the “SET” button in Common area after every setting items has been entered.

OC-3 (OPTICAL) Equipment Setup (Sample)

1 Click on the menu button “User Interface” and select corresponding item,

User Interface SONET OC-3Redundancy Setting 1+1(Hot Standby TERM) INTFC(Main) OC-3(OPTICAL)INTFC(Sub) NOT USEDXPIC Usage Not Used Used(Main Master) Used(SUB Master)APS Function Unavailable AvailableModulation Scheme 128QAMTransmission Capacity 156MB

TX RF Frequency [MHz] 6048.975RX RF Frequency [MHz] 6301.015Frame ID ID1TX Power Control MTPC ATPCLAN Port UsageLAN Capacity---ODU FREQ INFO---TX Start Frequency [MHz] 5930.375TX Stop Frequency [MHz] 6162.633Frequency Step [MHz] 0.050Shift Frequency [MHz] 252.040Upper/Lower LOWER SUB Band E

User Interface Redundancy Setting INTFC(Main) INTFC(Sub) XPIC Usage APS Function Modulation SchemeTransmission Capacity


-20-

User Interface

2 Click on the menu button “Redundancy Setting” and select corresponding item,

The “User Interface” item selected decides the selectable items that follows.

3 Setup can be performed by clicking on menu button to select setup item from pull-down menu, clicking setting button or entering values, then click on the “SET” button in Common area to complete and confirm the setup procedure.

For the XPIC Usage, set Main Master and Sub Master in the XPIC configuration. Set to Not Used in other configurations. In the XPIC, define the IDU for the Main Master and Sub Master channels, they must be connected to one dual polarized antenna. The reference local frequency and the action control of the ATPC/MTPC are applied from the Main Master channel to the Sub Master

User Interface SONET OC-3SONET GbE OC-3

Redundancy Setting

Redundancy Setting 1+0(TERM)1+1(Hot Standby TERM)1+1(Twinpath TERM)

INTFC(Main) (*)

INTFC(Main) OC-3(Optical) (*)GbE over OC-3

INTFC(Sub) (*)

INTFC(Sub) Not Used (*)OC-3 (Optical)LAN

Note: Select OC-3 OPT for APS, when APS to be configured to the system.

XPIC Usage

XPIC Usage Not UsedUsed (Main Master)Used (Sub Master)

Note: When XPIC is configured to the system, polarization for Main Master/Sub Muster must not be setup crossed between two stations.


-21-

channel.

(*) INTFC(Main)/INTFC(Sub) are changed to INTFC (WORK)/INTFC(PROT) in APS system.

RF Frequency

Notes: 1 Set different values for No.1 TX frequency and No.2 TX frequency in the Twinpath configuration.

2 Depending on the ODU type, there are two modes for the RF frequency setup.

1. When the transmitting frequency is set, the receiving frequency is automatically assigned.

2. When the transmitting frequency is set, the receiving frequency is automatically assigned and assignment of it in manual is also available by changing the RX RF frequency values which is automatically assigned.

3 The transmitting frequency for the Main Master and Sub Master must be set the same and also the receiving frequency. The frequency setup must be performed at the Main Master station first and then, Sub Master station.

The entered TX RF frequency value should be within the Start and Stop frequency range of Sub-Band which is indicated on the Name Plate of each ODU. For details, refer to the Appendix RADIO FREQUENCY PLAN OF THE NLITE E NEO in Section 1.

Caution: For the 6/7/8/10 GHz band, the BPF of TX and RX of the ODU are adjusted to each assigned frequency. Then, to change the RF channel frequency, both BPFs replacement and LCT setup are required.

TX Frequency and RF Frequency for No.1 and No.2 are displayed in Twinpath configuration.

APS Function Unavailable Available

TX RF Frequency(No.1) [MHz]TX RF Frequency(No.2) [MHz]RX RF Frequency(No.1) [MHz]RX RF Frequency(No.2) [MHz]


-22-

Frame ID

Note: The frame ID is set in order to discriminate the signal. As a signal with a different ID cannot be received, the ID of the opposite station should be set the same. The number of IDs which can be selected as follows;

ID1 through ID32 : XPIC is not used. ID1 through ID16 : Main Master in the XPIC configuration. ID17 through ID32 : Sub Master in the XPIC configuration.

TX Power Control

Notes: 1 When the MTPC is selected, TX output level can be controlled by 1 dB step within MTPC range in Maintenance “On” state.

When the ATPC is selected, TX output level is automatically controlled by 1 dB step within ATPC range.

2 For the details of ATPC, refer to the 3.5.3 Automatic Transmitter Power Control in Section 2.

3 In the XPIC configuration, this setup is performed at the Main Master station. The setup operation and ATPC/MTPC control of the Sub Master station are applied from the Main Master station. The action control of the ATPC/MTPC are applied from the Main Master channel to the Sub Master channel. The role of the Main Master channel is switched to the Sub Master channel when the Main Master channel is a failure.

Frame ID(No.1)Frame ID(No.2)

TX Power Control MTPC ATPC


-23-

LAN Port Usage (Main)

For GbE INTFC

Note: When the GbE INTFC is applied, LAN Port Usage (MAIN) is fixed to "USED" and also LAN Port Capacity (MAIN) is to 150Mbps.

For LAN/WS INTFC

Note: Select "SONET over OC-3" from User Interface in the Equipment Setup, LAN over OC-3 is assigned for the INTFC Main.

1. LAN Port Usage (MAIN): Setting for radio transmission band in each port.P1=75MB/P2=75MB (default) P1=100MB/P2=50MB Best Effort P1=100MB/P2=Not Used

2. LAN Capacity (MAIN): The LAN capacity is fixed to 150MB.

Notes: 1. LAN Capacity may be set when WS/LAN is used.2. Selectable LAN capacity is depending on the main

signal transmission capacity. 64kbps: SC and RSOH E1/F1 are usable. 128kbps: SC1-2 are usable. 192kbps: RSOH DCCr is usable. 256kbps: SC1-4 are usable. 2Mbitps: When LAN is used.

4 Click on the “SET” button in a Common area to execute setup.

LAN Port Usage (MAIN) USEDLAN Port Capacity (MAIN) 150Mbps

LAN Port Usage (MAIN) P1=75MB/P2=75MBP1=100MB/P2=50MBBest EffortP1=100MB/P2=Not Used

LAN Port Capacity (MAIN) 150Mbps

LAN Port Usage (SUB) P1-2 Shared/1Port Only(WS)P1-2 Shared/1Port Only(SC)

LAN Capacity (SUB) 64kbps128kbps192kbps256kbps2Mbps


-24-

5 Click on the “SET” button in Common area, then “OK” is displayed in Progress area when the setup is properly executed.

Note: “NG” and error message are displayed in Progress State area, if there is invalid setting in the Equipment Setup.

---ODU FREQ INFO---TX Start Frequency (No.1) [MHz]TX Stop Frequency (No.1) [MHz]Frequency Step (No.1) [MHz]Shift Frequency (No.1)[MHz]Upper/Lower (No.1)Sub Band (No.1)TX Start Frequency (No.2) [MHz]TX Stop Frequency (No.2) [MHz]Frequency Step (No.2) [MHz]Shift Frequency (No.2) [MHz]Upper/Lower (No.2)Sub Band (No.2)

ROI-S05752 Inventory

-25-

2. Inventory1 Click on the “Inventory” button in “LCT MENU” then

Inventory Lists are displayed.

---ODU---Package Name Code No. Serial No. Date H/W Version F/W Version

No.1 ODU NWA-009034A 00001017 2005.12 210A 1.00No.2 ODU NWA-009034A 00001018 2005.12 210A 1.00

---IDU---Package Name Code No. Serial No. Date H/W Version F/W Version

MODEM No.1 MODEM MP0-0H2940-A000 00001073 2006.01 00.03 -MODEM No.2 MODEM MP0-0H2940-A000 00001074 2006.01 00.05 -IDU(CTRL) CTRL MP0-0H2950-A000 00001010 2006.01 01.00 1.03MAIN(WORK) OC-3 INTFC(o) MP0-0H2960-A000 00001053 2006.01 01.00 -

---FPGA---Package Name Code No. Version

MODEM No.1 - - 01.00MODEM No.2 - - 01.00CTRL CTRL FPGA NWA-P4061A-000 01.06MAIN(WORK) SONET-OC-3

FPGAP4064A 01.04

---Modem Parameter Version---MODEM No.1 11MODEM No.2 11

---Internet Protocol Properties---IP Address Subnet MaskDefault GatewayMAC Address 00-00-00-00-00-00

LCT MENU


Inventory ROI-S05752

-26-

---Software Key---Category Item Status

Category & Redundancy

Capacity 156 [MB]Redundancy 1+1

Precheck Enable ONCapacity (previous) 156 [MB]

Redundancy (previous) 1+1

Bit Rate FreeBit Free Free

Precheck Enable ONBit Free (previous) Free

LAN INTFCLAN Available

Precheck Enable ONLAN (previous) Available

XPICXPIC Available

Precheck Enable ONXPIC (previous) Available

Notes: *1 Availability of Capacity & Redundancy Key at the present. *2 Availability of Bit Free Key at the present.*3 Availability of LAN INTFC Key at the present. *4 Availability of XPIC Key at the present.*5 Comparing contents of the former Software Key with Up dating one.*6 Former status of the Key is indicated as previous.

*3

*4

*1*5

*5

*5*6

*6

*6*2

*6

*5

ROI-S05752 AUX. I/O

-27-

3. AUX. I/O

Six input (photocoupler) and six output (relay) are provided in the IDU for external control and alarm outputs of Housekeeping and Cluster.

1 Click on the “AUX I/O” button in “LCT MENU”.

LCT MENU


---INPUT---CONDITION

INPUT1 CloseINPUT2 CloseINPUT3 OpenINPUT4 OpenINPUT5 OpenINPUT6 Open

---OUTPUT---Value

OUTPUT1 OpenOUTPUT2 OpenOUTPUT3 OpenOUTPUT4 Open

OpenClose

2 Click menu button of required number of OUTPUT,

3 Select “Open” or “Close” to decide output mode to apply for event output,

4 Click on the “SET” button in a Common area to execute setup. Note: From INPUT 1 to INPUT 6 can be assigned to HK1 to

HK6 input.From INPUT 3 to INPUT 6 can be used to Cluster IN4 to Cluster IN1.From OUTPUT 1 to OUTPUT 4 can be assigned to HK OUT1 to HK OUT 4.From OUTPUT 1 to OUTPUT 4 can be used to Cluster OUT 1 to OUT 4.Cluster can be used up to 4 and for each Cluster IN# corresponding Cluster OUT# should be set in the opposite station.

5 Click on the “SET” button in Common area, then “OK” is displayed in Progress area when the setup is properly executed.

Note: “NG” and error message are displayed in Progress State area, if there is invalid setting in the Aux I/O.

Maintenance ROI-S05752

-28-

4. Maintenance1 Click on the “Maintenance” button in “LCT MENU”,

2 Click on the “Maintenance1” pull-down menu to display control items,

3 Click on the setting button “On” for Maintenance and Click on the “Set” button, then value field turns to “On”,

Maintenance1 of the SONET system is described in Chapter 4.1 Maintenance1(SONET).

4 Click on the “Maintenance2” pull-down menu to upload/download program file or reset CPU,

Maintenance2 is described in Chapter 4.2 Maintenance2.

LCT MENU



---Maintenance1---Item Value SettingMaintenance On Off On Set

ROI-S05752 Maintenance

-29-

4.1 Maintenance1(SONET)

---Maintenance1---Item Value SettingMaintenance On Off On SetTX SW Manual Control Auto Auto No.1 No.2 SetRX SW Manual Control Auto Auto No.1 No.2 SetRX SW Maintenance Mode ManualATPC Manual Control(No.1) On Off On [dB] SetATPC Manual Control(No.2) Off Off On SetTX Mute Control(No.1) Off Off On SetTX Mute Control(No.2) Off Off On SetCW Control(No.1) Off Off On SetCW Control(No.2) Off Off On SetAPS Manual Control Auto Auto Working Protection SetAPS Maintenance Mode ManualIF Loopback(No.1) Off Off On SetIF Loopback(No.2) Off Off On SetMain Loopback (Near End) Off Off On SetMain Loopback (Far End) Off Off On SetLAN Device Reset SetLinearizer Control(No.1) Auto Auto Forced Reset SetLinearizer Control(No.2) Auto Auto Forced Reset SetALS Restart --- 2sec 90sec SetXPIC Control Local(No.1) Auto Auto Forced Reset SetXPIC Control Local(No.2) Auto Auto Forced Reset SetXPIC Control Remote(No.1) Auto Auto Forced Reset SetXPIC Control Remote(No.2) Auto Auto Forced Reset Set

---Offline Maintenance---DADE Adjust --- DADE Offset DADE DADE Off SetRF SUB Band Select(No.1) --- A SetRF SUB Band Select(No.2) --- A SetAntenna Alignment Mode(No.1) Off Off On SetAntenna Alignment Mode(No.2) Off Off On Set


-30-

TX SW Manual Control

1 Click on the setting button “On” of the “Maintenance” and click on the “Set” button, then value field of the Maintenance turns from “Off” to “On”.

In Maintenance “On” mode, external parallel alarm outputs excepts CPU and PS ALM are masked and automatic control is inhibited.

Control operation using LCT must be performed in Maintenance “On” condition.

2 Click on the setting button “Auto”, “No. 1” or “No. 2” TX SW to select TX SW control mode and Click on the “Set” button, then the value field of the corresponding SW manual control change to the selected mode.Auto: Normal operation modeNo. 1 or No. 2: Manual control mode

ATPC Manual Control

3 Click on the setting button “On” and enter attenuation value within ATPC range, then click on the “Set” button,

In the XPIC configuration, the ATPC/MTPC can not be set in the Sub Master station. The setup is applied from the Main Master station.

Note *1 Additional attenuator from 0 to 5 dB can be added.

---Maintenance1---Item Value SettingMaintenance On Off On SetTX SW Manual Control Auto Auto No.1 No.2 SetRX SW Manual Control Auto Auto No.1 No.2 Set

---Maintenance1---Item Value SettingMaintenance On Off On SetATPC Manual Control(No.1) On Off On [dB] SetATPC Manual Control(No.2) Off Off On Set

ATPC/MTPC Range (SONET)

ModulationMode

Frequency Band (GHz) 6 7-8 10-11 13 15 18 23 26 28 32 38

128QAM ATPC Range 0 to 20 dB 0 to 20 dB

MTPC Range 0 to 20 dB*1 0 to 20 dB


-31-

TX Mute Control

4 Click on the setting button “On” to select TX Mute Control,

5 Click on the “Set” button and the value field change to “On”,Caution: The control affects the radio link connection.

CW Control

6 Click on the setting button “On” to set CW Control ( ) and click on the “Set” button, then value field turns to “On”,Caution: The control affects the radio link connection.

Note: When set to CW Control “On”, unmodulated RF signal is emitted.

APS Manual Control

7 Click on the control button either “Working” or “Protection” of APS control and click on the “Set” button, then value field turns to selected value,

Normal setting mode is “Auto”, set to this mode after maintenance operation has been completed. Select “Working” to keep the Working INTFC (the INTFC card is installed in Slot (1)) to Online in Manual, Select “Protection” to keep the Protection INTFC (the INTFC card is installed in Slot (2)) to Online in Manual.

The Maintenance Mode of “Manual” or “Forced” is displayed underneath that is selected in “Provisioning”.

Note:The control applies only to APS configuration.

---Maintenance1---Item Value SettingMaintenance On Off On SetTX Mute Control(No.1) Off Off On SetTX Mute Control(No.2) Off Off On Set

---Maintenance1---Item Value SettingMaintenance On Off On SetCW Control(No.1) Off Off On SetCW Control(No.2) Off Off On Set


-32-

IF Loopback

8 Click on the setting button “On” for the IF Loopback ( ) and click on the “Set” button, then value field turns to “On”,Caution: The control interrupts all traffic between 2 stations.

Note: The control applies to IF loopback in local MODEM.

Main Loopback

9 Click on the setting button “On” of the required OC-3 INTFC to be looped back and click on the “Set” button, then controlled value appears in value field,Caution: The control interrupts all traffic between 2 stations.Caution: Far End Loopback control will be canceled if radio

link failure occurs under the control has been executed.

For OC-3 (ELE)

For OC-3 (OPT) (APS)

---Maintenance1---Item Value SettingMaintenance On Off On SetAPS Manual Control Auto Auto Working Protection SetAPS Maintenance Mode Manual

---Maintenance1---Item Value SettingMaintenance On Off On SetIF Loopback(No.1) Off Off On SetIF Loopback(No.2) Off Off On Set

---Maintenance1---Item Value SettingMaintenance On Off On SetMain Loopback (Near End) Off Off On SetMain Loopback (Far End) Off Off On Set

---Maintenance1---Item Value SettingMaintenance On Off On SetMain Loopback (Near End) INTFC (1) Off Off On SetMain Loopback (Near End) INTFC (2) Off Off On SetMain Loopback (Far End) Off Off On Set


-33-

DADE Adjust

10 Click on the setting button “Offset DADE” or “DADE” Off and click on the “Set” button,

Notes:1.The DADE control applies in 1+1 configuration to adjust delay time for RX hitless switching when the INTFC status is indicated Outphase.

2.The DADE adjustment is needed in initial lineup or when the IF CABLE is replaced. It does not require any readjustment when the INTFC status is indicated In-phase. The setting conditions are as follows:DADE: Automatically adjust delay time based on either No.1 signal or No.2

signal selected by RX SW under the outphase condition of the INTFC status. The DADE control is processed assuring no interruption of traffic.

Offset DADE:Automatically adjust delay time based on either No.1 signal or No.2 signal selected by RX SW under the outphase condition of the INTFC status. Since the offset memory minimizes the latency delay, traffic interruption occurs at that moment. This Offset DADE controls the delay time difference to a minimum value than DADE control.

DADE off: Set when DADE function is not used. For particularly, when low bit rate (10 to 20 MB) transmission is applied to the system, the DADE control is not required.

Linearizer Control

11 Click on the setting button “Forced Reset” and click on the “Set” button to reset Linearizer ( ), then, selected mode appears in value field,

ALS Restart

12 Click on the setting button to select value is to be specified and click on the “Set” button,

Note: The details operation of the ALS refer to Chapter 3.5.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown Control in Section 2.

---Maintenance1---Item Value SettingMaintenance On Off On SetDADE Adjust --- DADE Offset DADE DADE Off Set

---Maintenance1---Item Value SettingMaintenance On Off On SetLinearizer Control(No.1) Auto Auto Forced Reset SetLinearizer Control(No.2) Auto Auto Forced Reset Set

---Maintenance1---Item Value SettingMaintenance On Off On SetALS Restart --- 2sec 90sec Set


-34-

XPIC Control Local

13 Click on the setting button “Forced Reset” and click on the “Set” button to reset XPIC function, then, selected mode appears in value field,

Notes:1 The control applies only to XPIC configuration for the local station. Select to “Forced Reset” for the local Main/Sub channel which is used online when the propagation is deteriorated, link test is performed or MODEM/ODU is replaced.

2 The control is simultaneously applied for the No.1 CH and No.2 CH in the Hot Standby system.

XPIC Control Remote

14 Click on the setting button “Forced Reset” and click on the “Set” button to reset XPIC function, then, selected mode appears in value field,

Notes:1 The control applies only to XPIC configuration for the remote station. Select to “Forced Reset” for the Main/Sub channel which is used online when the link test is performed or MODEM/ODU is replaced.

2. The control is simultaneously applied for the No.1 CH and No.2 CH in the Hot Standby system.

---Maintenance1---Item Value SettingMaintenance On Off On SetXPIC Control Local(No.1) Auto Auto Forced Reset SetXPIC Control Local(No.2) Auto Auto Forced Reset Set

---Maintenance1---Item Value SettingMaintenance On Off On SetXPIC Control Remote(No.1) Auto Auto Forced Reset SetXPIC Control Remote(No.2) Auto Auto Forced Reset Set


-35-

RF SUB Band Select

15 Click on the menu button, select required Sub-Band from pull-down menu, and click on the “Set” button,

Note: This is an offline menu item to be carried out after a Sub-Band BPF change in the ODU. Refer to Appendix RF Frequency Plan in section 1 for details of Sub-Band versus Frequency Range.

Antenna Alignment Mode

16 Click on the setting button “On”, and click on the “Set” button, to apply Antenna Alignment Mode ( ), then, value field turns to “On”,

Notes: 1 The setting “On” is applied for antenna orientation or RX LEV reading when using NLITE E Monitor unit.

2 For the antenna orientation, set the TX power to the required level by ATPC Manual Control or MTPC mode at the opposite site.

3 The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the NLITE E Monitor unit. In order to measure in high range of AGC V, it is mandatory required to set Antenna Alignment Mode to ON. If not set to ON, the indicated AGC voltage is not guaranteed value.

4 No. 1 and No. 2 apply for 1+1 configuration.

---Maintenance1---Item Value SettingMaintenance On Off On SetRF SUB Band Select(No.1) --- A SetRF SUB Band Select(No.2) --- A Set

ABCDEFGHJ

---Maintenance1---Item Value SettingMaintenance On Off On SetAntenna Alignment Mode(No.1) Off Off On SetAntenna Alignment Mode(No.2) Off Off On Set


-36-

4.2 Maintenance2

1 Click on the “Maintenance” button in “LCT MENU”.

2 Click on the “Maintenance1” pull-down menu,

3 Click on the setting button “On” for Maintenance item and click on the “Set” button, then value field turns to “On”,

4 Click on the “Maintenance” button and select “Maintenance2” pull-down menu,

Following control items are displayed in Main area.

Check that the “Maintenance” is “On” in the “Summary Status” area,

LCT MENU




--- Maintenance2 --- ---Control---

CPU Reset

---Download---Configuration File

Program FileEquipment Config. File

---Upload---Configuration File

Equipment Config. File---Date/Time---

Date/Time Setting---Password---

Password Setting

---PMON Clear---PMON Clear


-37-

CPU Reset

5 Click on the “CPU Reset” button,

6 Click on the control button “CTRL” for IDU or “ODU” and “No. 1 or No. 2” (in 1+1 ODU only), and click “Execute” button in CPU Reset dialog box,Caution: The control affects the radio link connection.

Check “with ROM (Program) Switching” check box when the program file for “CTRL” or “ODU” is newly down loaded and existing program file will be replaced with new one.

Note: When Click on the “Execute” button to reset CPU of the “CTRL”, then CTRL restarts, the LCT is disconnected.Access the LCT to the NLITE E NEO from the beginning.

7 Click on the “Close” button to dismiss the “CPU Reset” dialog box,

PMON Clear

8 Click on the “PMON Clear” button,

Perform this operation when beginning the service operation to delete all PMON and RMON data that were produced in installation,

9 Click on the “Execute” button,

10 Click on the “Close” button when “OK” is displayed in Progress area,


-38-

Download Configuration File

11 Click on the “Configuration File” button “Download” menu,

12 Select the file Type “Net Work Config” or “Mib Config”,

13 Enter the location of the Configuration file in File field or click on the “Browser” button to display location in the hard disk or floppy disk,

14 Click on the “Execute” button to start down load, Caution: The control affects the radio link connection.Caution: While data is being transmitted, do not remove the

USB cable connecting the IDU with the PC.

15 After download has been completed, click on the “Update” button for the corresponding configuration will be operated with updated file,

16 Click on the “Close” button to dismiss the “Download Configuration” dialog box,


-39-

Download Program

17 Click on the “Program File” of “Download” menu,

18 Click on the “CTRL”, “ODU”, “FPGA” or “Package Program” and corresponding Sub-item control button,

19 Enter the location of the Program File in File field or click on the “Browser” to display location in the hard disk or floppy disk,

20 Click on the “Execute” button to start the download of program file, Caution: While data is being transmitted, do not remove the


21 After download has been completed, click on the “CPU Reset.” button,Caution: The control affects the radio link connection.

22 Select on control button “CTRL” for IDU or “ODU” or “No. 1 or No. 2” (in 1+1 ODU only), and click “Execute” button in CPU Reset dialog box,

23 Click on the “Close” button to dismiss the “Download Configuration” dialog box,


-40-

Download Equipment

24 Click on the “Equipment Config File” of “Download” menu,

25 Enter the location of the “Equipment Config File” in File field or click on the “Browser” button to display location in the hard disk, floppy disk or MMC, click on the “Execute” button to start the download,Caution: While data is being transmitted, do not remove the


26 After download has been completed, click on the “Update” button for the CTRL will be operated with updated config file,Caution: The control affects the radio link connection.

27 Click on the “Close” button to dismiss the “Download Equipment” dialog box,

Upload Configuration File

28 Click on the “Configuration File” of “Upload” menu,

29 Select the file Type “Net Work Config” or “Mib Config”,

30 Enter the directory of the file name where the uploaded file will be saved,

31 Click on the “Execute” button to start the uploading, Caution: While data is being transmitted, do not remove the



-41-

32 After Configuration File has been uploaded, click on the “Close” button to dismiss the “Upload Configuration” dialog box,

Upload Equipment Config File

33 Click on the “Equipment Config File” of “Upload” menu,

34 Enter the directory of the file name where the uploaded file will be saved,

35 Click on the “Execute” button to start the uploading, Caution: While data is being transmitted, do not remove the


36 After Equipment Config File has been uploaded, click on the “Close” button to dismiss the “Upload Equipment” dialog box,


-42-

Date/Time Setting

37 Click on the “Date/Time Setting” button of “Network” menu,

38 Click on the “Display PC Time” button, then the PC “Date”and“Time” are indicated in the fields,

39 Click on the “Execute” button, then, Date/Time setting for the CTRL is performed,

40 Click on the “Close” button to dismiss the “Date/Time Setting” dialog box,

Password Setting

41 Click on the “Password Setting” button,

42 Enter the current password in “Old Password” entry field,

43 Enter the new password in “New Password” entry field,

44 Enter the same password written in “New Password” entry field in “Confirm new password” entry field,

45 Click on the “OK” button after confirmed “New Password” and “Confirm new password”,

46 Click on the Maintenance1, set Maintenance “Off” and click on the “Set” button, then value field turns to “Off”.

ROI-S05752 Provisioning

-43-

5. Provisioning

1 Click on the “Provisioning” button in the “LCT MENU”,

2 Continue to Chapter 7.1 Provisioning Setup for SONET.

LCT MENU


When Click on the “Provisioning” button in “LCT MENU”, Provisioning setup items are displayed in Main area.

Note: Provisioning setup must be performed after every setup items of the “Equipment Setup” has been completed. If it has any pending item or improper setting of the Equipment Setup, the “Provisioning Setup” will not be completed.

Provisioning ROI-S05752

-44-

5.1 Provisioning Setup (SONET)

Note: To execute setup for each item, every time Click on the “SET” button in common area.

BER Threshold Setting

1 Click on the “BER Threshold Setting” sub-menu button in “Provisioning”,

2 Click on the control button of required BER threshold level for “High BER Threshold” and “LOW BER Threshold” of MODEM and E-BER (DMR)/E-BER (MUX) and SD (DMR)/SD (MUX) of INTFC.

---BER Threshold Setting---High BER Threshold 1E-3 1E-4 1E-5Low BER Threshold 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 1E-9E-BER(DMR) 1E-3 1E-4 1E-5SD(DMR) 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 1E-9E-BER(MUX) 1E-3 1E-4 1E-5SD(MUX) 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 1E-9


-45-

SC Assignment

3 Click on the “SC Assignment” sub-menu button in “Provisioning”,

4 Click on the menu button of each RS-232C( ) and V-11-( ) and select item from pull down menu to assign a SC, SOH Byte or select Not used,

Notes: *1 assignable SC for RS-232C-1, -2.*2 assignable SC for V-11-1, -2.

---SC Assignment---RS-232C-1 SC1RS-232C-2 SC2V-11-1 SC3V-11-2 SC4V-11-1 Direction Setting Co-directional Contra-directionalV-11-2 Direction Setting Co-directional Contra-directional

Not Used Not Used SC1 SC1 SC2 SC2 SC3 SC3 SC4 SC4E1(MUX) E1(MUX)F1(MUX) F1(MUX)E1(DMR) DCCr(MUX)F1(DMR) E1(DMR)*1 F1(DMR)

DCCr(DMR)*2


-46-

LAN Port Setting

5 Click on the “LAN Port Setting” sub-menu button in “Provisioning”,

6 Click on the setting button for each item,Notes: 1. LAN Port Setting - Switching function (only for INTFC (SUB)):

This is a setup if the Switch Hub is used between Port1 and Port2 or it does not used when the signal domain of the radio link shares with the Port1 and Port2. (It can be used only Shared Mode, or not be used in the Separated Mode of the Port1 and Port2.)Disabled: No use of Ports for the Switch Hub. (default value)Enabled: Use of Ports for the Switch Hub.

2. Clock Source Setting (only for INTFC (MAIN) default value: Internal Clock)This is a setup of Clock Source applied for framing into radio signal. Generally, a clock is used independently for respective sending/receiving using Internal Clock. Set to DMR=>Internal Clock when it makes synchronizing to the DMR. In this case, set to Internal Clock at the opposite site to avoid Timing Loop, because if it is set to DMR at the local and the opposite site, Timing Loop is caused by the setting. In the DMR=>Internal Clock mode, the clock is synchronized to received signal when the radio link is normal state but it is switched to the Internal Clock if the radio link is interrupted.

3. Port Usage: Use of LAN Port or no use. (default value is Not Used for MAIN, Used for SUB)

4. Speed&Duplex:Setting for Port speed and Duplex. Referring to the following table, set the Port mode according to the associated equipment which it is to be connected. Note that if the setting mode differs from associated equipment, it may be caused performance degradation or link loss. (default value is AUTONEG(Auto MDI/MDIX))

5. Flow Control:On: Effective flow control (default value is On) Off: Non-effective flow control.

6. Collision Report:In HALF-Duplex mode, it is selected that is reported or not reported about Collision conditions at each port. (default value is Not Report)

7. Link Loss Forwarding:Setting of the Link Loss Forwarding mode is effective or no effective. (See Link Loss Forwarding description in the Section II Operation) (default value is Disabled)


-47-

√ : A setup is possible.

* MDI/MDI-X is selected according to the cable type or terminal type to be used (straight or cross type).

(For LAN/WS INTFC in SUB)

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT

SETTING POSITION

Aut

o N

egot

iatio

n

10B

ASE

-T/H

alf D

uple

x

10B

ASE

-T/F

ull D

uple

x

100B

ASE

-TX/

Hal

f Dup

lex

100B

ASE

-TX/

Full

Dup

lex

10B

ASE

-T/H

alf (

FIX)

100B

ASE

-TX/

Hal

f (FI

X)

IDU PORTSETTING POSITION

Auto Negotiation (Auto MDI/MDI-X) √ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ √ √

10BASE-T/Half Duplex (MDI/MDI-X*) ⎯ √ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

10BASE-T/Full Duplex (MDI/MDI-X*) ⎯ ⎯ √ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

100BASE-TX/Half Duplex (MDI/MDI-X*) ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ √ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

100BASE-TX/Full Duplex (MDI/MDI-X*) ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ √ ⎯ ⎯

---INTFC (SUB) Setting---Switching Function Disabled Enabled

---Port1---Port Usage Not Used UsedSpeed & Duplex AUTONEG (Auto-MDI/MDIX)Flow Control Off On Collision Report Not Report ReportLink Loss Forwarding Disabled Enabled



-48-

(For LAN/WS INTFC in MAIN)

(For GbE INTFC)

Notes: 1. Media Type:Selects interface connector type:

SEP: Optical Interface for 1000BASE-SX (default value)RJ-45: Electrical Interface for 1000BASE-T

2. Speed&Duplex:Setting for Port speed and Duplex: AUTONEG(1000MB Full Duplex) (fixed)

4. Flow Control: On: Effective flow control (default value is On) Off: Non-effective flow control.

5. Link Loss Forwarding:

Setting of the Link Loss Forwarding mode is effective or no effective. (See Link Loss Forwarding description in the Section II Operation) (default value is Disabled)

---INTFC (MAIN) Setting---Switching Function Disabled EnabledClock Source Setting Internal Clock DMR=>Internal Clock



---LAN Port Setting---Switching Function Disabled Enabled

---Port---Media Type SFP RJ-45Speed & Duplex AUTONEG (1000MB Full Duplex)Flow Control Off On Link Loss Forwarding Disabled Enabled


-49-

OC-3 Setting

7 Click on the “OC-3 Setting” sub-menu button in “Provisioning”,

8 Click on the either “Disabled” or “Enabled” control button,

Note: Refer to Chapter “3.5.6 MS-AIS Generation” in Section 2 for the details.

9 Click on the “Disabled” control button of the ALS,

Note: ALS “Enabled” applies only for OC-3 Optical Interface.

10 Click on the “Enabled” and required ALS interval control button when the ALS is configured in the system,

Note: Refer to Chapter “3.5.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown Control” in Section 2 for the details.

TX Power Control

11 Click on the “TX Power Control” sub-menu button in “Provisioning”,

12 Enter required values in each control entry field within specified range,

(1) ATPC mode in 1+0 or Hot Standby configuration

---MS-AIS Generation---MS-AIS Generation Disabled Enabled

---ALS------ALS---ALS Function Disabled EnabledALS Interval 60sec 180sec 300sec

---TX Power Control--- RangeATPC Threshold Level [dBm] -60.0 -73.0 to -30.0Additional ATT[dB] 0 0 to 5ATPC Range(MAX)[dB] 0 -24 to -0ATPC Range(MIN)[dB] -24ATPC Power Mode Hold MAX MIN


-50-

(2) ATPC mode in Twinpath configuration

(3) MTPC mode in Twinpath configuration

Notes: 1 No.1 and No.2 are indicated in Twinpath configuration only.2 For Hot Standby configuration, the TX Power Control effects

both No. 1 and No. 2 ODUs.3 ATPC/MTPC Range varies depending on RF frequency band

and modulation scheme.4 ATPC Threshold level Range varies depending on modulation

scheme and RF signal channel separation.5 ATPC power Mode selects the ATPC activation when ATPC

function has been failed:Hold: Maintain the current TX output level at the time of

the ATPC is malfunction.MAX: Maintain the ATPC maximum TX output level at

the time of the ATPC is malfunction.MIN: Maintain the ATPC minimum TX output level at the

time of the ATPC is malfunction.6 In the XPIC configuration, this setup is performed at the Main

Master station, the ATPC/MTPC can not be set in the Sub Master station. The setup is applied from the Main Master station to the Sub Master station.

---TX Power Control--- RangeATPC Threshold Level(No.1) [dBm] -60.0 -73.0 to -30.0ATPC Threshold Level(No.2) [dBm] -60.0 -73.0 to -30.0Additional ATT(No.1) [dB] 0 0 to 5Additional ATT(No.2) [dB] 0 0 to 5ATPC Range(MAX)(No.1) [dB] 0 -20 to -0ATPC Range(MIN)(No.1) [dB] -20ATPC Range(MAX)(No.2) [dB] 0 -20 to -0ATPC Range(MIN)(No.2) [dB] -20ATPC Power Mode Hold MAX MIN

---TX Power Control--- RangeMTPC TX Power(No.1) [dB] -20 -20 to 0MTPC TX Power(No.2) [dB] -20 -20 to 0ATPC Threshold Level(No.1) [dBm] -60 -73 to -30ATPC Threshold Level(No.2) [dBm] -60 -73 to -30Additional ATT(No.1) [dB] 0 0 to 5Additional ATT(No.2) [dB] 0 0 to 5


-51-

Condition for TX/RX SW (only for 1+1 configuration)

13 Click on the “Condition for TX/RX SW” sub-menu button in “Provisioning”,

14 Click on the control button of required control mode for the TX SW and the RX SW,

Notes: 1 TX SW control mode is applied only for Hot Standby configuration.

2 For TX and RX SW Priority, select Non Priority for Non-revertive operation at TX or RX alarm condition is restored.

3 Manual mode of RX SW Maintenance Mode, disables the RX SW operation under either No. 1 or No. 2 RX route is alarmed.

4 Forced mode of RX SW Maintenance Mode, enables the RX SW operation through either or both No. 1 or No. 2 RX route is alarmed.

5 Early Warning provides less than 1E-9.

Condition for APS

15 Click on the control button of required setting mode for the APS,

Note: For the details of Condition for APS setting, see the Automatic Protection Switching (APS) in the Section II Operation.

----Condition for TX/RX SW---TX SW Priority Non Priority Priority No.1RX SW Priority Non Priority Priority No.1RX SW Maintenance Mode Manual ForcedRX SW Condition-Early Warning Included EW Excluded EW

----Condition for APS---APS Maintenance Mode Manual ForcedAPS Condition-SF(PROT) Priority High Priority LowAPS Condition-SD(B1) Included SD Excluded SDLock in Usage Not Used UsedLock in Count (times) 4 1 to 255Lock in Detect Time(min) 10 1 to 60Lock in Hold Time(min) 24 1 to 48


-52-

Relay Setting

16 Click on the “Relay Setting” sub-menu button in “Provisioning”,

17 Click on the setting box crossed corresponding item and RL,Note: Display or non-display of Relay Setting items depends on Redundancy Setting.

Example: When setting to (1+0) mode, the items of No.2 side become non-display. At this moment, contact information ("Out") set so far are all cleared regarding the items which become non-display due to the setting change. Accordingly, users are required to set the setting information again when these items are redisplayed after setting change.

Note: From RL3 to RL6 can be assigned to CLUSTER1 to 4 OUTPUT but the same number of CLUSTER1 to 4 INPUT can not be assigned which number has been assigned to CLUSTER OUTPUT, or the CLUSTER can be assigned only for following condition.

Cluster can be used: IN + OUT ≤ 4

Note: When the selected item for RL assignment is invalid, “NG” and error message are displayed in Progress State area.

Cluster1 Input Disabled EnabledCluster2 Input Disabled EnabledCluster3 Input Disabled EnabledCluster4 Input Disabled Enabled


-53-

The following are assignable items for external alarm output in SONET system.

HK OUT1 HK OUT2 HK OUT3 HK OUT4 MAINTIDU CPU ALM PS ALM1 PS ALM2 ODU ALM1 ODU ALM2 ODU CPU/CABLE OPEN ALM1 ODU CPU/CABLE OPEN ALM2 LO REF1 LO REF2 ODU CPU ALM2 TX PWR ALM1 TX PWR ALM2 TX INPUT ALM1 TX INPUT ALM2 APC ALM1 APC ALM2 RX LEVEL ALM1 RX LEVEL ALM2 IDU ALM MOD ALM1 MOD ALM2 DEM ALM1 DEM ALM2 HIGH BER ALM1 HIGH BER ALM2 LOW BER ALM1 LOW BER ALM2 IF CABLE SHORT ALM1 IF CABLE SHORT ALM2 XIF ALM1XIF ALM2XREF ALM1XREF ALM2LOF1 LOF2 STM-1R LOS1-2 STM-1S LOS1-2OC-3 TF ALM1-2 CLUSTER ALM OUT1 CLUSTER ALM OUT2 CLUSTER ALM OUT3 CLUSTER ALM OUT4


-54-

TCN Threshold (15min 1day)

18 Click on the “TCN Threshold (15min)” or “TCN Threshold (1day)” sub-menu button in “Provisioning”,

19 Enter required values in threshold OCR (Alarm Occur) and RCVR (Alarm Recover) fields of performance item,

Note: Do not mistake the setting such as the OCR ≤ RCVR or RCVR=0

.

PMON Select

20 Click on the “PMON Select” sub-menu button in “Provisioning”,

21 Enter required “RX level TCN Thresholdt” level in text field,

22 Click on the control button of “SES Activation Condition”,

----TCN Threshold (15min)---DMR MUXOCR RCVR OCR RCVR RANGE

OFS 900 90 900 90 0 to 900UAS 900 90 900 90 0 to 900ES 900 90 900 90 0 to 900SES 900 90 900 90 0 to 900BBE 1410 150 1410 150 0 to 2159100SEP 900 90 900 90 0 to 900

----TCN Threshold (1day)---DMR MUXOCR RCVR OCR RCVR RANGE

OFS 65534 650 65534 650 0 to 86400UAS 65534 650 65534 650 0 to 86400ES 65534 650 65534 650 0 to 86400SES 65534 650 65534 650 0 to 86400BBE 135360 13540 13560 13540 0 to 207273600SEP 65534 650 65534 650 0 to 86400

---PMON Select---RX Level TCN Threshold [dBm] −82.0SES Activation Condition 30[%] 15[%]


-55-

Others

23 Click on the “Others” sub-menu button in “Provisioning”,

XPIC Condition-Local Fail

24 Click on the either “REF LO->Self LO” or “Mute” control button,This setup defines the ODU operation when the reference LO signal from the IDU is lost.

Note: Select “REF LO → Self LO” when both V/H channels are used in degraded quality condition. Local signal is generated by the self LO OSC in the ODU. Then, the local signal is not synchronized with the opposite polarization and the XPIC function is irregularly operated.Select “Mute” when only normal channel is used in normal quality condition. The TX output signal of the failure ODU is shut off by the mute control. The XPIC function is not operated absolutely in this mode.

EOW2 External Setting

25 Click on the either “Normal” or “Invert” control button,

Note: Select “Invert” or “Normal” to set appropriate calling system for the associated system as follows. Set “Normal” when the NEO IDU is connected to NLITE E IDU/NEO IDU. Set “Invert” when the NEO IDU is connected to NLITE E+ IDU or Mx IDU.

Alarm Correlation Capability

26 Click on the either “On” or “Off” control button,

Note: Select “On” when really caused alarm is displayed. Select “Off” when including derived alarm is displayed.

27 Click on the “SET” button in Common area to define the setup.

---XPIC Condition- Local Fail---XPIC Condition - Local Fail REF LO->Self LO Mute

---EOW2 External Setting---EOW2 External Setting Normal Invert

---Alarm Correlation Capability---Alarm Correlation Capability Off On

Metering ROI-S05752

-56-

6. Metering1 Click on the “Metering” in “LCT MENU”,

2 Check the values indicated in metering text fields for each metering item,

Notes: 1. No.1 and No.2 are indicated only for 1+1 configuration.2. Both TX Power values of No.1 and No.2 are indicated in

Twinpath configuration only.3. TX Power value * is indicated for standby ODU in Hot

Standby configuration.4. Power Supply voltage of the ODU DC input varies

depending on IF cable length.5. During total number of erroneous bits and total number

of correctly received bits are calculating, “Calculating”is displayed.

6. In the 2-WAY mode, the values are displayed for each DIR-A and DIR-B.

LCT MENU



TX Power[dBm] +0.7 *RX Level[dBm] -65.2 -70.0Power Supply[V] -45 -45BER *.*E-10 Calculating

ROI-S05752 Metering

-57-

RMON(DMR)(1day)

3 Click on the “RMON(DMR)(7days/day)” sub-menu button in “PMON (History)”,

---RMON(DMR)(1day)--- Maintenance Mode: on

Port1

Date Time Status 1 2 3 4 5 61:2:3:4:5:6:7:8:9:10:11:12:13:14:15:16:17:18:

RX UNICASTRX BROADCASTRX MULTICASTRX PAUSERX CEC ERRRX FRAGMENTSRX 64RX 65-127RX 128-255RX 256-511RX 512-1023RX 1024-1536RX 1537-MAXRX JABBERSTX UNICASTTX BROADCASTTX MULTICASTTX PAUSE

Metering ROI-S05752

-58-

6.1 PMON (SONET)

6.1.1 PMON (History)

1 Click on the “PMON (History)” in “LCT MENU”,

2 Click on the “RELOAD” button in Common area,

RX Level(24H/15min)

3 Click on the “RX LEVEL(24H/15min)” sub-menu button in “PMON (History)”,

LCT MENU


RX Level(24H/15min)RX Level(7days/day)DMR(W)(7days/day)DMR(W)(24H/15min)MUX(W)(7days/day)MUX(W)(24H/15min)

---RX Level (15min)--- Maintenance Mode: on : Current Time

Date Time Status MIN(No.1) MAX(No.1) MIN(No.2) MAX(No.2)2006/01/05 15:30-15:45 -59.7 -58.6 -59.3 -58.12006/01/05 15:45-16:00 -59.8 -58.7 -58.7 -58.22006/01/05 16:00-16:15 -59.5 -59.0 -58.7 -58.22006/01/05 16:15-16:30 -59.5 -59.0 -58.7 -58.22006/01/05 16:30-16:45 -59.5 -59.0 -71.2 -58.22006/01/05 16:45-17:00 -74.2 -55.8 -58.8 -54.12006/01/05 17:00-17:15 -59.5 -57.9 -58.8 -58.1

ROI-S05752 Metering

-59-

RX Level(7days/day)

4 Click on the “RX LEVEL(7days/day)” sub-menu button in “PMON (History)”,

DMR(W)(24H/15min)

5 Click on the “DMR(W)(24H/15min)” sub-menu button in “PMON (History)”,

DMR(W)(day)

6 Click on the “DMR(W)(7days/day)” sub-menu button in “PMON (History)”,

---RX Level (day)--- Maintenance Mode: on

Date Status MIN(No.1) MAX(No.1) MIN(No.2) MAX(No.2)2006/01/01 -59.7 -58.6 -59.3 -58.12006/01/02 -59.8 -58.7 -58.7 -58.22006/01/03 -59.5 -59.0 -58.7 -58.22006/01/04 -59.5 -59.0 -58.7 -58.22006/01/05 -59.5 -59.0 -71.2 -58.22006/01/06 -74.2 -55.8 -58.8 -54.12006/01/07 -59.5 -57.9 -58.8 -58.1

---DMR(W)(15min)---- Maintenance Mode: on : Current Time

Date Time Status OFS SEP BBE ES SES UAS2006/01/05 15:30-15:45 0 0 0 0 0 02006/01/05 15:45-16:00 0 0 0 0 0 02006/01/05 16:00-16:15 0 0 0 0 0 02006/01/05 16:15-16:30 0 0 0 0 0 02006/01/05 16:30-16:45 0 0 0 0 0 02006/01/05 16:45-17:00 0 0 0 0 0 02006/01/05 17:00-17:15 0 0 0 0 0 0

---DMR(W)(1day)--- Maintenance Mode: on

Date Status OFS SEP BBE ES SES UAS2006/01/01 0 0 0 0 0 02006/01/02 0 0 0 0 0 02006/01/03 0 0 0 0 0 02006/01/04 0 0 0 0 0 02006/01/05 0 0 0 0 0 02006/01/06 0 0 0 0 0 02006/01/07 0 0 0 0 0 0

Metering ROI-S05752

-60-

MUX(W)(24H/15min)

7 Click on the “MUX(W)(24H/15min)” sub-menu button in “PMON (History)”,

MUX(W)(7days/day)

8 Click on the “MUX(W)(7days/day)” sub-menu button in “PMON (History)”,

---MUX(W)(15min)---- Maintenance Mode: on : Current Time


---MUX(W)(day)--- Maintenance Mode: on


ROI-S05752 Metering

-61-

6.1.2 RMON (History)

RMON(Line)(15min)

9 Click on the “RMON(Line)(24H/15min)” sub-menu button in “PMON (History)”,

Notes: For the GbE INTFC, there are distinctions for the following functions from the 10BASE-T/100BASE-Tx

1. RX Undersize: Unavailable.2. RX Fragments: Unavailable.3. RX Symbol Errors:

For SFP: Available For RJ-45: Unavailable (un-counting, only "0" is indicated.)

4. TX Multicast PKts (Including number of the TX pause packets.)

5. RX Multicast PKts (Including number of the RX pause packets.)

6. Countable packet size for the following items shown in right side of the table and reading must be taken place as follows. (The indication will not be taken placed.)

7. The RX Alignment Error is counted as an RX CRC ERR.

---RMON(Line)(15min)--- Maintenance Mode: on : Current Time

Main Port1

Date Time Status 1 2 3 4 52006/01/05 00:00-00:15 1:

2:3:4:5:6:7:8:9:10:11:12:13:14:15:16:17:18:19:20:21:22:

RX UNICASTRX BROADCASTRX MULTICASTRX PAUSERX CEC ERRRX ALIGNMENT ERRRX SYMBOL ERRRX UNDERSIZERX FRAGMENTSRX Pkts 64RX Pkts 65-127RX Pkts 128-255RX Pkts 256-511RX Pkts 512-1023RX Pkts 1024-1536RX Pkts 1537-MAXRX JABBERSTX UNICASTTX BROADCASTTX MULTICASTTX PAUSETX COLLISION

2006/01/05 00:15-00:302006/01/05 00:30-00:452006/01/05 00:45-01:002006/01/05 01:00-01:152006/01/05 01:15-01:302006/01/05 01:30-01:452006/01/05 01:45-02:002006/01/05 02:00-02:152006/01/05 02:15-02:302006/01/05 02:30-02:452006/01/05 02:45-03:002006/01/05 03:00-03:152006/01/05 03:15-03:302006/01/05 03:30-03:452006/01/05 03:45-04:002006/01/05 04:00-04:152006/01/05 04:15-04:302006/01/05 04:30-04:452006/01/05 04:45-05:002006/01/05 05:00-05:15

Indication Reading15 RX Pkts 1024-1536 RX Pkts 1024-151816 RX Pkts 1537-MAX RX Pkts 1519-MAX

Metering ROI-S05752

-62-

RMON(Line)(1day)

10 Click on the “RMON(Line)(7days/day)” sub-menu button in “PMON (History)”,

Note: For the GbE INTFC, there are distinctions for the functions from the 10BASE-T/100BASE-Tx. Refer to Notice of above “RMON(Line)(24H/15min)”.

---RMON(Line)(1day)--- Maintenance Mode: on

Main Port1

Date Time Status 1 2 3 4 5 61:2:3:4:5:6:7:8:9:10:11:12:13:14:15:16:17:18:19:20:21:22:

RX UNICASTRX BROADCASTRX MULTICASTRX PAUSERX CEC ERRRX ALIGNMENT ERRRX SYMBOL ERRRX UNDERSIZERX FRAGMENTSRX 64RX 65-127RX 128-255RX 256-511RX 512-1023RX 1024-1536RX 1537-MAXRX JABBERSTX UNICASTTX BROADCASTTX MULTICASTTX PAUSETX COLLISION

ROI-S05752 Installation of USB

-63-

7. Installation of USB

Following procedure explains how to install the USB modem driver to a windows XP PC.

1. Connect the PC with a USB cable between the LCT port and the USB port,

2. Select “Install from a list or specific location [Advanced]” and Click on the “Next” button,

Installation of USB ROI-S05752

-64-

3. Insert the CD-ROM of the USB driver to the PC and select “Search for the best driver in these locations” and check “Search removal media [floppy, CD-ROM...],” then, Click on the “Next”button,

4. Click “Continue Anyway” button in the Hardware Installation alert pop-up,

ROI-S05752 Installation of USB

-65-

5. USB driver installation will be started,

6. Click “Finish” button in the “Found New Hardware Wizard” after installation has been completed.

Dial-up Setting ROI-S05752

-66-

8. Dial-up Setting

Following procedure explains when the Dial-up is set to the PC on Windows Xp.

1. Click on “Start”→“Setting”→“Control Panel” and on “Network Connections” icon to start the Dialup setting.

2. The “Network Connections” window appears. Click on the “Create a new connection” in the Network Tasks category.

ROI-S05752 Dial-up Setting

-67-

3. The “Welcome to the New Connection Wizard” window appears. Click on the “Next” button to continue.

4. Select “Connect to the network at my workplace” and Click on the “Next” button to continue.


-68-

5. Select option “Dial-up connection” and Click on the “Next”button to continue.

6. On the “New Connection Wizard” window, enter “LCT” in the “Company Name” entry field and Click on the “Next” button to continue.


-69-

7. Enter phone number in the “Phone number” entry field and Click on the “Next” button to continue.

8. Verify that the connection “LCT” has displayed as the connection registered. You can also create a shortcut on your desktop if you need. Click on the “Finish” button.


-70-

9. On “Connect LCT” dialog, click “Properties”,

10. Verify that “Modem-USB Modem Driver [COM(#)]” is displayed on the General dialog box connect using check box, and select “Show icon in notification area when connected” in the LCT Properties dialog. Then, Click on the “Configure” button.


-71-

11. On “Modem Configuration” dialog, check that unchecked all five boxes, then Click on the “OK” button,

12. Retain the default setting on the “Options” tab, click the “Security” tab.


-72-

13. Retain the default setting on the “Security” tab, click the “Networking” tab.

14. On the Networking tab, verify that PPP... is displayed in the “Type of dial-up server I am calling” setting field, unchecked “File and Printer... and Client for Microsoft....”, “Client for Microsoft Networks”.


-73-

15. Click “Settings” button, unchecked all the boxes in the “PPP Settings” dialog as shown below. Click “OK” to go back to the previous window. Point “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” and then click “Properties”.

16. Verify that both “Obtain an IP address automatically” and “Obtain DNS server address automatically” are selected.

17. Click on the “Advanced” button,


-74-

18. In the “Advanced TCP/IP Settings” dialog, mark check box of “Use default gateway on remote network” and for the PPP link is unchecked, then Click “OK”.

19. Retain the default setting on the “Advanced” tab and click “OK”.

ROI-S05752 Java Runtime Install

-75-

9. Java Runtime Install

1. Install Java Runtime by double-click on the file name (highlighted below).

Note: The Java Runtime installation is required for the LCTWEB Applet Rev.2.01.xxx or former version. For the LCTWEB Applet Rev.2.03.xxx or later version, the Java Runtime is included in the LCT WEB Applet, this installation is then not required.

LCTWEB (Version 2) Install ROI-S05752

-76-

10. LCTWEB (Version 2) Install

Installation of the LCTWEB (Version 2.xx) to your PC is required when the F/W Version 3.x.x of the IDU is used. The LCTWEB (Version 2) for standard IDU is found in the CD-ROM which is attached to the IDU equipment.

LCTWEB Install

Close LCT application and other applications that may be running on the PC. (It can be installed wrong when other applications are working on the PC.)

When the LCT WEB Applet has been installed, uninstall it and perform the re-installation.

1. Insert the CD-ROM to the CD-ROM player of the PC used for LCT,

2. Double click on the “INSTALL For STD” in the “LCTWEB SETUP FILES” in the CD-ROM, then data is extracted,

3. Double click on the “Setup.vbs” icon, then the installer is started up and the installation of the LCTWEB into the PC is executed,

ROI-S05752 LCTWEB (Version 2) Install

-77-

4. Click on the “OK” button, when following prompt appears,

5. Click on the “OK” button in the prompt after the installation has been completed,

Following short-cut icon is made on the desktop,

6. Click on the short-cut icon or select the “Programs” → “NEC_ LCT” → “LCT For STD” from the “start” menu,


-78-

7. The LCTWEB is started up and “Login” dialog appears,

8. Confirm that the LCTWEB Version is “Rev. 2.xx.xxx” (for STD).

Rev.2.xx.xxx (for STD)

ROI-S05752 LCTWEB (Version 2) Install

-79-

LCTWEB Uninstall

Close LCT application and other applications that may be running on the PC. (It can be uninstalled wrong when other applications are working on the PC.)

1. Select the “Programs” → “NEC_ LCT” → “Uninstall LCT For STD” from the “start” menu for uninstall LCTWEB,



-80-80 pages


4. Uninstall finishes.

ROI-S05751-05CE CONTENTS August, 2007

CL-1

NLITE E 6-38 GHz SONET DIGITAL RADIO SYSTEM

Section IV MAINTENANCE

CONTENTS

TITLE PAGE

1 GENERAL ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-12 PRECAUTIONS •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-13 TEST SETS AND ACCESSORIES••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-14 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4-14.1 Meter Reading ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4-14.2 Performance Monitoring•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4-25 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-15.1 Alarm/Status ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-15.1.1 Alarm and Status ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-2

5.1.2 Control Item•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-9

5.1.3 Loopback •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-12

5.1.4 BER Measurement •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-17

5.1.5 Trouble Shooting Flow••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-21

5.2 Replacement •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-245.2.1 ODU Replacement••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-24

5.2.2 IDU and Module Replacement•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-30

5.2.3 Fuse Replacement •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-51

ROI-S05751 GENERAL

1-1

1. GENERAL

This section provides instructions for maintenance of the NLITE E used for 6-38 GHz SONET microwave radio system.

This section provides instructions on the precautions, test setup and accessories, routine maintenance, corrective maintenance and mounting of optional modules.

ROI-S05751 PRECAUTIONS

2-1

2. PRECAUTIONS

The following precautions must be carefully observed during maintenance.

(a) The maintenance personnel should report arrival and departure from a station to the relevant station. The following are dangers and warnings to the maintenance personnel.

Warning: 1. The –48 V DC power is superimposed on the centre conductor of the coaxial cable between the IDU and the ODU. Connecting test equipment directly to this terminal may damage it and touching the coaxial cable core may cause electrical shock.

2. Persons performing maintenance must take necessary steps to avoid Electro-static Discharge (ESD) which may damage the modules on the IDU or cause error. Wear a conductive wrist strap connected to the grounded (G) jack on the front of the equipment shelf. This will minimize static build-up during maintenance. (see Fig. 2-1).

3. Do not remove/connect the IF cable with the IDU power ON. Turn the IDU power OFF before connecting/disconnecting the IF cable, or equipment may be damaged.

4. After turning ON the equipment, wait at least 1 minute before turning it OFF again. Repeatedly turning the power ON and OFF within a short interval may cause the IDU to fail.

5. Do not allow open or short circuit of ODU TX output with the TX power on conditions. Perform the TX Mute control in the Maintenance mode or turn the PWR switch off at the IDU before disconnecting cable or feeder from the ODU TX output.

6. Contact NEC before program download on the LCT is performed. Equipment may not function correctly with improper operation.

Caution: 1. In a system using the OPTICAL OC-3 INTFC, do not stare at the laser beam or look at it directly with optical instruments. Otherwise, it may hurt your eyes (Class 1 Laser Product).

2. The top surface of the IDU above MODEM is hot in operation.

3. When replacing the MODEM, OC-3 INTFC, or DC-DC CONV (optional) turn off the PWR switch and disconnect all cables connected to the module which is to be replaced.

(b) During maintenance, the IDU should be set to Maintenance “On” condition by the local craft terminal (LCT).

PRECAUTIONS ROI-S05751

2-2

(c) To avoid traffic interruption, under the maintenance, perform TX/RX SW manual switching in 1+1 system,.

Note: When TX/RX SW has been automatically switched during a fault, keep this condition by manual switching operation.

(d) While the CPU is initialized by the CPU RESET switch, alarm(s) status is reset to normal. After initialization, the alarm information is properly provided through relay contacts.

(e) Information on the maintenance and the control such as Mute, CW, LB, etc. is released if the power is turned off.

(f) If each setup item of “Equipment Setup” or “Provisioning” is changed during in operation, traffic will be momentarily interrupted.

(g) When the TX SW is activated, momentary traffic interruption may occurs.

(h) Before removing or installing the IDU/ODU, turn off the power switch on the MODEM.

(i) After completing maintenance, restore all connections, manual control settings to normal and confirm that all alarm LEDs are unlit.

(j) When replacing the MODEM, OC-3 INTFC, or E3 INTFC with spare, disconnect every cables connected to the module which is to be replaced, then turn off the power switch on the MODEM, surely.

(k) After equipment start-up, allow the equipment to warm up at least 30 minutes.

(l) In the XPIC system, polarization for the Main Master and Sub Master channel must be coincided between the local station and the opposite station.

(m) In the XPIC system, when the MODEM or ODU is replaced, set the XPIC Control Local and XPIC Control Remote to Forced Reset for the channel to be used for online.

Caution

Tighten the TNC-male connector of IF cable to the IDU with engage connector nut only using fingers and holding the cable with another hand.


(Tightening Torque : 0.3 to 0.5 N•m (3 to 5kg•cm))

IDU

IDU

IF CABLE

IF CABLE

IDU

IF CABLE

Straight Type

L-Angle Type

L Angle Type



2-3


2-4

Chart 2-1 Wrist Strap Connection

Step Procedure

1 Connect the wrist strap to the ESD ground terminal (G),

1+0 SYSTEM

1+1 SYSTEM IDU

G

G

SELV

!


PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

PASOLINK NEO

PULL

(Blank)

GG

G

SELV

!


PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

PASOLINK NEO

PULL

SELV

!

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

PULL

GG

G

G

G

G

IDU

ALM

OC-3 INOC-3 OUTALM


ALM

OC-3 INOC-3 OUTALM


Fig. 2-1 ESD Ground Terminal Location


2-5

Chart 2-2 Maintenance Mode Setting

Step Procedure

For the LCT operation, refer to Chapter 6 of LCT Operation in Appendix of this Section IV.

Maintenance Mode Setting

1 Connect the USB port and the LCT port of the PC and the LCT using a USB cable, (see Fig. 2-2)

PC

USB Cable

1+0 SYSTEM

1+1 SYSTEM

SELV

!


PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

nlite e

PULL

(Blank)

G

G

G

SELV

!


PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

NLITE 3

PULL

SELV

!

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

PULL

GG

G

G

LCT Port

USB Port

LCT Port

ALM

OC-3 INOC-3 OUTALM


ALM

OC-3 INOC-3 OUTALM


Fig. 2-2 LCT Setup


2-6

Chart 2-2 Maintenance Mode Setting (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

2 Enter User name “Admin” and enter the valid Password,

3 Click on “Login” button,

4 Click on “Maintenance” button in “LCT MENU”,

LCT MENU

Alarm/StatusEquipment SetupInventoryAUX I/OMaintenance Maintenance1 Maintenance2ProvisioningMeteringPMON(History)

5 Click on “Maintenance1” button in “Maintenance” background menu,

---Maintenance1---Item Value SettingMaintenance Off Off On Set


2-7

Chart 2-2 Maintenance Mode Setting (Cont’d)

Step Procedure

6 Click on “On” Setting button of the Maintenance, click on “Set” button, then Maintenance Value turns to “On” and Maintenance status in “Summary Status area turns to “On”.

Maintenance On

Summary Status

Notes: 1. To perform setup and control the equipment, it must be set to Maintenance “On” mode using LCT.

2. In Maintenance “On” mode, RL3 to RL6 external alarm outputs are masked and automatic control is inhibited.

Restoring to Normal Mode

7 Click on “Maintenance1” button,

8 Click on “Off” or “Auto” control button and click “Set” button for each control item which has been manually controlled,

9 Click on “Off” setting button of Maintenance,

10 Check that there is not coloured yellow items and Maintenance “Off”, is displayed in Progress Status.

Note: To restore the Maintenance mode to normal mode, first reset the control from control “On” to control “Off” (or Auto), then set the mode to Maintenance “Off”.



2-8

Chart 2-3 Manual Switchover Operation (only 1+1Configuration)

Step Procedure



2 Login to the LCT with User name “Admin” and Admin “Password”,

3 Click on “Maintenance” button in “LCT MENU” and click on “Maintenance1” button in Maintenance background menu,

Note: Control items can be performed only when the MAINT mode is “On”.

Note: Control items displayed on the LCT vary depending on system configuration.

4 Click on TX SW and/or RX SW to desired “No.1”, “No.2” or “Auto” button,

5 Click on “Set” button,

6 After test has been completed, set the TX SW and RX SW to “Auto” position,

7 Set maintenance mode to “Off” according to Chart 2-2.

---Maintenance1---Item Value SettingMaintenance On Off On SetTX SW Manual Control No.1 Auto No.1 No.2 SetRX SW Manual Control Auto Auto No.1 No.2 Set


2-9

Chart 2-4 APS Manual Switchover Operation(only APS Configuration in SONET)

Step Procedure



2 Login to the LCT with User name “Admin” and Admin “Password”,

3 Click on “Maintenance” button in “LCT MENU” and click on “Maintenance1” button in Maintenance background menu,

Note: Control items can be performed only when the MAINT mode is “On”.

Note: Control items displayed on the LCT vary depending on system configuration.

4 Click on desired “Auto”, “Working” or “Protection” button,

5 Click on “Set” button,

6 After test has been completed, set the APS Manual control to “Auto” position,

7 Set maintenance mode to “Off” according to Chart 2-2.

---Maintenance1---Item Value SettingMaintenance On Off On SetAPS Manual Control Working Auto Working Protection SetAPS Maintenance Mode Manual


2-1010 pages


ROI-S05751 TEST SETS AND ACCESSORIES

3-1

3. TEST SETS AND ACCESSORIES

The test sets and special accessories listed in Table 3-1 are required for maintenance. If recommended test sets and accessories are not available, equivalents may be used.

Table 3-1 Test Sets and Accessories

No. Model Type Model Number Manufacture

1 SONET Analyzer MP1570A ANRITSU

2 Optical Variable Attenuator MN95D ANRITSU

3 Digital Multimeter 34401A Agilent

4 Screwdriver — —

5 T Type Hexagonal Driver — —

6 Torque Wrench — —

7 PC for Local Craft Terminal (LCT)** — —

Notes:1. * The NLite E Monitor operates on a dry battery (6F22/9V). When the NLite E Monitor will not be used for a long period, remove the battery to avoid damage from battery leakage and corrosion.

2. ** Refer LCT Operation in Appendix in this Section IV.

TEST SETS AND ACCESSORIES ROI-S05751

3-2

ROI-S05751 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

4-1

4.SONET ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

This chapter provides the routine (annual) maintenance procedures to ensure the satisfactory operation of the equipment. During routinemaintenance, carefully observe the precautions given in Chapter 2.

4.1 Meter Reading

Chart 4-1 Meter Reading

Step Procedure

Notes:1. If an abnormal indication appears, check Alarm/Status, performance monitor and perform loopback test to distinguish sections of normal and alarmed.

2. RX LEV varies depending on received RF signal level.3. Power Supply voltage at ODU varies depending on IF

cable length between the IDU and ODU.4. During total number of erroneous bits and total

number of correctly received bits are calculating, “Calculating” is displayed.

5. 1.0E-10 is indicted equal to 1 x 10-10.


TX Power[dBm] +0.7 *RX Level[dBm] -65.2 -70.0Power Supply[V] -45 -45BER 1.0E-10 Calculating

LCT MENU



1 Connect the PC to the IDU using USB cable, (Refer to Fig. 2-2 in Chart 2-2)

2 Login to the LCT with User name “User”,

3 Click on “Metering” button in “LCT MENU”,

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ROI-S05751

4-2

4.2 Performance Monitoring

Chart 4-2 Performance Monitoring

Step Procedure

Detailed 24 hours 15min RX Level performance monitor data are displayed,

---RX Level (15min)--- Maintenance Mode: on : Current Time

Date Time Status MIN(No.1) MAX(No.1) MIN(No.2) MAX(No.2)2006/01/05 15:30-15:45 -59.7 -58.6 -59.3 -58.12006/01/05 15:45-16:00 -59.8 -58.7 -58.7 -58.22006/01/05 16:00-16:15 -59.5 -59.0 -58.7 -58.22006/01/05 16:15-16:30 -59.5 -59.0 -58.7 -58.22006/01/05 16:30-16:45 -59.5 -59.0 -71.2 -58.22006/01/05 16:45-17:00 -74.2 -55.8 -58.8 -54.12006/01/05 17:00-17:15 -59.5 -57.9 -58.8 -58.1

LCT MENU





3 Click on “PMON (History)” in “LCT MENU”,

PMON(History)RX Level(24H/15min)RX Level(7days/day)Total(7days/day)Total(24H/15min)RMON(Line)(24H/15min)RMON(Line)(7days/day)RMON(DMR)(24H/15min)RMON(DMR)(7days/day)

4 Click on “RX level (24H/15min)” sub-menu button in “PMON (History)”,


4-3


Step Procedure

5 Click on “RX level (7days/day)” sub-menu button in “PMON (History)”,

Detailed 7days daily RX Level performance monitor data are displayed,

6 Click on “Total(24H/15min)” sub-menu button in “PMON (History)”,

Detailed 24 hours 15min Total performance data are displayed.

7 Click on “Total(7days/day)” sub-menu button in “PMON (History)”,

---RX Level (day)--- Maintenance Mode: on

Date Status MIN(No.1) MAX(No.1) MIN(No.2) MAX(No.2)2006/01/01 -59.7 -58.6 -59.3 -58.12006/01/02 -59.8 -58.7 -58.7 -58.22006/01/03 -59.5 -59.0 -58.7 -58.22006/01/04 -59.5 -59.0 -58.7 -58.22006/01/05 -59.5 -59.0 -71.2 -58.22006/01/06 -74.2 -55.8 -58.8 -54.12006/01/07 -59.5 -57.9 -58.8 -58.1

---Total(15min)---- Maintenance Mode: on : Current Time



4-4


Step Procedure

Detailed 7days daily total performance monitor data are displayed,

8 Click on “RMON(Line)(24H/15min)” sub-menu button in “PMON (History)”,

Detailed 24 hours 15min Line (LAN) RMON (Remote Network Monitoring) data are displayed.

---Total(1day)--- Maintenance Mode: on



Port1

Date Time Status 1 2 3 4 52006/01/05 00:00-00:15 1:

2:3:4:5:6:7:8:9:10:11:12:13:14:15:16:17:18:19:20:21:22:


2006/01/05 00:15-00:302006/01/05 00:30-00:452006/01/05 00:45-01:002006/01/05 01:00-01:152006/01/05 01:15-01:302006/01/05 01:30-01:452006/01/05 01:45-02:002006/01/05 02:00-02:152006/01/05 02:15-02:302006/01/05 02:30-02:452006/01/05 02:45-03:002006/01/05 03:00-03:152006/01/05 03:15-03:302006/01/05 03:30-03:452006/01/05 03:45-04:002006/01/05 04:00-04:152006/01/05 04:15-04:302006/01/05 04:30-04:452006/01/05 04:45-05:002006/01/05 05:00-05:15


4-5


Step Procedure

9 Click on “RMON(Line)(7days/day)” sub-menu button in “PMON (History)”,

Detailed daily Line (LAN) RMON (Remote Network Monitoring) data are displayed.


Port1

Date Time Status 1 2 3 4 5 61:2:3:4:5:6:7:8:9:10:11:12:13:14:15:16:17:18:19:20:21:22:



4-6


Step Procedure

10 Click on “RMON(DMR)(24H/15min)” sub-menu button in “PMON (History)”,

Detailed 15 minutes DMR (LAN) RMON (Remote Network Monitoring) data are displayed.

---RMON(DMR)(15min)--- Maintenance Mode: on : Current Time

Port1

Date Time Status 1 2 3 4 52006/01/05 00:00-00:15 1:

2:3:4:5:6:7:8:9:10:11:12:13:14:15:16:17:18:


2006/01/05 00:15-00:302006/01/05 00:30-00:452006/01/05 00:45-01:002006/01/05 01:00-01:152006/01/05 01:15-01:302006/01/05 01:30-01:452006/01/05 01:45-02:002006/01/05 02:00-02:152006/01/05 02:15-02:302006/01/05 02:30-02:452006/01/05 02:45-03:002006/01/05 03:00-03:152006/01/05 03:15-03:302006/01/05 03:30-03:452006/01/05 03:45-04:00


4-7


Step Procedure

11 Click on “RMON(DMR)(7days/day)” sub-menu button in “PMON (History)”,

Detailed daily DMR (LAN) RMON (Remote Network Monitoring) data are displayed.

---RMON(DMR)(1day)--- Maintenance Mode: on

Port1

Date Time Status 1 2 3 4 5 61:2:3:4:5:6:7:8:9:10:11:12:13:14:15:16:17:18:



4-8


Step Procedure




3 Click on “PMON (History)” in “LCT MENU”,

4 Click on “DMR(W)(24H/15min)” sub-menu button (for SONET) in “PMON (History)”,

Detailed 15min 24 hours DMR(W) performance data are displayed,

LCT MENU

Alarm/StatusEquipment SetupInventoryAUX I/OMaintenanceProvisioningMeteringPMON(History) RX Level(24H/15min)

RX Level(7days/day)DMR(W)(7days/day)DMR(W)(24H/15min)MUX(W)(7days/day)MUX(W)(24H/15min)

---DMR(W)(15min)---- Maintenance Mode: on : Current Time



4-9


Step Procedure

5 Click on “DMR(W)(7days/day)” sub-menu button (for SONET) in “PMON (History)”,

Detailed daily DMR(W) performance monitor data are displayed,

6 Click on “MUX(W)(7days/day)” sub-menu button (for SONET) in “PMON (History)”,

Detailed daily 7days MUX(W) performance data are displayed.

---DMR(W)(1day)--- Maintenance Mode: on

Port1

Date Time Status 1 2 3 4 5 61:2:3:4:5:6:7:8:9:10:11:12:13:14:15:16:17:18:


---MUX(W)(day)--- Maintenance Mode: on



4-10


Step Procedure

7 Click on “MUX(W)(24H/15min)” sub-menu button in “PMON (History)”,

Detailed 15min 24 hours MUX(W) performance data are displayed,

8 Click on “RMON(Line)(24H/15min)” sub-menu button in “PMON (History)”,

---MUX(W)(15min)---- Maintenance Mode: on : Current Time



Port1

Date Time Status 1 2 3 4 52006/01/05 00:00-00:15 1:

2:3:4:5:6:7:8:9:10:11:12:13:14:15:16:17:18:19:20:21:22:


2006/01/05 00:15-00:302006/01/05 00:30-00:452006/01/05 00:45-01:002006/01/05 01:00-01:152006/01/05 01:15-01:302006/01/05 01:30-01:452006/01/05 01:45-02:002006/01/05 02:00-02:152006/01/05 02:15-02:302006/01/05 02:30-02:452006/01/05 02:45-03:002006/01/05 03:00-03:152006/01/05 03:15-03:302006/01/05 03:30-03:452006/01/05 03:45-04:002006/01/05 04:00-04:152006/01/05 04:15-04:302006/01/05 04:30-04:452006/01/05 04:45-05:002006/01/05 05:00-05:15


4-11


Step Procedure

Detailed 24 hours 15min Line (LAN) RMON (Remote Network Monitoring) data are displayed.

Notes:For the GbE INTFC, there are distinctions for the following functions from the 10BASE-T/100BASE-Tx






7. The RX Alignement Error is counted as an RX CRC ERR.



4-1212 pages


Step Procedure

9 Click on “RMON(Line)(7days/day)” sub-menu button in “PMON (History)”,

Detailed daily Line (LAN) RMON (Remote Network Monitoring) data are displayed.

Note: For the GbE INTFC, there are distinctions for the functions from the 10BASE-T/100BASE-Tx, refer to Notes of above “RMON(Line)(24H/15min)”.


Port1

Date Time Status 1 2 3 4 5 61:2:3:4:5:6:7:8:9:10:11:12:13:14:15:16:17:18:19:20:21:22:


ROI-S05751 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5-1

5. CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

Corrective maintenance done in the field is described in this chapter.Corrective maintenance in the field covers fault isolation, module/unit replacement and alignment. The fault location procedures describes how to isolate module-level/unit-level faults.

Faults can be classified into those that cause deterioration of the transmission quality and those that interrupt the traffic due to a malfunction of the equipment. This chapter explains the troubleshooting procedures for equipment faults and the corresponding remedial methods. The purpose of troubleshooting malfunctioning equipment is to restart the service by locating the faulty part and replacing it with a spare.

The faults that cause deterioration in the transmission quality are primarily originated by changes occurred in the state of propagation. Therefore, if a decline in the transmission quality or similar fault takes place frequently, the link design will have to be reviewed.

During the corrective maintenance, carefully observe the precautions given in Chapter 2, until the alignment is completed.

5.1 Alarm/Status

When an alarm event has occurred, At first, check alarm indication on the front of the IDU. Continuously, connect the PC to the LCT jack on the IDU and check alarm/status indication, Meter Reading on the LCT.

(a) Check of the ALM LED Indications and LCT IndicationA faulty part can be located by checking the ALM LED indicatorsand LCT Alarm indications. For the explanation of the ALM LED indication, refer to Chapter 2 OPERATING EQUIPMENT in Section II. Also refer to Chapter 2 Alarm/Status in this Section IV APPENDIX LCT OPERATION.

(b) Meter ReadingsBased on the meter readings during periodical inspection with LCT described in Chapter 4, a faulty part can be located by checking if the reading values exceed the permissible ranges.

(c) LoopbackIn the case of an abnormal BER measurement result among the meter reading items, try to distinguish the faulty part by Chart 5.1.1 Loopback.

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ROI-S05751

5-2

5.1.1 Alarm and Status

The alarm and status of each module and ODU are displayed. Each items is explained below.

ODU

TX Power: Indicates the status of the transmitter in the ODU. When the transmission level is decreased 3 dB or more from preset ATPC minimum level, “Alarm” is issued.

TX Input: Indicates the status of the ODU input signal from IDU. When the input signal from the IDU is lost, “Alarm” is issued.

RX Level: Indicates the status of the received RF signal level of the ODU. When the level decreased below the RX threshold level, “Alarm” is issued.

APC: Indicates the status of the synthesizer in the ODU. When any abnormality occurs in the synthesizer, “Alarm” is issued.

ODU CPU/Cable Open: Indicates the status of the CPU in the ODU or IF cable, When any abnormality occurs the CPU operation or IF cable is open, “Alarm” issued.

Mute Status: Indicates the control status of the ODU TX power output. When the TX power is set to Mute, “On” is issued.

LO REF (for XPIC in SONET): Indicates the status of reference LO signal used for V/H signal synchronization. When the reference signal in the ODU is lost, “Alarm” is issued.

TX SW Status (for 1+1 configuration): Indicates the TX SW status for the No. 1 or No. 2 CH selection.

RX SW Status (for 1+1 configuration): Indicates the RX SW status for the No. 1 or No. 2 CH selection.


5-3

MODEM

Unequipped: Indicates the status of the MODEM existence. When the MODEM is loose contact or it is not mounted according to the “Equipment Setup”, “Alarm” is issued.

Module: Indicates the status of the modulator-demodulator. When a failure occurred in the modulator-demodulator and as a result of a LSI failure, “Alarm” is issued.

LOF: Indicates the frame synchronization status. When the synchronization from DMR is lost, “Alarm” is issued,

Frame ID: Indicates the status of ID number against MODEM of opposite station or the other channel in Twinpath configuration. When ID number assignment is improper, “Alarm” is issued.

High BER: Indicates the quality severe deterioration status between radio sections. When the signal deteriorates below the threshold preset value, “Alarm” is issued. The settable threshold values are: 1E-3, 1E-4 and 1E-5.

Low BER: Indicates the quality unsevere deterioration status between radio sections. When the signal deteriorates below the preset threshold value, “Alarm” is issued. The settable threshold values are: 1E-6, 1E-7, 1E-8 and 1E-9.

Early Warning: Indicates quality deterioration status. When the signal deteriorates below the preset threshold level, “Alarm” is issued. (When the Early Warning is used for protection switchover in 1+1 configuration, RX Hitless Switch is operated.) The preset threshold level is less than 1E-9.

MOD: Indicates the operating status of the MOD. When any failure occurs in the modulator section, “Alarm” is issued.

DEM: Indicates the operating status of the DEM. When any failure occurs in the demodulator section, “Alarm” is issued.


5-4

Input Voltage: Indicates the power supply input voltage status. When power supply is exceeding the limited, “Alarm” is issued.

Power Supply: Indicates the operating status of the power supply. When power supply is abnormal, “Alarm” is issued.

IF Cable Short: Indicates the status of IF cable between IDU and ODU. When a short circuit is caused between ODU and the IDU, “Alarm” is issued.

Cable EQL: Indicates the status of IF cable equalizer. When equalizer characteristics control is lost, “Alarm” is issued.

XIF (for XPIC in SONET): Indicates the status of XIF input signal of the Main Master IDU and Sub Master IDU. When the XIF input signal is lost, “Alarm” is issued and XPIC function is reset.

XPIC Status (for XPIC in SONET): Indicates the status of XPIC operation. When the XPIC function is reset, “Reset” is indicated and the “Reset” LED on the front panel is lit.

XREF (for XPIC in SONET): Indicates the status of reference CLK signal used for V/H signal synchronization. When the reference OSC in the MODEM failure occurs, “Alarm” is issued.

Linearizer Function: Indicates the status of linearizer function.

OPR: When the linearizer function is used.

NO OPR:When the linearizer function is not used. In this case, TX output power decreases approx. 4 dBm from a standard value.

N/A: When the ODU is used without linearizer function.

Linearizer: Indicates the linearizer operating status. When linlearizer operation is improper in OPR condition, “Alarm” is issued.


5-5

ATPC Power Mode: Indicates the status of ATPC operation mode. When the ATPC function is improper, stop the control and maintain the TX output level at HOLD/MAX/MIN selectable.

INTFC (Main/Sub)

INTFC(1/2) Module: Indicates the operating status of the ( ) INTFC. When any failure occurs in the INTFC(1/2) Module, “Alarm” is issued.

INTFC(1) Unequipped: Indicates the existence status of the ( ) INTFC. When the ( ) INTFC(1) is not equipped, “Alarm” is issued.

INTFC(2) Unequipped (for SONET): Indicates the existence status of the ( ) INTFC. When the ( ) INTFC(2) is not equipped, “Alarm” is issued.

INTFC(1/2) Type Mismatch: Indicates the mounted status of the ( ) INTFC. When the INTFC(1/2) type is not coincided with the inventory list, “Alarm” is issued.

INTFC(1) In-Phase: Indicates the received signal DADE status between No. 1 and No. 2 at STM/( )E1 INTFC. When the received signal delay time is out of permissible range, Outphase alarm is issued.

OC-3(1) LOS (MUX) (for SONET): Indicates the input signal status of the OC-3 from MUX. When the input is disconnected, “Alarm” is issued.

OC-3(1) LOF (MUX) (for SONET): Indicates the input signal status of the OC-3 from MUX. When the input signal is out of frame synchronization, “Alarm” is issued.

E-BER(1) (MUX) (for SONET): Indicates Excessive-BER of the input OC-3 signal from MUX. When the signal deteriorates below the preset threshold level, “Alarm” is issued. The settable threshold values are 1E-3, 1E-4 and 1E-5.

OC-3(1) SD (MUX) (for SONET):


5-6

Indicates the input signal status of the OC-3 from MUX. When the signal deteriorates below the preset threshold level, “Alarm” is issued. The settable threshold values are 1E-6, 1E-7, 1E-8 and 1E-9.

OC-3(1) LOS (DMR) (for SONET): Indicates the signal status of the OC-3 from DMR. When the input is disconnected, “Alarm” is issued.


5-7

OC-3(1) LOF (DMR) (for SONET): Indicates the status of the input OC-3 signal from DMR. When the input signal is out of synchronization, “Alarm” is issued.

OC-3(1) E-BER (DMR) (for SONET): Indicates Excessive-BER of the input OC-3 signal at the Radio side. When the signal deteriorates below the preset threshold level, “Alarm” is issued. The setable threshold values are 1E-3, 1E-4 and 1E-5.

OC-3(1) SD (DMR) (for SONET): Indicates the input signal status of the OC-3 from DMR. When the signal deteriorates below the preset threshold level, “Alarm” is issued. The setable threshold values are 1E-6, 1E-7, 1E-8 and 1E-9.

OC-3(1) TF (for SONET): Indicates the signal interruption status. Indicates when MS-AIS Generation is set to “Disable”. When OC-3 output signal of OC-3 INTFC is stopped, “Under Execution” is indicated.

LAN Link (Port ( )) (LAN INTFC for SONET): Indicates the status of Link between related equipment and Port ( ). Indicates “Link” when the Port is linked with related equipment and indicates “Alarm” in other case.

LAN Collision (Port ( )) (LAN INTFC for SONET): Indicates the status of Collision in Half Duplex mode. In Full Duplex mode, “Normal” is always displayed. Indicates status when Port ( ) is in collision condition.

Link Loss Forwarding (LLF) (Port ( )) (LAN INTFC for SONET): Indicates the operating status during the fault in opposite station or when the link of local Port ( ) LAN is disconnected by the fault of radio section. When any failure occurs in the MAIN INTFC, “Alarm” is also issued.

Speed & Duplex: (Port ( )) (LAN INTFC for SONET): Indicates the operating mode of Port ( ).

CTRL

CTRL Module: Indicates the operating status of the CTRL. When any failure occurs in the CTRL Module, “Alarm”


5-8

is issued.

MMC: Indicates the MMC status. When the mounted MMC is detected, “On” is displayed.

APS SW Fail (for APS in SONET): Indicates the APS status of the APS system. When the APS switchover failure occurs, “Alarm” is issued.

APS Online Status (for APS in SONET): Indicates online channel on the APS system.

XCTRL (for XPIC in SONET): Indicates the status of control signal between Main Master IDU and Sub Master IDU. When the out of control condition occurs, “Alarm” is issued.

XPIC Mode Mismatch (for XPIC in SONET): Indicates the status of the Main Master IDU and Sub Master IDU definition. When the Main Master IDU and Sub Master IDU is not defined properly as like as Main Master-Main Master or Sub Master-Sub Master, “Alarm” is issued.


5-9

5.1.2 Control ItemControl items can be selected only under maintenance mode. As this “Control” is likely to cause disconnection of signal, take care during operation.

Details of “Control” item is described as follows:

TXSW manual control: Controls manual switchover of the TX SW at the transmitting side in the Hot standby (HS) configuration.

RXSW manual control: Controls manual switchover of the RX SW in the 1+1 configuration. The switchover is carried out without traffic interruption when the DADE is In-phase. Adjustment of the delay time of No.1 and No.2 is automatically set.

Caution: When the RX SW mode is set to “Forced” in provisioning, RX SW manual control can select either No. 1 or No. 2 RX route though one is alarmed. Then, take care switching to avoid traffic interruption.

ATPC manual control: Used when it is required ATPC operation ON/OFF or the change of the transmitting power range in ATPC operation.

TX mute: Turns off the transmitter output.

CW CONTROL (No.1/2): Used for transmitting a unmodulated carrier wave (CW). Used to confirm the TX frequency stability.

APS Manual Control (for APS in SONET): Controls manual switchover (Auto/Working/Protection) of the Optical Line in the APS system.

Caution: When the APS Maintenance mode is set to “Forced”in provisioning, APS Manual Control can select either Working or Protection line though one is alarmed. Then, take care switching to avoid traffic interruption.

IF loopback: Used for distinguish equipment failure to ODU or IDU. The input traffic signal from MUX is looped back at IF stage. When no abnormality is found in the signal after IF loopback, it is assumed that the ODU has a problem.


5-10

Since the control is not interlocked with the RX SW, the RX SW control is needed to select CH which it is IF looped back in 1+1 configuration.

Main Loopback (NEAR END) (for SONET)/Main Loopback (NEAR END) INTFC (1) or (2) (for SONET

APS)/: Used for distinguish equipment failure to MUX equipment or radio equipment. The input signal from MUX is looped back to the MUX. When no abnormality is found in the signal with NEAR END loopback, it is assumed that the radio equipment (IDU or ODU) has a problem.

Main Loopback (FAR END) (for SONET): Used for distinguish equipment failure to MUX equipment or radio equipment. Signal is looped back at the IDU of the opposite station. When no abnormality is found in the signal through FAR END loopback, it is assumed that the local radio equipment (IDU or ODU) has no problem.

Note: This function is unavailable when 2-WAY/XC is enabled.

DADE Adjust: Sets the DADE for Hot Standby SD/Twinpath configuration. Selects to make INTFC status In-phase.

Notes: 1. The DADE control applies in 1+1 configuration to adjust delay time for RX hitless switching when the INTFC status is indicated Outphase.


5-11

2. The DADE adjustment is needed in initial lineup or when the IF CABLE is replaced. It is not needed readjustment when the INTFC status is indicated In-phase.

LAN Device Reset (for LAN transmission only): Used for reset control to LAN interface Port 1 or Port 2.

Linearizer Control: Sets Auto/Forced Reset of linearizer function.

Forced Reset: When the linearizer function is not used.

Auto: When the linearizer function is used.

RF SUB Band select: Used for changing the ODU sub band for radio link depending on the RF frequency assignment.

Antenna Alignment Mode: The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the NLITE E Monitor unit. In order to measure in high range of AGC V, it is mandatory required to set Antenna Alignment Mode to ON. If not it set to ON, the indicated AGC voltage is not guaranteed value.For the antenna orientation, set the TX power to the required level by MTPC mode at the opposite site.

Note: It is necessary to set to Antenna Alignment Mode when monitor the RX level with the NLITE E Monitor unit.

ALS Restart (for SONET optical interface): Sets the duration that the laser is emitted when ALS manual restart for test is performed.

XPIC Control Local (for XPIC in SONET): Resets the XPIC function for Local IDU when propagation is deteriorated, either MODEM or ODU of Main Master or Sub Master is a failure or perform the link test.

XPIC Control Remote (for XPIC in SONET): Resets the XPIC function for the IDU in the opposite station when either MODEM or ODU of Main Master or Sub Master in the local station is a failure or perform the link test.


5-12

5.1.3 Loopback

When loopback condition is necessary, set the system to loopback condition. (see Chart 5-1)

When there is an interruption of signals, use the STM/SONET/PDH analyzers and isolate the faulty section by checking the traffic signal by loopback. Setup the test equipment according to the following diagrams for PDH or SONET configuration.

N/C(E/O)CONV

DEMRX

C/N(O/E)CONV

MODTX

IDUODU

RECEIVING END

TX

RX

MOD

DEM

RSTSTM/SONETANALYZER

STM/SONETANALYZER

ODUIDU

TRANSMITTING END

MODEM OC-3 INTFCMODEM

RST

RST

RST

C/N(O/E)CONV

N/C(E/O)CONV

OC-3 INTFC

(Near End Loopback) (IF Loopback) (Far End Loopback)

PC

Fig. 5-1 Loopback Diagram for Fault Isolation for SONET

Note: The IF LOOPBACK and the RX SW is not operated interlock. In 1+1 configuration, The RX SW switching is needed to select the same CH that is testing in IF LOOPBACK. When the RX SW manual control is disable, set it to Forced mode in Provisioning.


5-13

Chart 5-1 Loopback Control

Step Procedure


This chart contains:A. PreparationB. IF Loopback ControlC. Main Loopback (Near End) Control (SONET)D. Main Loopback (Far End) Control (SONET)If loopback operation is performed, timing loop may occur (timing loop is described in ITU-T Recommendation G.781).

Step Procedure

Caution: The Loopback control affects the radio link connection.

1. Loopback control operation is not performed at the same time, or perform the Loopback reset control and perform either Loopback mode.• IF Loopback• Near End Loopback• Far End Loopback

2. Loopback operation is not performed with an opposite station simultaneously.

3. Far End Loopback control will be canceled when radio link failure occurs under the control has been executed.

A. PREPARATION

1 Set up the BER measurement, (refer to Fig. 5-3)

2 Connect the LCT port and the USB port with a USB cable, (see Fig. 2-2 in Chart 2-2)

3 Login LCT with User name “Admin” and Admin password,


5-14


Step Procedure

4 Click on the “Maintenance” button in “LCT MENU”,

LCT MENU



5 Click on the “Maintenance1” menu,

6 Click on the control button “On” and click “Set” button, to set to Maintenance On mode,

7 For 1+1 configuration, switchover the TX SW and RX SW for the channel is to be set loopback, (Refer to Chart 2.3 Manual Switchover Operation)

8 Click on the “IF Loopback ( )” button in “Maintenance1” menu and click on the setting button “On”,

Note: The control affects Radio link connection.

Note:The control applies to IF loopback in local MODEM.

9 Click on the “Set” button,

10 Click on the Alarm/Status on LCT MENU to check the status,

11 Refer to Fig. 5-7 to 5-9 Troubleshooting Flowchart to diagnose the problem,

12 Click on the setting button “Off” of the IF Loopback ( ) and click on the “Set” button,

---Maintenance1---Item Value SettingMaintenance On Off On SetIF Loopback (No.1) On Off On SetIF Loopback (No.2) Off Off On Set


5-15


Step Procedure

For OC-3 (E)

13 Click on the setting button “On” and click on the “Set” button,

---Maintenance1---Item Value SettingMaintenance On Off On SetMain Loopback (Near End) On Off On SetMain Loopback (Far End) Off Off On Set


5-16


Step Procedure

For OC-3 (O) (APS)

14 Click on the “Main Loopback (Near End)” button in “Maintenance1” menu, click on the setting button “INTFC ( )” and click on the “Set” button,



17 Click on the setting button “Off” of the Main Loopback (Near End) and click on the “Set” button,

18 Click on the setting button of Main Loopback (Far End) in “Maintenance 1” menu and click on the “Set” button,



21 Click on the setting button “Off” of the Main Loopback (Far End),

22 Reset control for TX RX SW to “Off”,

23 Reset Maintenance mode to “Off”.

---Maintenance1---Item Value SettingMaintenance On Off On SetMain Loopback (Near End) INTFC (1) On Off On SetMain Loopback (Near End) INTFC (2) Off Off On SetMain Loopback (Far End) Off Off On Set


5-17

5.1.4 BER Measurement

Chart 5-2 BER Measurement

Apparatus:

Digital Multimeter with test leads

Screwdriver

SONET/SONET Analyzer (for SONET)

Optical Variable Attenuator (for OC-3 Optical Interface only)

Headset

Step Procedure

A. 4P LAN INTERFACE

Note: The BER measurement can not be performed for the channel which is set to Not Used or the channels shared with LAN.

TRANSMITTING END

SELV

!


PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

PASOLINK NEO

ALM

LCT

PULL

SELV

!

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

PULL

G

G

G

G

100M PORT 3 PORT4 100M

ALM

100M PORT 1 PORT 2 100M

4P LAN INTFC


5-18


Step Procedure

1 At both transmitting and receiving ends, set the BER test set as follows:

Note: Operation of the TX SW and RX SW are not required in 1+0 system for the following.

2 In HS system, set the TX SW to No.1 or No.2 to “On” condition at transmitting end (refer to Chart 2-3),

3 At receiving end, set the RX SW to either No.1 or No.2 to “On” condition,

4 Measure BER at required CH and confirm that the values are indicated as follows:Requirement: 1 x 10–12 or less

5 At receiving end, change setting of the RX SW to opposite No.1 or No.2 from it in step 5 and confirm that the measured value satisfies requirement as in step 6,





5-19


Step Procedure

B. OPTICAL INTERFACE

Caution: To avoid damage to your eyes, do not stare into laser beam or view directly with optical instruments. (Class 1 Laser Product).

1 At the transmitting end, disconnect OPT cable from the STM1 IN connector on the OC-3 INTFC (see Fig. 5-2),

SELV

!

AUX/ALMNMS NE

ALM

SC IN/OUT EOW

PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

PASOLINK NEO

LCT

OC-3 OUT OC-3 IN

PULL

SELV

!

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

PULL

ONLINE G

G

G

G

STM/SONETANALYZER

OC-3 INTFC

TRANSMITTING END

IDU

OC-3 (OPT) IN

STM/SONETANALYZER

OC-3 (OPT) OUT

OPTICAL VARIABLE

ATTENUATOR *

RECEIVING END


IDU

SELV

!

AUX/ALMNMS NE

ALM

SC IN/OUT EOW

PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

PASOLINK NEO

LCT

OC-3 OUT OC-3 IN

PULL

SELV

!

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

PULL

ONLINE G

G

G

G

(Blank)

(Blank)

OC-3 INTFC

Fig. 5-2 BER Measurement for OC-3 Signal

2 At the receiving end, disconnect the OPT cable from the STM1 OUT connector on the OC-3 INTFC (see Fig. 5-2),

3 At both transmitting and receiving ends, set the STM/SONET Analyzer as follows:


5-20


Step Procedure

OC-3 INTFC(OPTICAL) • Bit rate : 155.52 Mbps• Code format : OC-3, NRZ• Level S-1.1 L-1.1

IN : −8 to −28 dBm/ −10 to −34 dBm OUT : −8 to −15 dBm/ 0 to −8 dBm

• Wave lengthIN : 1310 nmOUT : 1310 nm

Note: Operation of the TX SW and RX SW are not required in 1+0 system.

4 In HS system, set the TX SW to No.1 or No.2 to On condition at transmitting end, (refer to Chart 2-3)

5 At receiving end, set the RX SW to either No.1 or No.2 to On condition,

6 Measure BER and confirm that the values are indicated as follows:Requirement: 1 x 10–12 or less






5-21

5.1.5 Trouble Shooting FlowWhen alarm condition occurs, red alarm LEDs on the IDU are lit except when there is a power supply failure. Faults can be distinguished using the LED indicators on the front panel of the IDU. Connect the LCT to the equipment and check the equipment conditions in according with the flow chart are shown in Fig. 5-3 to Fig. 5-5.

Is ODU ALM indicator (red) on the IDU lighted?

YES

IsIDU ALM indicator (red) on the IDU

lighted?

NO

YES

Areboth IDU and ODU ALM

indicators (red) flashing?

Check the IF cable connection and connectors whether the cable is open or short circuit.

YES

IsTX power of the ODU is

indicated normal?

YES

IsTX Input

indicated normal?

The IF cable type,

cable length and cable loss are used standard.

Change the IF cable to standard.

Is TX powervary with ATPC manual

control?

NO

Replace the ODU with a spare.

YES

Replace the ODU with a spare, if TX power alarm

continues when temperature is improved.

YES

IsAPC of the ODU is indicated

normal?

NO NO

YES


NO Is

ODU CPU is indicated normal?

NO

Reset CPU of the ODU.

IsODU ALM is indicated

normal?

NO

Check the RX section of the ODU. End

YES

YESConnect the LCT to the IDU and check ALARM/STATUS menu. Check every items whether indicated status is alarm or normal.

NO

NO

YES


Is LO REF indicated

normal?

NO

YES


Is XREF (MODEM)indicated normal?

NO

YES

Check the IDU section.

For XPIC

Fig. 5-3 ODU TX Section Troubleshooting Flowchart

Is ODU ALM indicator (red) on the IDU lighted?

YES

NO

YES


indicators (red) flashing?

Check the IF cable connection and connectors whether the cable is open or short circuit.

Connect the LCT to the IDU and check ALARM STATUS menu. Check every items whether indicated status is Alarm or Normal.

IsRX Level

indicated Normal?

Is RXLEVEL byRSL monitor vary at random

interval?

Arefrequency value at

opposite site and local site correct?

NO

NO

YES

Check fading or interference.

YES

IsIDU ALM indicator (red)

lighted?

YES

YES

IsAPC of the ODU is indicated

Normal?

IsODU CPU is indicated

Normal?

Reset CPU of the ODU

IsODU ALM is indicated

Normal?

Replace the ODU with a spare.End

YES

NO

NO

YES

NO

Check Antenna system or Replace the ODU with a spare.

Set proper frequency.

NO

YES

IsODU TX section are

checked?

YES

NO

NO

Check the TX section of the ODU.

Check the ODU TX section.

For XPIC


5-22

Fig. 5-4 ODU RX Section Troubleshooting Flowchart

Is IDU ALM indicator (red) on the IDU lighted?

YES

YES

Is ODU ALM indicator

(red) on the IDU lighted?

NO

NO


indicators (red) flashing? Check the IF cable connection and

connectors whether the cable is open or short circuit.

Connect the LCT to the IDU and check ALARM STATUS menu. Check every items whether indicated status is Alarm or Normal.

Connect the SONET Analizer for BER measurement.

Select Far End loopback from Control menu in the Maintenance Menu on the LCT.

Display ALARM/STATUS items from main menu on the LCT again.

YES

IsOutput LOS indicated

Normal?

IsIF Cable indicated

Short?

YES

NO A

IsIDU indicated

Normal?

YES

NO

A

Select IF Loopback from Maintenance1 menu in the

Maintenance Menu on the LCT.

IsMOD/DEM indicated

Normal?

YES

NO Replace the MODEM with a spare.

IsAIS Generated indicated

Normal? NO

Check associated DTE and cable connection.

IsInput LOS indicated

Normal?

NO

NO

IsOutput LOS indicated

Normal?

YES NO

YES

( ) INTFC faulty.Replace the ( ) INTFC

Check associated DTE and cable connection at

opposite site.

YES Check associated DTE at opposite site.

IsAIS or MS-AIS Received

indicatedNormal?

NO

YES Check associated DTE at local site.

IsCH Usage indicated

Normal? NO

YES Set CH usage correct. Is

MOD/DEM indicatedNormal?

YES

NOIs

status of LAN INTFC indicatedNormal? NO

YES Perform LAN device reset and check LAN cable or associated external equipment.

A

YES

YES

IsPWR LED on the

MODEM lit?

Replace Fuse in the

MODEM.

NO

Is XIF indicated

normal?

YES IsMOD indicated

Normal?

NO

NO

Is XREF indicated

normal? YES

YES

NO

Replace the MODEM with a spare.

Check the XIFcable, IDU and ODU of the opposite pol. CH or setting of

the opposite station.

For XPIC


5-23

Fig. 5-5 IDU Section Troubleshooting Flowchart


5-24

5.2 Replacement

The replacement procedures of the IDU and ODU is described below.

5.2.1 ODU Replacement

The procedures for replacing the ODU with a spare are given in the Chart 5-3. The label attached to the side of ODU indicates the ODU type (see Fig 5-6). To replace the ODU, prepare another ODU of the same type as indicated on the label of the failed one.

Check the name plate of the spare ODU. When the indicated items are coincided, the ODU can be replaced.


Caution: To avoid microfonic properties, occurrence of bit errors, when installing the ODU on the HYB or OMT, protect the ODU from mechanical knocks which is not be replaced.

6-38 GHz ODU

FGIFLMONRX LEV

TRP-( )G-1B0678NLITE E


(NWA-009034)



0678


NLITE E

TX HIGH/LOW




MHz TX FREQUENCY


TX HIGH/LOW

SERIAL No. DATE

SERIAL No. DATE

(NWA-009034)

NLite E

Fig. 5-6 ODU Type and Frequency Indication Label

Note: Before replacing the ODU in XPIC, perform the control of XPIC Local and XPIC Remote Reset by the LCT for Main Master or Sub Master channel that is to be used online.

The mounting and demounting the ODU from/to antenna, refer to the Installation and Initial Line up in Section III.


5-25

Chart 5-3 ODU Replacement

Apparatus:T type hexagonal driver

Step Procedure

REMOVING

1 For 1+1 configuration, switchover the TX SW and RX SW for the standby channel is to be replaced,

2 Turn off the power switch on the MODEM which is connected to the ODU is to be replaced,

3 Remove the self-bonding tape from the IF IN/OUT connector,

4 Disconnect the IF cable from the IF IN/OUT connector on the ODU,

5 Disconnect ground cable from the FG terminal on the ODU,

6 Loosen four bolts fixed the ODU with a T type hexagonal driver,

FGIFLMONRX LEV

SCREWS

SCREWS

ODU

IFCABLE

GROUNDCABLE

NLite E

7 Remove the ODU from the bracket,


5-26


Step Procedure

MOUNTING

8 When the ODU is used for vertical polarization, rotate the ODU so that the plate marked V is on top,

V POLARIZATION

PLATE MARKED V

UP

FGIFLMONRX LEV

Guide Pin

ODU

NLite E

Note: Remove the protection metallic plate covering the waveguide hole on ODU.

9 When the ODU is used for horizontal polarization, remove the guide pin fixed on the plate marked V,

10 Insert the guide pin removed in step 8 behind of the plate marked H,

11 Rotate the ODU so that the plate marked H is on top,

PLATE MARKED H

UP

FGIFL

MO

NR

X LEV

Guide Pin

ODU H POLARIZATION

NLite E


5-27


Step Procedure

12 Fit the spare ODU onto the bracket,

Note: Be careful not to damage the flange and O-ring.

13 Mount the spare ODU onto the bracket and tighten the four screws on the ODU,

14 Reconnect the IF cable to the IF IN/OUT connector on the ODU,

15 Wrap twice the IF IN/OUT connector with self-bonding tape for waterproofing. (see Fig. 5-7 (1/2) and (2/2))

16 Reconnect ground cable removed in step 4 to FG terminal,

17 Turn on the power switch on the IDU.

POLE

ANT

6-8 GHz BAND

ODU

ODU

(*)

Note: * These parts should be wrapped by self-bonding tape for waterproof.

6-8 GHz BAND

self-bonding tape

stretch



ODU

twice

(*)

ODU

POLE

ANT

HYB


5-28


IF CABLE

SELF-BONDING TAPE

ODU

Note: The self-bonding tape should be prepared by customer.

SELF-BONDING TAPE

ODU

IF CABLE

IN CASE OF L−ANGLE

ODU

CONNECTOR

self-bonding tape

stretch



ODU

twice

This part should be wrapped by self-bonding tape for waterproof.


5-29



5-30

5.2.2 IDU and Module Replacement

The procedures for replacing IDU/module with a spare are given in the Chart 5-4.

Chart 5-4 IDU and Module Replacement

Caution: Persons performing maintenance must take necessary steps to avoid electro-static discharge which may damage the modules or cause error. Wear a conductive wrist strap connected to the grounded (G) jack on the front of the equipment shelf. This will minimize static build-up during maintenance. (see Fig. 2-1 in Chapter 2).


This chart contains:

A. Module replacementB. IDU replacement

Apparatus:Suitable Screwdriver

Step Procedure

A. MODULE REPLACEMENT

Note: Be careful do not touch the electric parts and printed circuit on the module.

Note: The top surface of the IDU above MODEM is hot in operation.

Note: The maintenance personnel should report starting replacement from a station to the relevant station.

1 Referring to Chart 2-1, set the IDU to maintenance ON condition by LCT,

2 For 1+1 configuration, switchover the TX SW and RX SW for the standby channel from the working channel which is to be replaced,


5-31


Step Procedure

Removing MODEM

3 When the MODEM will be replaced, turn off the power switch on the corresponding MODEM which is to be replaced,

4 Disconnect cables as following order,(1) Disconnect power supply cable from SELV connector.(2) Disconnect IF cable from IF IN/OUT connector. The

adapter is reused.(3) Disconnect ground cable from the ground terminal.

5 Loosen two screws on the MODEM module, (See Fig. 5-8)

6 Remove the MODEM module from the IDU shelf,

Mounting MODEM

1 When the MODEM is replaced, check that the power switch is set to Off position,

2 Align the MODEM to the shelf, then push it in until the multipin connector firmly fits,

3 Tighten the two screws on the module,

4 Connect cables as following order,(1) Connect ground cable to the ground terminal.(2) Connect IF cable with adapter to IF IN/OUT connector.(3) Connect power supply cable to SELV connector.

5 Turn on the power switch on the MODEM,

6 Check that the MODEM is normal on the Alarm/Status display,

7 Check that the installed MODEM module exists in the INVENTRY list,

8 Check the operation of the replaced MODEM module,

9 Referring to Chart 2-1, set the IDU to maintenance OFF condition by LCT.


5-32


Step Procedure

Replacement of the OC-3 (Optical) INTFC in APS

Caution: Do not stare at the laser beam or look at it directly with optical instruments. Otherwise, it may hurt your eyes (Class 1 Laser Product)

For the OC-3 (OPTICAL) INTFC replacement in APS configuration, the OC-3 (OPTICAL) INTFC can be replaced without power OFF and not affect traffic when doing replacement as following order. (When the traffic is not applied to the system, turn off the power switch before performing the replacement of the module.). The maintenance personnel should report starting replacement from a station to the relevant station.


2 Click on “APS Manual Control” from “Maintenance 1” menu,

3 Switchover the module is to be replaced to OFF LINE. Click on the “Working” or “Protection” button and click on the “Set” button, then, value turns to selected side for ON LINE,

4 Check that the “ON LINE” LED is unlit on the OC-3 (OPTICAL) INTFC which is to be replaced,

5 Set the PROTECT SW on the module front to ON (for upper position), then the MAINT LED starts the blink, The module can be replaced under the MAINT LED is blinking,

(a) There is need to install the MMC. The MEMORY LED blinks during the data is uploading to the MMC, the MAINT LED starts the blink after upload of the data has been completed.

(b) When the CTRL becomes the PROTECT mode, LCT connection takes timeout.

6 Disconnect optical cables from OC-3 OUT and OC-3 IN connectors on the OC-3 (OPTICAL) INTFC module is to be replaced,

---Maintenance1---Item Value SettingMaintenance On Off On SetAPS Manual Control Working Auto Working Protection Set


5-33


Step Procedure

7 Loosen two screws on the OC-3 (OPTICAL) INTFC module is to be replaced, (See Fig. 5-11)

8 Extract the OC-3 (OPTICAL) INTFC module from the IDU shelf,

Note: Be careful not catch the module on the cable when extracting the module. If the module caught on the live cables, it may be caused radio link error.

9 Install the spare OC-3 (OPTICAL) INTFC module into the IDU shelf,

10 Connect the OPT cables to the OC-3 OUT and OC-3 IN connectors on the OC-3 (OPTICAL) INTFC module,

11 Set the PROTECT SW on the module front to OFF (for lower position), then the MAINT LED turns to lit, When the PROTECT SW turns to OFF, it will appear momentary that events have been latched.

12 Check that the OC-3(1) and OC-3(2) are normal on the Alarm/Status display,

13 Check that the installed OC-3 (OPTICAL) INTFC module exists in the INVENTRY list,

14 Check the operation of the replaced OC-3 (OPTICAL) INTFC module,

15 Click on the “Auto” button and click on the “Set” button, then, value turns to Auto,

16 Click on the “Off” button of Maintenance and Click on the “Set” button,

17 This work finishes.


5-34


Step Procedure

System Upgrade for APS of OC-3 (OPTICAL) INTFC

Caution: To avoid eye damage, do not stare at the laser beam or look at it directly with optical instruments. (Class 1 Laser Product)

For the change of OC-3 (OPTICAL) INTFC system to the APS system, perform system setup without power OFF and not affect traffic when doing replacement as following order. The maintenance personnel should report starting replacement from a station to the relevant station.


2 Click on the “Equipment Setup” button in “LCT MENU”, then “Equipment Setup” menu is displayed,

3 Select “OC-3 OPT for APS” from pull-down menu of the SUB(PROT),

4 Click on the “Available” setting button of the APS Function,

5 Click on the “SET” button in Common area, then “OK” is displayed in Progress area when the setup is properly executed,

---Equipment Setup---User Interface SONET OC-3Redundancy Setting 1+1(Hot Standby TERM)INTFC (Main) OC-3(OPTICAL)INTFC (Prot) OC-3 OPT for APSXPIC Usage Not Used Used(Main Master) Used(Sub Master)APS Function Unavailable AvailableModulation Scheme 128QAMTransmission Capacity 156MB


5-35


Step Procedure

6 Click on the Provisioning button on “LCT MENU”,

7 Click on the “Forced” control button of the APS Maintenance Mode item,


9 In the Maintenance1 menu, Click on the “Working” button of the APS Manual Control and Click on the “Set” button, then, value turns to “Working”,

10 Remove the blank cover of the Slot2 for OC-3 INTFC(2),

11 Install the OC-3 (OPTICAL) INTFC module into the Slot2,

12 Tighten two screws of the OC-3 (OPTICAL) INTFC module, (See Fig. 5-11)

13 Connect the OPT cables to the OC-3 OUT and OC-3 IN connectors on the OC-3 (OPTICAL) INTFC module,

14 Check that the OC-3(1) and OC-3(2) are normal on the Alarm/Status display,


16 Check the operation of the installed OC-3 (OPTICAL) INTFC module,

17 Click on the “Auto” button and Click on the “Set” button, then, value turns to Auto,



----Condition for APS---APS Maintenance Mode Manual Forced



5-36


Step Procedure

System Change from e/w APS to w/o APS of OC-3 (OPTICAL) INTFC

Caution: Do not stare at the laser beam or look at it directly with optical instruments. Otherwise, it may hurt your eyes (Class 1 Laser Product).

For the change of OC-3 (OPTICAL) INTFC system of the APS system to without APS system, perform system setup without power OFF and not affect traffic when doing system change as following order. The maintenance personnel should report starting system change from a station to the relevant station.


2 In the Maintenance1 menu, Click on the “Working” button of the APS Manual Control and Click on the “Set” button, when the Protection side is ON LINE, value turns to “Working”,

3 Click on the “Auto” button of the APS Manual Control and Click on the “Set” button, When the Working side is ON LINE, check that the APS Manual Control is “Auto” mode,

4 Click on the “Equipment Setup” button in “LCT MENU”, then “Equipment Setup” menu is displayed,

5 Select “Not Used” from pull-down menu of the SUB(PROT),

6 Click on the “Unavailable” setting button of the APS Function,


---Maintenance1---Item Value SettingMaintenance On Off On SetAPS Manual Control Auto Auto Working Protection Set


5-37


Step Procedure


8 Perform step 8 to step 11 when it is needed,

9 Disconnect optical cables from OC-3 OUT and OC-3 IN connectors on the OC-3 (OPTICAL) INTFC module in the Slot2,

10 Loosen two screws on the OC-3 (OPTICAL) INTFC module is to be replaced, (See Fig. 5-11)

11 Extract the OC-3 (OPT) INTFC module from the Slot2,


12 Fit the blank cover with two screws to the Slot2,

13 Click on the “Off” button of Maintenance and click on the “Set” button,

---Equipment Setup---User Interface SONET OC-3Redundancy Setting 1+1(Hot Standby TERM)INTFC (Main) OC-3(OPTICAL)INTFC (Prot) Not UsedXPIC Usage Not Used Used(Main Master) Used(Sub Master)APS Function Unavailable AvailableModulation Scheme 128QAMTransmission Capacity 156MB


5-38


Step Procedure

Removing OC-3 INTFC, GbE INTFC, CTRL


Note: When the CTRL is a failure, replace it with a spare as explained below.

Note: When the CTRL is replaced without power OFF, refer to the “Replacing the CTRL Used MMC or LCT”.

2 Turn off the power switch on the MODEM (both MODEM for 1+1 configuration),

3 Disconnect all the cables connected to the module,

4 Loosen two screws on the module, (See Fig. 5-11),

5 Extract the module,

Note: Be careful to avoid catching the module on the cable when extracting the module. If the module is caught on the live cables, it may cause a radio link error.


1+0 SYSTEM

1+1 SYSTEM IDU

SELV

!


PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

nlite eFGFG

PULL

SELV

!

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

PULL

SCREW

SCREW

SCREW IDU

SCREW

SCREW

MODEM Gb E INTFC

CTRL

MODEM No. 1

MODEM No. 2 CTRL

Gb E INTFC

W/O APS SYSTEM IDU

SELV

!

AUX/ALMNMS NE

ALM

SC IN/OUT EOW

PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

nlite e

LCT

OC-3 OUT OC-3 IN

PULL

SELV

!

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

PULL

ONLINE G

G

G

G (Blank Cover)

Slot2

SCREW

SELV

!

AUX/ALMNMS NE

ALM

SC IN/OUT EOW

PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

nlite e

LCT

OC-3 OUT OC-3 IN

PULL

SELV

!

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

PULL


G

G

G

OC-3 (OPTICAL) INTFC OC-3 (OPTICAL) INTFC

SCREWE/W APS SYSTEM

OC-3 (OPTICAL) INTFC

SELV

!


PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

nlite e

LCT

OC-3 OUT OC-3 IN

PULL

SELV

!

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

PULL

G

G

G

G (Blank Cover)

OC-3 OUT OC-3 IN

(Blank Cover)


5-39

Fig. 5-8 Demounting and Remounting Module


5-40


Step Procedure

Mounting OC-3 (OPTICAL) INTFC w/o APS

For the OC-3 (OPTICAL) INTFC mounting without APS, install the module as following order,


2 Turn OFF the power switch on the MODEM,

3 Align the OC-3 (OPTICAL) INTFC to the shelf, then push it in until the multipin connector firmly fits,


5 Connect optical cables to OC-3 OUT and OC-3 IN connectors, Caution: Do not stare at the laser beam or look at it directly with

optical instruments. Otherwise, it may hurt your eyes (Class 1 Laser Product).

6 Turn ON the power switch on the MODEM,

7 Check that the “ON LINE” LED is lit on the OC-3 (OPTICAL) INTFC which is replaced,

8 Check that the OC-3(1) is normal on the Alarm/Status display,


10 Check the operation of the installed OC-3 (OPTICAL) INTFC module,






5-41


Step Procedure

Mounting GbE (OPTICAL) INTFC

For the GbE (OPTICAL) INTFC mounting, install the module as following order,



3 Align the GbE (OPTICAL) INTFC to the shelf, then push it in until the multipin connector firmly fits,


5 Connect optical cables to 1000BASE-SX OUT and IN connectors,

Caution: Do not stare at the laser beam or look at it directly with optical instruments. Otherwise, it may hurt your eyes (Class 1 Laser Product).

6 Turn ON the power switch on the MODEM,

7 Check that the “ON LINE” LED is lit on the GbE (OPTICAL) INTFC which is replaced,

8 Check that the OC-3(1) is normal on the Alarm/Status display,

9 Check that the installed GbE (OPTICAL) INTFC module exists in the INVENTRY list,

10 Check the operation of the installed GbE (OPTICAL) INTFC module,





5-42

Step Procedure

OC-3/GbE INTFC, CTRL



3 Check that the switch on the MODEM (both MODEM for 1+1 configuration) is off position,

4 Align the module to the IDU shelf, then push it in until the multipin connector firmly fits,

5 Tighten two screws on the module,

6 Connect all cables to the module,

7 Turn on the power switch on the MODEM.

8 Check that the 4P LAN INTFC, OC-3, GbE INTFC, CTRL is normal on the Alarm/Status display,

9 Check that the installed 4P LAN INTFC, OC-3, GbE INTFC, CTRL module exists in the INVENTRY list,

10 Check the operation of the replaced 4P LAN INTFC, OC-3, GbE INTFC, CTRL module,

11 Click on the “Off” button of Maintenance and click on the “Set” button,




5-43


Step Procedure

Replacing the CTRL Using the MMC or LCT.

This procedure explains how to replace the CTRL using the MMC or LCT. This procedure is applied when the CTRL is not failed, or when the equipment configuration data are saved into the MMC or LCT/PNMx.

Note: If the NMS parameters (Network Config.) can not be restored, then the resetup with the PNMx is required.

The Use of the MMC for the CTRL Replacement

When the MMC is used, the replacement can be performed without the LCT operation.(The resetup with the PNMx for the Network Config. is necessary.)

1 Insert the MMC into the MMC slot on the CTRL front, (The data size to save is approximately 10 kbyte.)

2 Set the PROTECT SW on the CTRL front to ON position (for upper side). Then, the MAINT LED (amber) on the IDU is lit and the equipment configuration data gather up and the saving of data to the MMC start,

3 When the equipment configuration data gather up and data saving to the MMC has been completed, the MAINT LED on the IDU blinks slowly, (Check that the MAINT LED blinks slowly when remove the CTRL.)

4 Remove the cables connected to the CTRL, loosen two fixed screws and remove the CTRL,


5 Prepare the spare CTRL. Set the PROTECT SW on the spare CTRL to ON position (for upper side), (The PROTECT SW setting distinguish the normal start up or protected start up.) Mount the CTRL into the IDU. Check that the MAINT LED on the IDU blinks. Tighten two screws and connect cables removed in step 4.


5-44


Step Procedure

6 When the MAINT LED blinks, insert the MMC into the MMC slot on the CTRL front, which has equipment configuration data used in the former CTRL,

7 The download of the equipment configuration data start, the deployment is performed. When the CTRL has been made provision, MAINT LED on the IDU turns to light. Check that the MAINT LED lights and set the PROTECT SW to OFF position (for lower side). Then, the equipment configuration data deploys and data is restored.

8 In the Equipment Setup menu and the Provisioning menu, confirm that the equipment configuration and setting conditions are the same as before replacement. Check that neither alarm is indicated in the Alarm Status.

9 The CTRL replacement finishes. Perform the resetup for the Network Config. since the Network Config. data is not restored.


PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

PASOLINK NEO

MAINTE LEDMMC Slot

MPROTECT SWCTRL

MMC

SCREWSCREW


5-45


Step Procedure

Note: If the NMS parameters (Network Config.) can not be restored, then the resetup with the PNMx is required.

The Use of the LCT for the CTRL Replacement

When the LCT is used, the replacement can be performed without the MMC. (The resetup with the PNMx for the Network Config. is necessary.)

1 Referring to Chart 2-1, set the IDU to Maintenance ON condition by LCT (Check that the MAINT LED lights.),

2 Set the PROTECT SW on the CTRL front to ON position (for upper side). Then, equipment configuration data gather up and the saving of data start,

--- Maintenance2 --- ---Control---

CPU Reset

---Download---Configuration File

Program FileEquipment Config. File

---Upload---Configuration File

Equipment Config. File---Date/Time---

Date/Time Setting---Password---

Password Setting

---PMON Clear---PMON Clear

3 Select the Maintenance2 from the Maintenance menu, select the Equipment Config. File of Upload. Enter the directory of the file name where the uploaded file will be saved (extension is .cfg),

4 When the upload to the LCT has completed, MAINT LED blinks slowly (Check that the MAINT LED blinks slowly when remove the CTRL.),


5-46


Step Procedure

5 Remove the cables connected to the CTRL, loosen two fixed screws and remove the CTRL,

Note: Be careful to avoid catching the module on the cable when extracting the module. If the module is caught on the live cables, it may cause a radio link error.

6 Prepare the spare CTRL. Set the PROTECT SW on the spare CTRL to ON position (for upper side), (The PROTECT SW setting distinguish the normal start up or protected start up.) Mount the CTRL into the IDU. Check that the MAINT LED on the IDU blinks. Tighten two screws and connect cables removed,

7 To download the equipment configuration data to the LCT, select Maintenance2 from the Maintenance menu, select the Equipment Config. File of Download. Enter the directory of the file name where the uploaded file is saved, click on the “Execute” button to start the download. When “Complete” appears in the Progress Status, click on the “Update” button to perform download.

8 When the CTRL has been provisioned, the MAINT LED on the IDU turns to light. Check that the MAINT LED lights, set the PROTECT SW to OFF position (for lower side). Then, the equipment configuration data deploys and data is restored.

9 In the Equipment Setup menu and the Provisioning menu, confirm that the equipment configuration and setting conditions are the same as before replacement. Check that neither alarm is indicated in the Alarm Status.

10 The CTRL replacement finishes. Perform the resetup for the Network Config. since the Network Config. data is not restored.


5-47


Step Procedure

Replacing the DC-DC CONV (Optional).

When the power is supplied to the SELV of the DC-DC CONV (optional) but the PWR LED of the DC-DC CONV is not lit though the power switch is on, before replacing the DC-DC CONV, check the conduction of the fuse in the DC-DC CONV.


2 Set the power switch on the MODEM to Off position,

3 Set the power switch on the DC-DC CONV to Off position,

FGFGSELV

!

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

PULL


PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

NLITE E

LCT

PWR Switch

SELV

PWR LED

−43V/OUT

G ScrewScrew

SELV

PWR PULL


− 43V

GOUTSTD

G

PWR Switch

PWR LED

ALM

ALM

OC-3 INOC-3 OUTALM


4 Disconnect cables connected to the DC-DC CONV as following order,(1) Disconnect power supply cable from SELV connector,(2) Disconnect power supply cable from −43/OUT connector,(3) Disconnect ground cable from ground terminal,(4) Disconnect ALM cable from ALM terminal,

5 Loosen two screws fixed the DC-DC CONV,

6 Extract the DC-DC CONV from the IDU shelf,

7 Check that the power switch on the spare DC-DC CONV is Off position

8 Mount the spare DC-DC CONV to the IDU shelf,

9 Tighten two screws to fix the DC-DC CONV,

10 Connect cables to the DC-DC CONV as reversed order in step 4,


5-48


Step Procedure

11 Turn on the power switch on the DC-DC CONV,

12 Check that PWR LED on the DC-DC CONV is on,


14 Check that PWR LED on the MODEM is on,

15 Check that ALM LED on the IDU is unlited,

16 Set the IDU to maintenance OFF condition by LCT.


5-49


Step Procedure

B. IDU REPLACEMENT

REMOVING

1 Turn off the power switch on the MODEM (both MODEM in 1+1 configuration),

2 Disconnect the IF cable, signal cables and the power cable, etc. as following order,(1) Disconnect XPIC CTRL cables from opposite IDU. (XPIC

configuration only.)(2) Disconnect XIF coaxial cables from opposite IDU. (XPIC

configuration only.)(3) Disconnect OC-3, LAN, Aux. signal cables from connector.(4) Disconnect power supply cable from SELV connector.(5) Disconnect IF cable from IF IN/OUT connector.(6) Disconnect ground cable from the ground terminal

Note: The adapter for IF cable connector is reused.

3 As shown in Fig. 5-9, loosen four screws and remove the IDU,

MOUNTING

4 Fix the two brackets to desired position on the IDU, if necessary (see Fig. 5-10),

5 Mount the IDU into the original position of the mounting rack and tighten the four screws,

6 Reconnect the IF cables, signal cables and the power cable to the original position as following order,(1) Connect ground cable to the ground terminal(2) Connect IF cable (with adapter) to IF IN/OUT connector.(3) Connect power supply cable to SELV connector.(4) Connect OC-3, LAN, Aux. signal cables to proper

connector.(5) Connect XIF coaxial cables to opposite IDU. (XPIC

configuration only.)(6) Connect XPIC CTRL cables to opposite IDU. (XPIC

configuration only.)


5-50


Step Procedure

7 Form the wiring, and fix the cables using cable binder to the mounting rack,

Notes: 1. Do not cross the cables on front of indicators and power switch used for maintenance.

2. Take suitable radius to wiring the IF cable. (e.g. 10D-FB: 70 cm)

8 Turn on the power switch on the IDU.

SCREW

Note: Weight 4 kg.

Hot Surface

Caution: The top surface of the IDU above MODEM is hot in operation.

Fig. 5-9 Demounting and Remounting

FRONT POSITION

CENTER POSITION

SIDE VIEW Fig. 5-10 Bracket Mounting Position


5-51

5.2.3 Fuse Replacement

When the power is supplied to the SELV but the IDU can not be powered on with the power switch, check the conduction of fuse in the MODEM.

Chart 5-5 Fuse Replacement

Step Procedure

1 Set the power switch on the MODEM which is not powered to Off position,

2 Disconnect cables connected to the MODEM as following order,(1) Disconnect power supply cable from SELV connector.(2) Disconnect IF cable from IF IN/OUT connector. The adapter

is reused.(3) Disconnect ground cable from the ground terminal.

3 Loosen two screws on the MODEM,

4 Extract the MODEM from the IDU shelf,

5 Remove protection cap over the fuse (see Fig. 5-11),

6 Remove the fuse from the fuse holder,

7 Check conduction of the broken fuse using tester,

8 Check conduction of the reserved fuse using tester,

9 Replace the broken fuse with reserved one,

10 Set the replaced fuse to the fuse holder,

11 Cap over the replaced fuse,

12 Mount the MODEM to the IDU shelf,

13 Tighten two screws on the MODEM,

14 Connect cables to the MODEM as reversed order in step 2,


16 Check that power is on.

Reserve Fuse (6.3A)21606.3 FuseRKS-F91000-0107

(Front)

Fuse Cap

(MODEM)

RESERVE


5-52

Fig. 5-11 Fuse in the MODEM


5-53

When the power is supplied to the SELV of the DC-DC CONV (optional) but the PWR LED of the DC-DC CONV is not lit though the power switch is on, check the conduction of the fuse in the DC-DC CONV.

Chart 5-6 DC-DC CONV Fuse Replacement

Step Procedure

1 Set the power switch on the DC-DC CONV which is not powered to Off position

2 Disconnect cables connected to the DC-DC CONV as following order,(1) Disconnect power supply cable from SELV connector,(2) Disconnect power supply cable from −43/OUT connector,(3) Disconnect ground cable from ground terminal,(4) Disconnect ALM cable from ALM terminal,

3 Loosen two screws on the DC-DC CONV,

4 Extract the DC-DC CONV from the unit,

5 Put the screwdriver to the groove of the fuse holder and turns the fuse holder counter clockwise,

6 Remove the fuse from the fuse holder,

7 Check conduction of the broken fuse using tester,

8 Remove the reserved fuse as described in step 5,

9 Check conduction of the reserved fuse using tester,

10 Replace the broken fuse with reserved one,

11 Set the replaced fuse to the fuse holder,

12 Put the screwdriver to the groove of the fuse holder and push it into the DC-DC CONV,

13 Turn the screwdriver clockwise until the fuse holder is locked up, (When the fuse holder is locked up, the groove of the fuse holder is set to horizontal as shown in Fig 5-12.)

14 Check and replace another fuse in the same way as from Step 5 to Step 13,

15 Mount the DC-DC CONV to the unit,


5-54


Step Procedure

16 Tighten two screws on the DC-DC CONV,

17 Connect cables to the DC-DC CONV as reversed order in step 2,

18 Turn on the power switch on the DC-DC CONV,


20 Turn on the power switch on the IDU/DC-DC CONV UNIT,


Reserve Fuse (8A)GAB250V8 FuseCBE-006255-001

(Front)Fuse Holder

RESERVE RESERVE

CAUTION

HOT SURFACEAvoid contact.

!

Reserved Fuse

SELV

PWR PULL


− 43V

GOUTSTD

G

PWR Switch

SELV

PWR LED

ALM

−43V/OUT

G

ScrewScrew

(DC-DC CONV)

Fig. 5-12 Fuse in the DC-DC CONV

ROI-S05749-05FE CONTENTSAugust, 2007

CL-1

NEC NLite E6-38 GHz SONET DIGITAL RADIO SYSTEM

Section II OPERATION

CONTENTS

TITLE PAGE

1 GENERAL ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••1-12 OPERATING EQUIPMENT •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••2-12.1 IDU Shelf ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••2-42.2 CTRL •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••2-52.3 MODEM •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-122.4 STM-1 INTFC ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-162.5 4P LAN INTFC (Optional) ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-182.6 GbE INTFC (Optional) •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-202.7 DC-DC CONV (Optional) •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-232.8 ODU ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-253 SYSTEM SETUP ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••3-13.1 Equipment Setup •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••3-13.2 Provisioning Setup •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••3-43.3 Events and Performance •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••3-73.4 Control ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-143.5 Setup Description •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-163.5.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown Control

(OPT INTFC) (SDH) ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-16

3.5.2 Automatic Protection Switching (APS) (OPT INTFC Optional APS Configuration) (SDH) ••••••• 3-18

3.5.3 Automatic Transmitter Power Control •••••••••••••••••••• 3-23

3.5.4 Loopback Control •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-27

3.5.5 Link Loss Forwarding Control (LAN) •••••••••••••••••••••• 3-27

3.5.6 MS-AIS Generation (SDH) •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-28

3.5.7 Cross Polarization Interference Canceller (XPIC Reset Control •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-30

3.5.8 Network Management (Optional) ••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-31

CONTENTS ROI-S05749

CL-22 pages

3.5.9 Functionality Classification ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-32

3.6 Protection Switching •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-333.6.1 1 + 1 Twin-path System ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-33

3.6.2 Hot-standby System ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-33

3.6.3 Switchover Control ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-34

TITLE PAGE

ROI-S05749-05FE CONTENTSAugust, 2007

CL-3

ROI-S05749 GENERAL

1-1

1. GENERAL

This section provides instructions for operation of the 6 to 38 GHz SONET microwave radio system.

This section describes interface terminals and jacks, controls, indicators, and test jacks. Use of the LCT is required for local operation, monitoring, control and setup. For details of system and provisioning setup, refer to Section IV NLite E LCT Manual.

TRP-( )G-1B0678NEC NLite E


(NWA-009034)



0678


NEC NLite E

TX HIGH/LOW




MHz TX FREQUENCY


TX HIGH/LOW

SERIAL No. DATESERIAL No. DATE

(NWA-009034)

NEC NLite E

IDU 1+1

IDU 1+0

MDP-150MB-1AA

WEIGHT: 4 kg (WITH OPTION)SER. No. DATE , INDOOR UNIT

−48 V 2.5A (WITH ODU & OPTION)NEC Corporation TOKYO JAPAN MADE IN JAPAN

(H2930)0678

MODEM(1) INTFC (1) INTFC (2)

MODEM(2) CTRL

SELV

!


PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL

PULL

PWR

PASOLINK NEO

LCT

Equipped with LAN Interface for Main LAN (SONET)

G

GALM


WS

(Blank)

M S.

G

SELV

!

AUX/ALMNMS NE

ALM

SC IN/OUT EOW

PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

NLite E NEO

LCT

OC-3 INOC-3 OUT

PULL

ALM

OC-3 INOC-3 OUT

(Blank)

ONLINEONLINE GG

G

SELV

!

AUX/ALMNMS NE

ALM

SC IN/OUT EOW

PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

NLite E NEO

LCT

OC-3 OUT OC-3 IN

PULL

SELV

!

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

PULL


G

G

G

GENERAL ROI-S05749

1-22 pages

ROI-S05749 OPERATING EQUIPMENT

2-1

2. OPERATING EQUIPMENT

The indicators, switches, interface terminals and jacks for wiring with the associated equipment are described here.

The IDU component modules listed in Table 2-1 are plugged-in from front of the IDU shelf as shown in Fig. 2-1.

The component modules of the ODU shown in Fig. 2-2 are listed in Table 2-2.

Note: Use shielded cables which are connected to the RJ-45 connectors to suppress interference from affecting the signal and to reduce electromagnetic radiation which may interfere with other signal cables.

Note:Twist power cables (+)/(−) to suppress inductive interference signals.

1

2

4, or 5 5*

6

G

1

2

6

3

SELV

!

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

PULL

SELV

!

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL PWR

PULL


PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

PASOLINK NEO

LCT


PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

PASOLINK NEO

LCT

GG

G

G

G

OPERATING EQUIPMENT ROI-S05749

2-2

Table 2-1 IDU COMPOSITION

No. UNIT/MODULE NAMEH2930 MDP-150MB-1AA

REMARKSExpandable 1 + 0 system 1 + 1 system

1 MODEM (X) (X) 32QAM/128QAM *1

2MODEM − (X) 32QAM/128QAM *1

DC-DC CONV (√) − -20 to -60/+20 to +60 VDC *2

3 LAN INTFC (√) 4-Port-LAN (for SONET) *3

4 GbE INTFC (√) GbE (for SONET)

5 OC-3 INTFC (√) OC-3 *3 for APS

6 CTRL (X)

Notes: 1. (X) always equipped.2. (√) optionally equipped.*1 selectable in setting program.*2 for expanding power supply range.

*3 for optional APS

Fig. 2-1 IDU Composition

6 - 38 GHz ODU

FGIFLMONRX LEV

NLite E

RO

I-S05749O

PERATIN

G EQ

UIPM

ENT2-3

Table 2-2 ODU COMPOSITION

MODULEName *

TRP-( )G-1B

6 GHz 7 GHz) 8 GHz 10 GHz 11 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz 26 GHz 38 GHz

NWA-009024( )

NWA-009026( )

NWA-009028( )

NWA-009030( )

NWA-009032( )

NWA- 009038( )

NWA-009040( )

NWA- 009042( )

NWA- 009048( )

1 RF CKT H2202( ) H2203( ) H2204( ) H2225( ) H2205( ) H2229( ) H2230( ) H2231( ) H2234( )

2 IF CKT —

3 PS —

Note: Component modules are enclosed in the ODU case.Fig. 2-2 ODU Composition


2-4

2.1 IDU Shelf

G

G

G G

Jack (IDU)

G Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) jack used to connect wrist strap band.

*

Caution*:Engineers for maintenance of the equipment must take the necessary steps to avoid bit errors or cause damage to the modules due to electrostatic discharge. Wear a conductive wrist strap connected to the ground jack (G) on the front of the IDU to minimize static build-up during maintenance.


2-5

2.2 CTRL


PROTECT

CALL MMC

MAINTMEMORY

IDU

PASOLINK NEO

LCT

MAINT(amber)MEMORY(amber)

IDU(red)

CALLPROTECT

SC IN/OUTAUX/ALM

NENMSLCT

MMC

EOW

The CTRL generates various control signals based upon LCT setup data and gathered operating status in the IDU and from the ODU, has SC, EOW, LAN, NE, EXT ALM, HK, Cluster ALM signals interface. By Connecting a PC, manual control, performance monitoring and system setup can be performed.

Interface Signals (CTRL)

AUX/ALM (D-Sub Female 44 pins) Input/Output Signal

EOW: 1 CH

Frequency: 0.3 to 3.4 kHz (1020 Hz (Test Tone))

Level: −6 dBm

Impedance: 600 ohms

ALM: ALM 6 outputs/6 HK Inputs/ 4 HK Control outputs, Cluster 4 Inputs/outputs

Output: Relay contact Form-C

Input: Photocoupler

Bz 1,2 IN: Signalling control extension input.

Call 1,2 OUT: Signalling control extension output.

EOW: EOW headphone jack


2-6

SC IN/OUT (D-Sub Female 44 pins) Input/Output Signal

NE2: Network Element

Level: RS-485

DSC (RS-232C): 2 CH

Bit rate: 9600 bps

Level: RS-232C

DSC (V.11): 2 CH

Bit rate: 64 Kbps

Level: V.11

Impedance: 100 ohms

NE (RJ-45): Network Element

Level: 10 Base-T

LCT (USB): Serial interface USB-B type connector with PC

NMS (RJ-45): PNMS

Level: 10 Base-T

Indicators (CTRL)

LED Indication Remarks

MAINT Maintenance mode can be selected by LCT, PNMT and PNMS “The maintenance Mode “ON” is selected”.

Actively blinks: In progress of program data download.Inactively blinks:Protect Mode for CTRL replacement

in effect.

MEMORY Memory Card (MMC) status. ON: Enable access to Memory CardOFF: Disable access to Memory CardBlinks: Accessing Memory Card

IDU IDU Summary alarm. Check ALM LEDs on each module to find the cause and/or connect LCT to check the performance condition.

Blinks: CPU or peripheral event occurred.

Interface Signals (CTRL)

Switch (CTRL)

Switch Operating Remarks

CALL Transmits EOW calling signal to sound the buzzer in the opposite station.

PROTECT Prevent service interruption when the CTRL module is replaced.

Accessing the Memory Card (MMC) is required to apply the function.


2-7

User Interface Pin Assignment (CTRL)

Terminal Description

CTRL

ALM/AUX IN/OUT(D-sub Female, 44 Pins)

Service channel data input/output

Pins 1 (+) and 16 (–) EOW input 1

Pins 2 (+) and 17 (–) EOW output 1

Pins 3 (+) and 18 (–) EOW input 2

Pins 4 (+) and 19 (–) EOW output 2

Pin 5 Ground

Pins 25 (COM), 40 (NC) and 11 (NO) ⎯ RL1*1

Maintenance alarm outputBetween Between

Pins 25 and 40 Pins 25 and 11Normal state : Closed OpenAlarm state : Open Closed

Pins 24 (COM), 39 (NC) and 10 (NO) ⎯ RL2*1

IDU CPU/PS1/PS2 alarm outputBetween Between


Pins 23 (COM), 38 (NC) and 9 (NO) ⎯ RL3

ODU1/ODU2 alarm output*2Between Between

Pins 23 and 38 Pins 23 and 9Normal state : Closed OpenAlarm/Event state : Open Closed


2-8


ODU CPU1/ODU CPU2/Cable Open alarm output*2Between Between



IDU total alarm output*2Between Between



High BER1/High BER2 alarm output*2Between Between


Pins 15 (+) and 14 (−) HK1 alarm input*3Normal state : OpenControl/Event state : Closed

Pins 13 (+) and 12 (−) HK2 alarm input*3 Normal state : Open

Control/Event state : Closed

Pins 29 (+) and 28 (−) HK3/Cluster4 alarm input*3Normal state : OpenControl/Event state : Closed

Pins 27 (+) and 26 (−) HK4/Cluster3 alarm input*3 Normal state : Open


Pins 44 (+) and 43 (−) HK5/Cluster2 alarm input*3Normal state : OpenControl/Event state : Closed

Pins 42 (+) and 41 (−) HK6/Cluster1 alarm input*3 Normal state : Open


Pin 30 Buzzer input 1

Pin 31 Call output 1

Pin 32 Buzzer input 2

Pin 33 Call output 2




2-9

CTRL

SC IN/OUT(D-sub Female, 44 Pins)

NE2/DSC Service channel data input/output

Pins 1 (+) and 2 (–) NE2 TXD

Pin 3 Ground

Pins 4 (+) and 5 (–) V.11-1 TX data input

Pins 6 (+) and 7 (–) V.11-1 RX data output

Pins 8 (+) and 9 (–) V.11-2 TX data input

Pins 10 (+) and 11 (–) V.11-2 RX data output

Pins 12 and 13 (G) RS-232C-1 data input

Pins 14 and 15 (G) RS-232C-2 data input

Pin 16 NE2 RXD TERM

Pins 17, 18 Ground

Pins 19 (+) and 20 (–) V.11-1 TX clock input (co-dir.) or output (contra-dir.) *4

Pins 21 (+) and 22 (–) V.11-1 RX clock output

Pins 23 (+) and 24 (–) V.11-2 TX clock input (co-dir.) or output (contra-dir.) 4*

Pins 25 (+) and 26 (–) V.11-2 RX clock output

Pins 27, 28, 29 Ground

Pins 30 (+) and 31 (–) NE2 RXD

Pin 32 Ground

Pins 33 (+) and 34 (–) V.11-1 TX frame pulse input (co-dir.) or output (contra-dir.) *4

Pins 35 (+) and 36 (–) V.11-1 RX frame pulse output

Pins 37 (+) and 38 (–) V.11-2 TX frame pulse input (co-dir.) or output (contra-dir.) *4

Pins 39 (+) and 40 (–) V.11-2 RX frame pulse output

Pins 41 and 42 (G) RS-232C-1 data output

Pins 43 and 44 (G) RS-232C-2 data output




2-10

Notes: *1: RL1 (Maintenance) and RL2 (IDU CPU/PS1/PS2 ALM OUTUT) are fixed and can not be changed to other items. The relay contact is rated at 0.2 A.

*2: These alarm items are assigned at the factory (default setting) and can be changed by the LCT as shown in Table 2-3 in Section 1 (Alarms may be selectively assigned to RL3 to RL6).

*3: Photocoupler interface; resistance of open input terminal is more than 200 kilo ohms. Closed input terminal is less than 50 ohms.

*4: V11 interface for the TX clock and frame pulse input/output depend on co-/contra-directional mode setting in the LCT provisioning menu.

LCT(USB connector type B)

Local craft terminal (LCT) data input/output

Pin 1 Vbus

Pins 2 (–) and 3 (+) D

Pin 4 Ground

NMS (RJ-45) PNMS data (10Base-T) input/output

Pins 1 (+) and 2 (–) NMS TXD

Pins 3 (+) and 6 (–) NMS RXD

Pins 4, 5, 7 and 8 Not Connected

NE (RJ-45) NE data (10Base-T) input/output

Pins 1 (+) and 2 (–) NMS TXD

Pins 3 (+) and 6 (–) NMS RXD

Pins 4, 5, 7 and 8 Not Connected



EOW 4W R

IDU Dir. AALM/AUX IN/OUT(D-Sub, 44 Pins)

EOW Connection

When EOW signal is connected between two IDUs, perform wiring as follows.

1

16

234

171819

30313233

IDU Dir. CALM/AUX IN/OUT(D-Sub, 44 Pins)

IDU Dir. BALM/AUX IN/OUT(D-Sub, 44 Pins)

Back -to- Back Station BTerminal Station A

1

16

234

171819

30313233

1

16

234

171819

30313233

EOW 4W S

Buzzer INCall OUT

EOW Extension

EOW 4W S

EOW 4W R

Buzzer INCall OUT


2-11


2-12

2.3 MODEM

SELV

!

XIF IN XIF OUT

IF IN/OUTTXRX

RESETXPIC CTRLXPIC

PWRODUMD/CBL

PULL

PWR

SELV

PWR

PWR(green)ODU(red)MD/CBL(red)

TX (green)RX (green)

XPIC RESET(amber)

XPIC CTRLXIF OUT

XIF IN

IF IN/OUTG

Caution: Do not apply to the equipment a voltage that varies sharply. The equipment operation may be impaired.

Caution: Do not remove/connect the IF cable with the IDU power ON, Turn the IDU power OFF before connecting/disconnecting the IF cable, or equipment may cause damaged.

Caution: Do not insert/extract the MODEM with the power ON, turn the IDU power OFF and remove all cables connected to the MODEM before insert/extract the MODEM, or MODEM may be damaged.

Caution: The top surface of the IDU shelf above MODEM is hot in operation.

The MODEM provides the 32QAM/128QAM Modulation/Demodulation for, 10/100Base T(x)/1000 Base T (LAN) or OC-3 (SONET) data transmission and following main functions.

- Forward Error Correction using RS/Interleave

- BER (High BER/Low BER) detection/indication/release for internal and external

- Reducing ODU output signal distortion using BB Linearizer

- Equalization using Transversal Equalizer

- XPIC ODU synthesizer synchronization control

- Interfered signal from opposite polarization cancellation (XPIC)

- IDU/ODU power supply

- System power on/off


2-13

Interface Signals (MODEM)

IF IN/OUT (TNC Female)

TX Frequency: 340 MHz

RX Frequency: 140 MHz

Power supply: −48 V

Impedance: 50 ohms

Connecting IF Cable length:5D-FB: less than 150 m 8D-FB: less than 300 m 10D-FB: less than 350 m

G (Screw): Ground terminal

(5 mm square cable (more than 2.5 mm diameter cable) (AWG#10) is recommended to apply for the frame ground. The proper press fix terminal tool shall be used.)

SELV (Molex M5569-04A1, 4 pins) (DC IN)

Input Voltage: −48 V DC (negative), + (positive, ground)

XIF IN/XIF OUT(Receptacle IEC 169-13 (1.0/2.3))

Only used for XPIC system between two IDUs

XIF IN: IF signal of opposite polarization input. (connect to XIF OUT of the other MODEM)

XIF OUT: IF signal for opposite polarization output. (connect to XIF IN of the other MODEM)

Frequency: 140 MHz

Impedance: 75 ohms

XPIC CTRL (D-Sub 15 pins, Serial Port)

Only used for XPIC system between two IDUs (connect to XPIC CTRL of the other MODEM)

Automatic/Remote XPIC reset control signal interface between mutual MODEM.

Indicators (MODEM)


PWR The PWR switch of the MODEM is turned on.

DC power is supplied to the ODU also.

ODU

Transmit RF power of the ODU decreased approx. −3 dB from preadjusted ATPC minimum (MIN) level in provisioning.

Check Metering using LCT for local and/or opposite site in Maintenance menu

Receiver input level of the ODU falls below squelch level.

APC loop of local oscillator in ODU is unlocked.

IF signal from the MODEM to ODU is lost.

Blinks when IF cable is open circuit.

Connected ODU is not matched with inventory.

MD/CBL Blinks when IF cable is short circuit.

TX (only 1+1) Selected status of ODU TX When TX mute control: LED Off

RX (only 1+1) Selected status of MODEM RX output signal When RX SWO switched to opposite: LED Off

XPIC RESET XPIC function is OFF condition Only XPIC configuration.Propagation condition deteriorated or XPIC is reset from LCT control.

Switches (MODEM)


PWR IDU and ODU power On/Off switch. Refer to Start-up and Shut-down the Equipment in Maintenance Section


2-14

User Interface Pin Assignment (MODEM)


SELV

SELV (DC IN)(Molex M5569-04A1 Connector, 4 Pins)

−48 V DC power inputNote: Only −48 V (−40.5 to −57 V) is available.

Pins 1 and 3 Ground

Pins 2 and 4 −48 V

IF IN/OUT

TNC Jack (Female) * IF signal IN/OUT and PS OUT to the ODU

XPIC CTRL

(D-Sub Female, 15 pins) Used for interconnection between IDUs in XPIC configuration.

Pins 1 (+) and 6 (–) XPIC SV TXD

Pins 2 (+) and 7 (–) XPIC SV RXD

Pin 3 Ground

Pins 4 (+) and 9 (–) XPIC SEL IN

Pins 5 (+) and 10 (–) XPIC SEL OUT

Pins 8 (+) and 12 (–) XPIC RESET IN

Pin 11 Ground

Pins 13 (–) and 14 (+) XPIC RESET OUT

Pin 15 Ground


2-15

Note: * It is recommended that TNC (Male) L-angle connector for the 8D-FB IF cable is used to connect it to the IDU. When the N (Male) straight connector is attached to the 5D-FB or 10D-FB IF cable, use of the TNC (Male) - N (Female) (NJ-TNCP-LA) L-angle adapter is needed.


2-16

2.4 OC-3 OPTICAL INTFC

ALM

STM-1 INSTM-1 OUT

ALM (red)ONLINE(green)

STM-1 INSTM-1 OUT

ONLINE

STM-1 (OPT) INTFC

Caution: Do not insert/extract the OC-3 INTFC with the power ON. Turn OFF the PWR switch on the MODEM and remove all cables connected to the OC-3 INTFC before inserting/extracting theOC-3 INTFC, or that INTFC may be damaged.

The OC-3 INTFC provides an optical signal interface only. The module performs the following functions:

- Coded Mark Inversion (CMI) to Non Return to Zero (NRZ) conversion

- Optical to Electrical conversion

- RSOH termination

- Stuffing control

- Hitless switching (for 1+1 configuration)

- Performance monitoring (conforms to G.826/G.828)

- Automatic Laser Shut Down (ALS)

- Near End/Far End loopback

Interface Signals (OC-3 INTFC)

OC-3 IN/OUT LC

Optical OC-3 Input/Output, G.957

Optical

Type: G.957

Bit Rate: 155.520 Mbps

Level: L-1.1: 0 to −8 dBm (TX)/−10 to −34 dBm (RX)S-1.1: −8 to −15 dBm (TX)/−8 to −28 dBm (RX)

Code: NRZ

Wavelength: 1310 nm

Indicators (OC-3 INTFC)


ALM

LOSS of OC-3 from MUX is detected. Check MUX and wiring.

Frame synchronization of input OC-3 signal from MUX is lost.

Check MUX and wiring.

BER (E-BER, DMR or MUX) is worse than preset value (10-3 to 10-5, selectable). Check RSL, Interference and TX

power at opposite site when BER ALM occurs.BER (SD, DMR or MUX) is worse than preset

value (10-5 to 10-9, selectable).

Frame synchronization of input OC-3 signal from radio is lost.

Check OC-3 transmission at the opposite site, ODU or MODEM in local.

Mounting module is not matched with inventory.

Change LCT setting or other ( )INTFC module.

ONLINE Online status of Working/Standby in APS: ON Offline status of Working/Standby in APS: OFF Online status of Working w/o APS: ON


2-17


2-18

2.5 4P LAN INTFC

4P LAN

4P LAN INTFC

PORT1PORT2

100M PORT 3 PORT4 100M

ALM

100M PORT 1 PORT 2 100M

PORT3PORT4

ALM LED(red)

The 4P LAN INTFC (optional) is installed into the Main-INTFC slot (Slot1) in the system configuration and it provides 4 Port LAN Fast Ethernet interfaces. The LAN interface is used 4 Port shared (P1-P4) mode, 2 Port (P1-P2/P3-P4) shared mode or separated (P1/P2/P3/P4) mode.

Separated P1-P4 SharedP1-P2 Shared P3-P4 Shared

Dis

able

dEn

able

dSw

itchi

ng P1 P2 P3 P4

(1) (2) (3)

(4) (5)

Dir-A

P1 P2 P3 P4

Dir-A

Dir-A Dir-A

P1 P2 P3 P4

P1 P2 P3 P4P1 P2 P3 P4

Dir-A

User Interface Signals (4P LAN INTFC)

LAN PORT1 to PORT4 (RJ-45)

LAN interface Port 1, Port 2, Port 3 and Port 4.Selectable 2 Mbps to 100 Mbps CH is assigned for LAN.

Input/Output Signal: 10/100Base-T(x) Auto-sensing or fixedFlow control: Full duplex or Half duplexForwarding mode: Store-and-Forwarding


2-19

Indicators (4P LAN INTFC)


100M LAN signal is in 100BASE-TX mode.

LINK LAN and associated equipment are linked and flashing under the exchanging the packet.

COLLISION/DUPLEX

Input/Output LAN signal is in Full Duplex mode. Flashing when a collision condition occurs.

ALM

The module is extracted. Mount the module.



LAN link failure occurs. Check LAN cable connection.

Module failure occurs. Replace the module with a spare.


2-20

2.6 GbE INTFC

ALM

OUT

1000BASE-SX

PORTIN

1000BASE-SX 1000BASE-TINDICATOR

The GbE INTFC (optional) provides 1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-T interface. The GbE INTFC is installed into the Main-INTFC slot (Slot1)instead of the OC-3 INTFC in the SONET (128 QAM) system configuration. The signal is connected either SFP (for 1000BASE-SX) or RJ-45 (for 1000MASE-T).These bytes (E1/F1/DCCr) are available between radio links. The RMON for LINE side is available but DMR side is unavailable. The maximum passed packet size is 9600 bytes.

The GbE INTFC ia applicable together with the LAN INTFC.

User Interface Signals (GbE INTFC)

1000BASE-SX: Gigabit Ether signal, Optical Interface1000BASE-SX IN:1000BASE-SX OUT: (SFP Optical Interface Connector)

Ether signal Input Ether signal Output

Speed & Duplex: 1000 Mbits Full Duplex/Auto Negotiation fixedFlow control: Flow control ON or OFF selectableLink Loss Forwarding:

Disabled/Enabled selectable

1000BASE-T: Gigabit Ether signal, Electrical Interface1000BASE-T Port: (RJ-45 Interface Connector)

Ether signal Input/Output

Speed & Duplex: 1000 Mbits Full Duplex/Auto Negotiation fixedFlow control: Flow control ON or OFF selectableLink Loss Forwarding:

Disabled/Enabled selectable

User Interface Pin Assignment (GbE INTFC)


1000BASE-SX(SFP Fiber connector)

Multimode Fiber/LC Connector

IN (Right side) 1000BASE-SX Input

OUT (Left side) 1000BASE-SX Output

1000BASE-T(RJ-45, 8 pins)

1000BASE-T Input/Output (MDI/MDI-X)

Pin 1 DATA-A+/ DATA-B+

Pin 2 DATA-A−/ DATA-B−

Pin 3 DATA-B+/ DATA-A+

Pin 4 DATA-C+/ DATA-D+

Pin 5 DATA-C−/ DATA-D−

Pin 6 DATA-B−/ DATA-A+

Pin 7 DATA-D+/ DATA-C+

Pin 8 DATA-D−/ DATA-C−

Note: Cable connector: CAT5e/RJ-45


2-21

Indicators (GbE INTFC)


Indicator Indicates which Port is applied to the signal interface.

When the indicator is flashing slowly, the input signal is off in the corresponding interface port which is set to be used.

When the indicator is flashing fast, the input/output signal is on in the corresponding interface port which is set to be used.

When the indicator is lit steady, the signal is linked in the corresponding interface port which is set to be used.

When the indicator is unlit, the corresponding interface which port is set to no use.

ALM

The module is extracted. Mount the module.



Module failure occurs. Replace the module with a spare.

LOS from DMR is detected.

Check IDU/ODU and radio link.LOF from DMR is detected.

Excessive-BER alarm condition from DMR occurs.

SD from DMR is detected.

GbE output signal for fiber cable is interrupted.

Replace the module with a spare. (SFP mode only)

LAN link failure occurs. Check LAN cable connection.


2-22


2-23

2.7 DC-DC CONV

SELV

PWR PULL


− 43V

GOUTSTD

+

PWR LED(green)FUSE (250V/8AH)

DC-DC CONV

Caution: Do not apply to the equipment a voltage that varies sharply. The equipment operation may be impaired.

Caution: Do not remove/connect the power supply cable with the PWR switch ON, Turn the PWR switch OFF before connecting/disconnecting the power supply cable IN or OUT, if not, module may be damaged.

PWR SELV

ALM − 43V OUTG

Note: If the PWR LED is not lit though the PWR switch has set to ON, set the PWR switch to OFF, remove two fuses from the module and check the conduction of them.

The DC-DC CONV (optional) converts 20 to 60 V or −20 to −60 V DC input to −43 V stable DC voltage. The module applies when the Nlite E +ODU is connected to the IDU.

Interface Signals (DC-DC CONV)

SELV

(Molex M5569-04A1, 4 pins) (DC IN)

Input Voltage: −20 to −60 V/+20 to +60 V DC

−43V OUT(Molex M5569-02A1, 2 pins) (DC OUT)

Output: −43 V/1.6A

G (Screw): Ground terminal

(5 mm square cable (more than 2.5 mm diameter cable) (AWG#10) is recommended to apply for the frame ground. The proper press fix terminal tool shall be used.)

ALM: Power supply ALM signal output

Indicators (DC-DC CONV)


PWR The PWR switch of the DC-DC CONV is turned on.

Switches (DC-DC CONV)


PWR IDU and ODU power on/off switch. Refer to Start-up and Shut-down the Equipment in Maintenance Section

User Interface Pin Assignment (DC-DC CONV)


SELV

SELV (DC IN)(Molex M5569-04A1 Connector, 4 Pins)

−20 to −60/20 to 60 V DC power input

Pins 1 and 3 0 V /(or +20 to +60 V)

Pins 2 and 4 −20 to −60 V/(or 0 V)

−43V OUT

(Molex M5569-02A1, 2 pins) (DC OUT)

−43 V DC power output (connects to the SELV connector of the MODEM module using accessory cable)

Pin 1 Ground

Pin 2 −43 V

ALM Power supply ALM signal output

(D-Sub Female, 9 pins)

Pins 6 (COM), 1 (NC) and 2 (NO)

PS and input voltage alarm outputBetween Between


Pin 9 Ground

Pins3,4,5,7,8 No connected


2-24


2-25

2.8 ODU

FGIFLMONRX LEV

IFL (IF IN/ OUT)RX LEV MON

FG (Frame Ground) Antenna Direct Mounting Type

RF IN/OUT

(REAR VIEW)

RF IN/OUT

(REAR VIEW)

(FRONT VIEW)

Coaxial Cable Type (6/7/8 GHz)(REAR VIEW)

RF IN/OUT

WG Type (6/7/8 GHz)

NLite E

The ODU receives 340 MHz IF signal from the IDU and converts it to an RF signal using a local signal generated by a synthesized local oscillator. This RF signal is then sent to the antenna through the BPF which limits the RF transmit signal dispersion. The TX output level is controlled to the specified from the IDU corresponded to the QPSK 32QAM or 128QAM modulation.

The RF signal received from the antenna is amplified to the required level. Afterward the signal is converted into the 140 MHz IF signal by mixing with a local signal generated by a synthesized local oscillator. Then the 140 MHz IF signal is sent to the IDU through the IF cable.


2-26

Interface Signals (ODU)

IFL (N Female)

TX Frequency 340 MHz

RX Frequency: 140 MHz

Power supply: −48 V

Impedance: 50 ohms

Connecting IF Cable length:5D-FB: less than 150 m 8D-FB: less than 300 m 10D-FB: less than 350 m

FG (Screw) Frame ground, connecting near by ground point.

RF IN/OUT RF signal interface.- N female connector for the 6/7/8 GHz ODU with coaxial

cable connection.- NEC proprietary flange for the 10 to 38 GHz ODU with

antenna mounting (direct/OMT/HYB COMB/TX ATT).- Waveguide connection flange;

6 GHz: PDR70 7/8 GHz: PDR84 10/11 GHz: PDR100 18/23 GHz: PBR220 38 GHz: PBR320

Monitoring Terminal (ODU)

Terminal Operating Remarks

RX LEV MON: Monitoring RX LEV in AGC voltage using the digital voltmeter or PASOLINK MONITOR unit * for antenna orientation.

Use LCT to check the RX LEV in Maintenance.

Note*:In order to measure exact performance of AGC V at the RX LEV MON, it is mandatory required to set Antenna Alignment Mode to ON as the AGC voltage indication is not guaranteed outside Antenna Alignment Mode.It is necessary to set to Antenna Alignment Mode every time monitor the RX level with the NLite E MONITOR unit.

ROI-S05749 SYSTEM SETUP

3-1

3. SYSTEM SETUP

This section provides system setup to make up proper system configuration. The setup is performed accessing to the LCT program using the PC. For the detail procedure, refer to Section IV Appendix LCT Operation Manual.

3.1 Equipment Setup

The equipment setup menu decides system fundamental configuration.

Note: For the details of setup item of the LAN PORT USAGE, refer to the LAN INTERFACE (10/100BASE T(X)) Application and Setting in Section IV.

SYSTEM SETUP ROI-S05749

3-2

Equipment Setup for SONET

User Interface OC-3 GbE over OC-32Port LAN over OC-3

Redundancy Setting 1+0(TERM)1+1(Hot Standby TERM)1+1(Twinpath TERM)

INTFC Main (WORK) OC-3(Optical)OC-3(Electrical) GbE over OC-3 When the “SONET GbE over OC-3” is

selected for User Interface.2Port LAN over OC-3

INTFC SUB (PROT) Not UsedOC-3 (Optical)WSWS/LAN

XPIC Usage Not UsedUsed (Main Master)Used (SUB Master)

APS Function UnavailableAvailable

Modulation Scheme 128QAM (fixed)Transmission Capacity 156MB (fixed)

TX RF Frequency(No.1) [MHz] TX RF Frequency(No.2) [MHz] RX RF Frequency(No.1) [MHz] RX RF Frequency(No.2) [MHz] Frame ID(No.1) (Up to #32)Frame ID(No.2) (Up to #32)TX Power Control MTPC

ATPCLAN Port Usage (Main) USED (fixed when GbE INTFC is applied.)LAN Capacity(Main) 150Mbps (fixed when GbE INTFC is applied.)LAN Port Usage (Main) P1=75MB/P2=75MB (selectable when LAN INTFC is applied.)

P1=100MB/P2=50MBBest EffortP1=100MB/P2=Not Used

LAN Capacity(Main) 150Mbps (fixed when LAN INTFC is applied.)LAN Port Usage (SUB) P1-2 Shared/1Port Only(WS)

P1-2 Shared/1Port Only(SC)LAN Capacity(SUB) 64kbps

128kbps192kbps256kbps2Mbps


3-3

---ODU FREQ INF---TX Start Frequency(No.1) [MHz]TX Stop Frequency(No.1) [MHz]Frequency Step(No.1) [MHz]Shift Frequency(No.1) [MHz]Upper/Lower(No.1)Sub Band(No.1)TX Start Frequency(No.2) [MHz]TX Stop Frequency(No.2) [MHz]Frequency Step(No.2) [MHz]Shift Frequency(No.2) [MHz]Upper/Lower(No.2)Sub Band(No.2)

Equipment Setup for SONET


3-4

3.2 Provisioning Setup

The provisioning setup menu determines system fundamental functions.

SONET Provisioning Setup

Provisioning

BER Threshold Setting High BER Threshold Low BER/E BER(DMR) SD(DMR) E BER(MUX) SD(MUX)

BER Threshold Setting High BER Threshold 1E-3 1E-4 1E-5Low BER Threshold 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 1E-9E-BER (DMR) 1E-3 1E-4 1E-5SD (DMR) 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 1E-9E-BER (MUX) 1E-3 1E-4 1E-5SD (MUX) 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 1E-9

SC Assignment RS-232C-1/2 V11-1/2 V-11-1/2 Direction Setting

Not Used SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4 E1 (MUX)F1(MUX)E1(DMR)F1(DMR)

Not Used SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4 E1 (MUX) F1(MUX) DCCr(MUX) E1 (DMR) F1(DMR) DCCR(DMR) F1(DMR)

Co-directional Contra-directionalLAN Port Setting (For GbE INTFC)

LAN Port SettingSwitching Function Disable EnablePortMedia Type SFP RJ-45Speed & Duplex AUTONEG (1000MB Full Duplex).)Flow Control Off OnLink Loss Forwarding Disabled Enabled


3-5

LAN Port Setting (For LAN INTFC)

INTFC (Main) SettingSwitching FunctionClock Souce Setting Internal Clock DMR Internal -> ClockPort1Port Usage Not Used UsedSpeed & Duplex AUTONEG (Auto-MDI/MDX)

10M-Half (MDI)10M-Full (MDI)100M-Half (MDI)100M-Full (MDI)10M-Half (MDIX)10M-Full (MDIX)100M-Half (MDIX)100M-Full (MDIX)

Flow Control Off OnCollision Report Not Report ReportPort2Port Usage Not Used UsedSpeed & Duplex AUTONEG (Auto-MDI/MDX)


Flow Control Off OnCollision Report Not Report ReportLink Loss Forwarding Disabled Enabled

LAN Port Setting (For LAN INTFC)

INTFC (SUB) SettingSwitching Function Disabled EnabledPort1Port Usage Not Used UsedSpeed & Duplex AUTONEG (Auto-MDI/MDX)


Flow Control Off OnCollision Report Not Report ReportLink Loss Forwarding Disabled Enabled

Port2(Items for Port 2 are same as the Port1)


3-6

OC-3 Setting MS-AIS Generation Disabled EnabledALS ALS Function Disabled Enabled

ALS Interval 60sec 180sec 300secTX Power Control ATPC Threshold Level(No.1/2) [dBm]

Additional ATT(No.1/2 [dB] ATPC Range(MAX)(No.1/2) [dB] ATPC Range(MIN)(No.1/2) [dB] ATPC Power Mode(No.1/2) HOLD Max MINMTPC TX Power (No.1/2) [dBm] ATPC Threshold Level(No.1/2) [dBm] Additional ATT(No.1/2) [dB]

Condition for TX/RX SW TX SW Priority RX SW Priority RX SW Maintenance Mode RX SW Condition-Early Warning

Non-Priority Priority No.1 Non-Priority Priority No.1 Manual Forced Included EW Excluded EW

Condition for APS APS Maintenance ModeAPS Condition-SF(PROT) APS Condition-Signal Degrade-SD(B1) Lock in UsageLock in Count [times] Lock in Detect Time [min] Lock in Hold Time [hours]

Manual Forced Priority High Priority Low Included SD Excluded SD Not Used Used

Relay Setting ALM output for RL1 to RL6 HK output for RL3 to RL6 Cluster1 to Cluster4 inputCluster1 to Cluster4 output

Out HK Disabled Enabled Out

TCN Threshold(15min) DMR/ OCR/RCVR MUX OCR/RCVR

OFS UAS ES SES BBE SEP

TCN Threshold(1day) DMR/ OCR/RCVR MUX OCR/RCVR

OFS UAS ES SES BBE SEP

PMON Select RX Level TCN Threshold [dBm] SES Activation Condition

30[%] 15[%]

Others EOW2 External SettingAlarm Correlation Capacity

Normal Invert Off On


3-7

3.3 Events and Performance

The alarm and status condition are based upon equipment setup and provisioning setup, therefore indication items vary depending on the those setup.

The summarized event and performance monitoring that are displayed on the LCT PC are listed in the following table. For the detailed items, refer to Section IV Appendix LCT OPERATION MANUAL.


3-8

Event List SONETAlarm Status

ODUODUTX PowerTX InputRX Level APC ODU CPU Mute StatusLO REF : only XPIC configurationTX SW Status : only 1+1 configurationRX SW Status : only 1+1 configuration

MODEMMODEM MODEM Unequipped LOF Route ID High BER Low BER Early Warning MOD DEMInput VoltagePower SupplyIF Cable Short Linearizer Status Linearizer Fail Cable EQL XIF XCTRL : only XPIC configurationXPIC Status XREF ATPC Power Mode

CTRLCTRL ModuleMMC MountAPS SW Fail : only APS configurationAPS Online Status : only APS configurationAPS Lock in Status : only APS configurationXCTRL : only XPIC configurationXCTRL Mode Mismatch : only XPIC configuration

UAEOC-3(1)/UAE(MUX) OC-3(1)/UAE(DMR)


3-9

INTFC (Main)UnequippedType MismatchOC-3(1) LOS (MUX) OC-3(1) LOS (DMR) OC-3(1) LOF (MUX) OC-3(1) LOF (DMR) OC-3(1) Output ControlOC-3(1) E-BER (MUX) OC-3(1) E-BER (DMR) OC-3(1) SD (MUX) OC-3(1) SD (DMR) OC-3(1) In-PhaseOC-3(1) TF

INTFC (Main)UnequippedType MismatchModule LAN LinkLink Loss ForwardingSpeed & Duplex GbE INTFCLOS (DMR)LOF (DMR)E-BER (DMR)SD DMRInphaseTF

Event List SONET


3-10

INTFC (Sub)INTFC(2) UnequippedOC-3(2) LOS (MUX)OC-3(2) E-BER (MUX)OC-3(2) E-BER (DMR) OPT INTFC applies APSOC-3(2) SD (MUX)OC-3(2) SD (DMR)OC-3(2) Output ControlOC-3(2) In-PhaseOC-3(2) LOS (DMR)OC-3(2) LOF (MUX)OC-3(2) LOF (DMR)OC-3(2) TFUnequippedType MismatchModuleLAN Link *1LAN Collision *1 When LAN PortLink Loss Forwarding *1Speed & Duplex *1

TCN-RX LEVTCN-RX LEV-15minTCN-RX LEV-1day

Event List SONET


3-11

15min 1 dayTCN-OFS-15min Total TCN-UAS-15min Total TCN-ES-15min Total TCN-SES-15min Total TCN-BBE-15min Total TCN-SEP-15min Total TCN-OFS-15min(MUX) TCN-UAS-15min(MUX) TCN-ES-15min(MUX) TCN-SES-15min(MUX) TCN-BBE-15min(MUX) TCN-SEP-15min(MUX) TCN-OFS-15min(MUX)(P) TCN-UAS-15min(MUX)(P) TCN-ES-15min(MUX)(P) only APS configurationTCN-SES-15min(MUX)(P) TCN-BBE-15min(MUX)(P) TCN-SEP-15min(MUX)(P) TCN-OFS-1day Total TCN-UAS-1day Total TCN-ES-1day Total TCN-SES-1day Total TCN-BBE-1day Total TCN-SEP-1day Total TCN-OFS-1day(MUX) TCN-UAS-1day(MUX) TCN-ES-1day(MUX) TCN-SES-1day(MUX) TCN-BBE-1day(MUX) TCN-SEP-1day(MUX) TCN-OFS-1day(MUX)(P) TCN-UAS-1day(MUX)(P) TCN-ES-1day(MUX)(P) TCN-SES-1day(MUX)(P) only APS configurationTCN-BBE-1day(MUX)(P) TCN-SEP-1day(MUX)(P)

Event List SONET


3-12

PMON(History)RX Level

RX Level(15min)RX Level(1day)

DMR (W) (1day)StatusOFSSEPBBEESSESUAS

DMR (W) (15min)StatusOFSSEPBBEESSESUAS

MUX (W) (day)StatusOFSSEPBBEESSESUAS

MUX (W) (15min)StatusOFSSEPBBEESSES

RMON(Line)(15min) only for LANStatusRX UNICASTRX BROADCASTRX MULTICASTRX PAUSERX CEC ERRRX ALIGNMENT ERRRX SYMBOL ERRRX UNDERSIZERX FRAGMENTSRX Pkts 64RX Pkts 65 to 127RX Pkts 128 to 255RX Pkts 256 to 511

Event List SONET


3-13

Notes : *1 When the LAN/WS INTFC is provided, status of each LAN PORT is displayed as follows.

Notes:For the GbE INTFC, there are distinctions for the following functions from the 10BASE-T/100BASE-Tx






7. The RX Alignments Error is counted as an RX CRC ERR.

RX Pkts 512 to 1023RX Pkts 1024 to 1536TX JABBERSTX UNICASTTX BROADCASTTX MULTICASTTX PAUSETX COLLISION

Event List SONET

Status of LAN PORTLink Collision LLF Speed & Duplex

Sub PORT1 Link Normal Normal 100M-Full (MDIX)Sub PORT1 Link Normal Normal 100M-Full (MDIX)



3-14

3.4 Control

The control condition is based upon equipment setup and provisioning setup, therefore control items vary depending on the those setup.

The control items that are displayed on the LCT PC are listed in the following table. the control operation can be performed in Maintenance “ON”.


3-15

Note *1: only for 1+1 Configuration.

Control List (SONET)Control

MaintenanceTX SW Manual Control *1RX SW Manual Control *1RX SWMaintenance ModeATPC Manual Control(No.1) ATPC Manual Control(No.2) *1TX Mute Control(No.1) TX Mute Control(No.2) *1CW Control(No.1) CW Control(No.2) *1APS Manual Control (Auto/Working/Protection) : Only APS configurationAPS Maintenance Mode : Only APS configurationIF Loopback(No.1)IF Loopback(No.2) *1Main Loopback (Near End) Main Loopback (Near End) INTFC (1) : Only APS configurationMain Loopback (Near End) INTFC (2) : Only APS configurationMain Loopback (Far End)Linearizer Control(No.1) Linearizer Control(No.2) *1ALS Restart : Only Optical INTFCXPIC Control Local(No.1) : Only XPIC configurationXPIC Control Local(No.2) : Only XPIC configurationXPIC Control Remote(No.1) : Only XPIC configurationXPIC Control Remote(No.2) : Only XPIC configuration

Offline MaintenanceDADE Adjust RF SUB Band Select(No.1) RF SUB Band Select(No.2) *1RF Shift Frequency Setting(No.1) RF Shift Frequency Setting(No.2) *1Antenna Alignment Mode(No.1) Antenna Alignment Mode(No.2) *1


3-16

3.5 Setup Description

The following describes to select suitable functions for the system operation by the provisioning setup.

3.5.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown Control (OPT INTFC) (SONET)

The OC-3 INTFC (only for OPT) is provided with the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) function that can be enabled or disabled. If the ALS function is enabled, the laser output is periodically turned ON and OFF when the optical cable carrying the OC-3 signal is disconnected inadvertently, or intentionally during maintenance. When the ALS function is disabled, the laser output is always ON even if the optical cable is disconnected. Fig. 3-1 shows a block diagram of the ALS function.

If a fault occurs at point A and the absence of the optical input signal in the RX 2 lasts for 550 ±50 msec (OC-3 LOS alarm condition), the optical signal bound for the RX 1 (MUX equipment) from the TX 2 (OPT INTFC module) is interrupted by a control signal generated inside the OPT INTFC module. The MUX equipment detects the loss of signal at RX1 and the ALS function in the MUX will, subsequently, turn off the laser output of TX1. When the fault at point A is cleared the system can be restored by controlling the laser output of TX2 through one of the following modes:

• Automatic control

• Manual restart (2 sec.) control

• Manual restart (90 sec.) control

(a) Automatic ControlWhen 60, 180 or 300 sec.(selectable) have elapsed after the optical signal entering RX 2 is cut off, the IDU emits laser signal from TX 2 to RX 1 for 2 sec. This would then cause the laser output of TX1 to turn on. If, at this time, the fault at point A has been cleared, the ALS function will be released and the operation will return to normal.

(b) Manual Restart (2 sec.) ControlUpon receiving a command signal for manual restart from the LCT or the PASOLINK network management terminal (PNMT) while the optical input signal to the RX 2 is off, the IDU emits the laser signal from the TX 2 to the RX 1 for 2 ±0.25 sec. This would then cause the laser output of TX1 to turn on. If, at this time, the fault at point A has been cleared, the ALS function will be released and the operation will return to normal (if not it returns to automatic condition).


3-17

(c) Manual Restart (90 sec.) ControlUpon receiving a command signal for manual restart for test from the LCT or the PNMT while the optical input signal to the RX 2 is off, the IDU emits the laser signal from the TX 2 to the RX 1 for 90 ±10 sec. This would then cause the laser output of TX1 to turn on. If, at this time, the fault at point A has been recovered, the ALS function will be released and the operation will return to normal (if not it returns to automatic condition).

Fig. 3-1 ALS System Functional Block Diagram

MUXEQUIPMENT OPT INTFC

TX1

RX1

AO/E

RLOS 550 ± 50 ms TIMER

O/E

RX2

TX2CONT

LCT or PNMT

DATA BUS

60/180/300 sec.DELAY

2±0.25STX ON TIMER

CTRL

ALS CONTENABLE/DISABLE

2STX ON TIMER

90±10STX ON TIMER

SB/DATA BUS

CLEAR


3-18

3.5.2 Automatic Protection Switching (APS) (OPT INTFC Optional APS Configuration) (SONET)

(a) Line ProtectionThe Automatic Protection Switching (APS) provides for uni-directional line protection against optical cable interface failures. It is performed by detected alarm condition or remote control signal.

Fig. 3-2 OPT APS System

The OC-3 (OPT) INTFC monitors the OPT line input signal interface condition and when an alarm condition occurs in the optical cable or optical interface module, APS is activated. Also the APS is activated when remote control signal is received.Uni-directional APS is performed only in the receiving section of the local side when a failure or signal degradation of the received signal is detected in one direction. Fig. 3-3 shows APS switching mode.

OC-3 (OPT) INTFC

MODEM

Working

OPT INOPT OUT

Protection

MODEM

only 1+1

OC-3 (OPT) INTFC

SW

SW

LOS/LOF/BERDET

LOS/LOF/BERDET

OPT IN

OPT OUT

CTRLRemote

Module Failure

Module Failure SW CTRL

SW CTRL


3-19

Fig. 3-3 Line Protection

(1)

(2)

Uni-directional Mode Line Protection

(Work)

(Prot)

(Work)

(Prot)

OC-3 (OPT) INTFC(No.1)




Received OPT failure

(1)

(2)

(Work)

(Prot)

(Work)

(Prot)





Received OPT failureNLite EASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT

NLite EASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT

SW CTRL

SW CTRL

WORKING

PROTECTION

WORKINGWORKING

PROTECTIONPROTECTION

WORKINGWORKING


WORKING

PROTECTION

WORKINGWORKING


Note: ON LINE

OFF LINE


3-20

(b) APS Function SetupThe APS switchover is performed with the following order of priority of two (2) modes.

(1) When “APS Condition-SF” is lower priority (default).

• UNEQUIP > LKI*1 > FSW > SF > SD*2 > MSW

(2) When “APS Condition-SF” is higher priority.

• UNEQUIP > LKI*1 > SF(P) > FSW > SF(W) > SD*2 > MSW

Notes: *1 Excluding when the Lock in Usage is set Not Used.

*2: Excluding when the APS Condition-SD(B1) is set to Excluded SD.

UNEQUIP:Unequipped redundant OC-3 INTFC (OPT).

LKI:Lock in (see following descriptions Lock in for detail)

FSW:Forced Control (see following descriptions when APS Maintenance Mode is set to Forced)

SF: Signal Fail (see following descriptions of APS Condition-SF(PROT) SF(P); Signal Fail of Protection side SF(W); Signal Fail of Working side

SD; Signal Degrade (see following descriptions APS Condition-SD(B1) for detail)

MSW;Manual control (see following descriptions when APS Maintenance Mode is set to Manual)


3-21

• APS Maintenance ModeThis is a setup to give priority to manual control operation in maintenance.

Manual: Give priority to alarm events in maintenance operation. In this mode, manual control disables the operation under alarm condition.

Forced: Give priority to forced control in maintenance operation. In this mode, manual control enables the operation under alarm condition and the alarmed side can be selected.

Caution: When the APS Maintenance Mode is set to “Forced” in provisioning, APS manual control can select either Working or Protection line though one is alarmed. Then, take care switching to avoid traffic interruption.

• APS Condition-SF(PROT):This is a setup to give higher priority to switchover by SF in Protection side.

Priority High: This setup gives highly priority to SF of Protection side (installed in INTFC Slot2) for switchover control condition. Since the setup gives priority higher than the Forced Control, the ONLINE is maintained in Main side (installed in INTFC Slot1) under occurrence of SF condition of Protection side.

LCT MENU

Alarm/StatusEquipment SetupInventoryAUX I/OMaintenanceProvisioning

BER Threshold SettingSC AssignmentOC-3 SettingTX Power ControlCondition for TX/RX SWCondition for APSRelay SettingTCN Threshold (15min)TCN Threshold (1day)PMON SelectOthers

MeteringPMON(Current)PMON(History)

---Condition for APS--- RangeAPS Maintenance Mode Manual ForcedAPS Condition-SF(PROT) Priority High Priority LowAPS Condition-SD(B1) Included SD Excluded SDLock in Usage Not Used UsedLock in Detect Count [times] 4 1 to 255Lock in Detect Time [min] 10 1 to 60Lock in Hold Time [hours]) 24 1 to 48


3-22

• APS Condition-SD(B1)This is a setup that it includes the SD or excludes SD for the switchover control condition. When including it, the switchover is performed when SD reaches the threshold value which is set in BER Threshold/SD (MUX) in provisioning.

Include SD: Including SD for switchover conditionExclude SD: Excluding SD for switchover condition

• Lock inThe function is used to pause the switchover activation for a period of time when in the switchover of frequent occurrence.The following setting is needed to be used for it.

Lock in Count: Setup for the Lock in threshold value of the switchover number of times. (setting range: 1 to 255 times)

Lock in Detect time: Setup for the watching interval of counting number of times for Lock in. (setting range: 1 to 60 minutes)

Lock in Hold time: Setup for the duration of pause of switchover in the Lock in condition. (setting range: 1 to 48 hours)

The Lock in status can be observed on the Alarm/Status of LCT display.

The Lock in condition may be released after passing the Lock in Hold time or the change of setting. The following is an example in default value.

• Lock in Count: 4• Lock in Detect time: 10• Lock in Hold time: 24

This sets into the Lock in condition when the switchover is activated more than 4 times within 10 minutes interval of watching number of times. The switchover activation pauses during 24 hours after set in the Lock in condition. The Lock in condition will be released after passing of 48 hours and it sets into normal mode.

When it will be manually released that under the Lock in condition, perform resetting by changing parameter value or changing the setting condition to “Lock in Usage Not Used”.


3-23

3.5.3 Automatic Transmitter Power Control

The automatic transmit power control (ATPC) function automatically varies the TX output power according to path conditions. In the SHF and EHF band, fading exerts heavy influences on propagation, causing the receive signal level at the opposite station to vary. The ATPC function operates by controlling the transmit output power of the opposite station according to the variation of the received signal level at the local station. ATPC provides the following advantages:

• Improvement in up fading characteristics• Improvement in residual BER characteristics• Reduction of interference to intra system• Reduction of interference to inter system

Note: In the XPIC configuration, ATMC/MTPC setup and action control in the Sub Master station are applied from the Main Master station.

A functional block diagram of the ATPC operation is shown in Fig. 3-4.

ATPC improves the BER characteristics under adverse changes in climatic conditions and reduces the possibility of interference. To implement ATPC, the received level (RX LEV) is detected by the Receiver (RX) in the ODU and passed to the CPU in the CTRL module. The CPU then determines whether the transmit output power needs to be controlled. This is based on the transmit output power and the minimum and maximum values of the output control range (ATPC range). ATPC is relevant for the receiving threshold level that were previously specified using the LCT or PNMT (as ATPC Threshold Level).

A control signal (POWER CTRL), whose function is to maintain the received RX signal level (RSL) by decreasing or increasing the TX output power of the opposite station, is generated by the CTRL module through the MD Unit. This control signal is based on the result of comparison between the current receiver input level and the preset receiving threshold level. This control signal is sent to the opposite station to control its transmit output power.

At the opposite station, this control signal is detected by the CTRL module. The TR Unit, in accordance with this control signal, produces a control that will either raise, lower or maintain the current TX output power.


3-24

Fig. 3-4 ATPC, Functional BLock Diagram

Example of ATPC setting.

Where ATPC MAXIMUM PWR of ATPC Range is set to 0 dB, ATPC MINIMUM PWR is set to -10 dB and RX Threshold to -55 dBm. In this case, if RX level is lower than -55 dBm, monitor/control is performed with the interval of 8 msec. RX level is monitored in 1 dB step, and TX output is controlled in 1 dB step. However, a fixed hysteresis of 5 dB referred to the RX Threshold is implemented for ATPC operation. Example: If RX Threshold is set to -55 dBm, no output control is made unless the RX level goes below -55 dBm or goes above -50 dBm, so that the receive level is maintained within -55 to -50 dBm by ATPC.

TX

TX

RX

RX

POWER CONT

REMOTE

RX IN LEV

REMOTECTRL CTRL

ATPC CTRL ATPC CTRL

TRANSMITTING STATION RECEIVING STATION

MODEM

MODEMMODEM

MODEM

-50 dBm

RX LEVEL

-55 dBm(RX THRESHOLD LEVEL)

5 dB(ATPCHYSTERESIS)


3-25

Using MTPC-ATPC

The ATPC Control System of the PASOLINK transmits the information on the receiving level to the opposite station and controls the transmission level of its local station in accordance with the receiving level of the opposite station. Transmission level control can be used not only for setting the same operation (ATPC-ATPC) between local station and opposite station but also for operation in combination of stations with different operations (MTPC-ATPC, ATPC-MTPC). The station set in MTPC mode is not controlled by the information from opposite station but is fixed in its transmitting output level.

Even if the station is set in the MTPC mode, the opposite station is likely to be set in the ATPC mode. Therefore, setting the RX Threshold (ATPC Threshold level) is required for controlling the transmission level of the opposite station. Between the stations that are respectively set in the MTPC mode, however, the setting is disabled.

The following is an example of operation between stations set in MTPC-ATPC mode.

The transmitting level of station B is controlled so that the receiving level of station A in the above figure reaches the RX Threshold set level (−50 dBm) set in station A. This method is used in station A for reducing the level of interference to other route. As station A is set in the MTPC mode, the transmitting level is kept unchanged.

An example of using MTPC-ATPC is shown below. As shown in the figure, in the master station communicating with many substations, waves gather from substations possibly causing interferences. Therefore, substations must be set in the ATPC mode to minimize the diffraction (interference) to other routes while reducing the receiving levels from individual substations to the minimum. In substations, there is little possibility of occurring interferences; therefore, the master station is set in the MTPC mode to permit transmission at a constant level.

MTPC(RX Threshold: −50 dBm) ATPC

PASOLINKODU

PASOLINKODU

STATION A STATION B


3-26

A constant transmit output power in both MTPC and ATPC is maintained using the ALC function which is provided in the RF CKT module. The ALC circuit detect the transmit output power using a diode to obtain a DC voltage proportional to the transmit power. The gain of the RF amplifier is controlled inversely with this detected DC voltage to maintain the transmit output power within the specified limits.

When the ATPC malfunction occurs, transmitter output power is maintained at the following level according to the ATPC mode. The ATPC mode is set in provisioning using LCT.

Hold:Maintain the TX output level at the current level, when the ATPC malfunction occurs.

MAX:Maintain the TX output level at ATPC maximum level, when the ATPC malfunction occurs.

MIN:Maintain the TX output level at ATPC minimum level, when the ATPC malfunction occurs.

(ATPC)SUBSTATION 2

(ATPC)SUBSTATION 3

(ATPC)SUBSTATION 4

MASTERSTATION(ATPC)

SUBSTATION 1

(ATPC)SUBSTATION 5

(A)

(B)

(A),(B)(C)

: Diffraction to other route.: RX received level down.

(C)

(MTPC)


3-27

3.5.4Loopback Control

The loopback function is provided for checking the system quality during maintenance and/or to quickly isolate a fault location on the SONET configuration. The control is performed by the LCT, the PNMT or the PNMS.

Provided here is the control of the:

• Near-End loopback is performed at the OC-3 INTFC module.

• Far-End loopback is performed at the OC-3 INTFC module.

• IF loopback (IF-LB) is performed at the MODEM module ((c) in Fig. 3-5) for IF signal.

Notes: 1. During the IF loopback is in execution, monitoring of the opposite and the subsequent stations are disabled on the PNMS and PNMT.

2. Loopback control will interrupt the radio link condition.3. The IF LOOPBACK and the RX SW is not operated

interlock. The RX SW switching is necessary to select the same CH with IF LOOPBACK in 1+1 configuration.

Fig. 3-5 Loopback Location

3.5.5 Link Loss Forwarding Control (LAN)

Link Loss Forwarding (LLF) control provides two kinds of functions for 10/100BASE-T interface. One is to automatically stop the output from the

DATA IN

IDU

OWN STATION OPPOSITE STATION

DEM

TX

RXDATA OUT

(a) (c)

( )INTFC MODEM

ODU IDU

DEM

TX MOD

RXDATA OUT

( )INTFCMODEM

ODU

MOD

(b)

CTRLLCT/PNMT

DEMUX

MUX

Note: Reverse direction is the same as above.

CODECONV

CODECONV

CODECONV

CODECONV

DEMUX

MUX

OC-3/E1/E3

OC-3/E1/E3

OC-3/E1/E3

DATA IN

OC-3/E1/E3


3-28

LAN port to alert the equipment connected with the LAN port when the system has been disconnected by the fault in the radio section. The other is to transmit the information for cutting the link interconnected with the LAN port in the opposite station when the link between the LAN port and equipment is faulty. This function can be selected by setting “Provisioning” on LCT to “Enable” or “Disable”.

3.5.6 MS-AIS Generation (SONET)

When any fault occurs in the NLite E equipment, or when OC-3 input signal disappears, or when any fault occurs in radio section, The function of MS-AIS Generation causes the OC-3 output signal from the NLite Eequipment to be stopped and/or non-frame signal (all “1”) to be output, to detect the fault in the MUX equipment of the opposite station.

This function can be selected by setting “Provisioning” on LCT to “Enable” or “Disable”. Normally, this function is set to “Enable”. If this function is set to “Disable”, the function of MS-AIS Generation is stopped.

AUTO: Output Stop

Radio Fault

HUB HUBLAN LANFAULT

NLite E NLite E MUXMUX

DATAIN

DATAOUT

RADIO SECTION


3-29

For example, at the station A, when the NLite E equipment detects the OC-3 input Loss Of Signal (LOS) and/or Loss Of Frame (LOF), the information is transmitted to the station B by using RFCOH. When the station B detects the information, NLite E equipment stops the OC-3 output signal. Similarly, it is the same even if a receiving input level down or loss of radio frame (LOF) appear in station B.

Notes:1. * Optical interface: Shutdown Electrical interface: all “1”

2. When the MS-AIS Generation is “Enable”, status indication of MS-AIS Generation on LCT is not indicated.

Event

Station A Station B

LED LCT LEDLCT

OC-3 OUTPUTOC-3 Output

Control

OC-3 Input Loss at Station A IDU ALM MAIN INTFC

LOS ⎯ Under Execution Shutdown *(or all “1”)

OC-3 Loss of Frame at Station A IDU ALM MAIN INTFC

LOF ⎯ Under Execution Shutdown *(or all “1”)

RX Level Down ⎯ N/A ODU ALM Under Execution Shutdown *(or all “1”)

Loss of Radio Frame at Station B ⎯ N/A IDU ALM Under Execution Shutdown *

(or all “1”)BER Degrade (≤1E-4) at Station B

⎯ N/A IDU ALM Normal N/A

STATION A STATION BNLite E

ODU ODU FSYNC

LOF

OC-3 OUTPUT CONTROLRLOS/RLOF

RFCOH

MODEMOC-3INTFC

RFCOHMUX

RFCOHDEMUX

OC-3INTFC

OC-3OUTPUT

OC-3INPUT

LOSLOF

INPUTLOSS

MODEM

OC-3LOF

NLite E


3-30

3.5.7 Cross Polarization Interference Canceller (XPIC) Reset Control

For the Cross Polarization Interference Canceller (XPIC) to function properly, signals for both Main Master and Sub Master sides must be received normally. For this reason, when either signal is in abnormal condition, the XPIC RESET function provides a way for turning off the XPIC operation. Local/Remote XPIC reset can be controlled separately to the Main Master and Sub Master.

The LOCAL RESET and/or REMOTE RESET control is performed to the channel which is working online when the system is following conditions.

• When the MODEM or ODU is replaced.• Frame Synchronization is lost (FASYNC) at the MODEM module in

the Co-pol. channel.• At the MODEM module in the Co-pol. channel, IF signal from X-pol.

channel is lost (XIF alarm).• The system is controlled in IF loopback (IF-LB) condition with the

LCT, PNMS or PNMT.• The XPIC RESET control is executed from the LCT, PNMS or

PNMT.• The XPIC RESET control is applied from the MODEM module in

the X-pol. channel. • The XREF or LO REF alarm condition occurs.

Note: The SD system can not be applied for the XPIC configuration.

H-pol

V-pol

LOCAL STATION (Main Master)

IDU

IDU

Main Master CH

ODU

Sub Master CH

ODU

OMT

IDU

IDU

ODU

ODU

OMT

OPPOSITE STATION (Sub Master)

Fig. 3-6 XPIC Reset Control

Dual Pol.

V-pol

H-pol

Remote XPIC reset V-pol

Remote XPIC reset H-pol

reset V-polLocal/Remote XPIC

reset H-polLocal/Remote XPIC

REMOTE

Note : Feeder Connection for Dual Pole Feed Antenna.

Control

coincidence

coincidence

f1

f2

f2f1

OC-3CH1

OC-3CH1

OC-3CH2

OC-3CH2

XIF XIF


3-31

3.5.8 Network Management (Optional)

The Network Management System (NMS) configuration is shown in Fig. 3-7. The PASOLINK network management system (PNMS) is connected to the NMS (LAN) connector of the IDU located at the designated maintenance center while the PASOLINK network management terminal (PNMT) is connected to the LCT USB connector on the IDU of remote stations. The PNMT/PNMS provides monitoring and control of the actual microwave link status and its associated Nlite E equipment. Status information form and control signals to remote stations are transmitted using RFCOH.

For detailed information, refer to the related PNMS or PNMT manual.

Fig. 3-7 Network Management System

PNMS PNMT

NLite E

PNMS: PASOLINK Network Management SystemPNMT : PASOLINK Network Management Terminal

LCTNMS (LAN)CONNECTOR CONNECTOR

NLite E


3-32

3.5.9 Functionality Classification

The functionality of the NLite E is defined by optional system parameters, interface card and transmission capacities as listed in the following categories. The functionality is found in the Software Key in the LCT Inventory menu.

Functionality Classification of the NLite E

1 2 3 4

Capacityand

RedundancyBit Rate LAN Interface XPIC

Functionary

1+0 System 1+1 System Fixed Available Available1. 10 MB 1. 10 MB Free Unavailable Unavailable2. 20 MB 2. 20 MB3. 40 MB 3. 40 MB4. 80 MB 4. 80 MB5. 100 MB 5. 100 MB6. 156 MB 6. 156 MB

Optional System, Interface Card and Transmission Capacity

System and Transmission Capacity1+0 1+1

OC-3 Opt S1.1 156MB 156MB

OC-3 Opt L1.1 156MB 156MB

2P LAN 156MB 156MB

GbE 156MB 156MB


3-33

3.6 Protection Switching

Protection switching is provided in the 1+1 Twin-path and the HS systems.

3.6.1 1 + 1 Twin-path System

Protection switching in this system is performed by a hitless switch (HL SW) on the ( )INTFC module of the IDU at the receiving end.

When both the No. 1 and No. 2 channels are in normal operating condition, the OC-3 data streams from the associated MUX equipment are sent to the receiving end through the No. 1 and No. 2 channels. At the receiving end, the output data streams of the No. 1 and No. 2 channels MODEM enter the HL SW. The data signal selected by HL SW is fed to associated MUX equipment.

At the receiving end, when the low bit error alarm (LOW BER ALM) is detected in the MODEM of the No. 1 channel, the alarm signal is sent to the switch control logic circuit on the CTRL module. The switch control logic circuit send the HL SW control signal to the ( ) INTFC module. Then, the HL SW selects the data signal from No.2 channel. The switching condition is shown on the RX1 and RX2 STATUS indicators on the IDU.

3.6.2 Hot-standby System

Protection switching in this system is performed by the TX switches* on the No. 1 and No. 2 channel ODUs at the transmitting end and by the HL SW** on the ( ) INTFC module of the IDU at the receiving end.

Note: 1. * Transmit switching is actually accomplished by muting the output of either No.1 or No.2 channel ODU, using a control signal from the IDU.

When both the No. 1 and No. 2 channels are in normal operating condition, the OC-3 data signal from the associated MUX equipment are sent to the No. 1 and No. 2 channel ODUs through the No. 1 and No. 2 channel IDUs. Here, either of the No. 1 or No. 2 channel signal is selected at the TX switch on the ODU and fed to the receiving end. At the receiving end, the output data signal of the No. 1 and No. 2 channels MODEM enter the HL SW on the ( ) INTFC module. The data signal selected by HL SW is fed to associated MUX equipment.


3-34

When the modulator alarm is detected in the MODEM or when the TX IF input alarm, TX power alarm or APC alarm is detected in the ODU, the alarm signal is sent to the switch control logic circuit on the CTRL module. The switch control logic circuit produces a TX switch control signal for selecting the ODU that is in the normal condition. When the ODU receives the TX switching control signal, the output of the ODU that is currently active (on-line) is muted and the output of the other ODU is un-muted. The switching condition is shown on the TX1 and TX2 STAUS indicators on the IDU.

At the receiving end, when the low bit error alarm (LOW BER ALM) is detected in the MODEM of the No. 1 channel, the alarm signal is sent to the switch control logic circuit on the CTRL module. The switch control logic circuit send the HL SW control signal to the ( )INTFC module. Then, the HL SW selects the data signal from No.2 channel. The switching condition is shown on the RX1 and RX2 STATUS indicators on the IDU.

3.6.3 Switchover Control

The following explains the protection switching function in the 1+1 Twin-path and HS system.

(a) TX SwitchingTX switching in HS system is accomplished by muting the TX output power of either No.1 or No.2 channel ODU. Two mode of TX switch controls are provided: automatic switching that is initiated by detection of a failure in the transmit section of the IDU or ODU, and manual switching is performed by using the LCT. TX switching, either manually or automatically, may cause a momentary interruption of the traffic. TX switching have the following operational mode:

• Switching Mode:

1. Manual : Applied in Maintenance mode. 2. Auto: Normal operating mode.

TX SW Setup in provisioning has following features:

• Switching Priority:

1. Non Priority: Selecting non revertive mode. 2. Priority No.1: This mode is applied to select No.1

when both No.1 and No.2 are normally operating.


3-35

(b) RX Switch RX switching in 1+1 Twin-path/HS system is performed by the HL SW on the ( ) INTFC module.Two types of RX switch controls are provided: automatic switching that is initiated by the quality deterioration of the received signal and manual switching that is initiated by the operator using the LCT.The switching mode and switching priority for automatic and manual switching are identical to those of TX switching. However, the switching priority is only valid under automatic switching control. This is because automatic switching is implemented by hardware logic and manual switching is implemented by software logic. That is, automatic switching and manual switching are completely independent and separate operations. Thus, when the operator reverts to automatic switching after performing manual switching, the channel will be re-selected by the switch control logic circuit.

• Switching Mode:

1. Manual : Applied in Maintenance mode. 2. Auto: Normal operating mode.

RX SW Setup in provisioning has following features:

• Switching Priority:

1. Non Priority: Selecting non revertive mode. 2. Priority No.1: This mode is applied to select No.1

when both No.1 and No.2 are normally operating.

• RX SW Maintenance Mode:

1. Manual mode, this disables the RX SW manual control when either No. 1 or No. 2 RX route is in alarm status.

2. Forced mode, this enables the RX SW manual control though either or both No. 1 and No. 2 RX routes are in alarm status.

Caution: When the RX SW mode is set to “Forced” in provisioning, RX SW manual control can select either No. 1 or No. 2 RX route though one is alarmed. Then, take care switching to avoid traffic interruption.


3-36

• RX SW Condition-Early Warning

1. Included Early Warning, this switch over the RX SW at less than 1E-9.

2. Excluded Early Warning, this switch over the RX SW at Low BER setting values 1E-6, 1E-7, 1E-8 or 1E-9. (default value is 1E-7)

• RX Switching Condition Cross Reset (only XPIC 1+1 configuration):

1. Included Cross Reset, this switch over the RX SW when XPIC reset control is acted.

2. Excluded Cross Reset, this does not switch over the RX SW though XPIC reset control is acted.

ROI-S05747-052E SAFETY INFORMATION August, 2007

-1-

SAFETY INFORMATION

This safety instruction is prepared to protect accident resulting personal injury or death and also physical damage of the equipment during maintenance or installation. To avoid hazardous conditions, read this Instruction Manual thoroughly before equipment operation. The signal words (Danger, Warning and Caution) are used in the Instruction manual as follows:

GENERAL SAFETY

DANGERIndicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNINGIndicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in serious injury or physical damage.

CAUTION

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury or physical damage. It is also said to alert against inappropriate practice.

LABELS

Caution and Warning labels attached to the IDU and ODU as follows:

Turn off power of IDU before disconnecting cable.

! -48V OUTPUTPower down IDU

before disconnectionor connection of

cable.

! WARNING

! -48V INPUTPower down IDU before

disconnection or connection of cable.

-48V OUTPUT!

Power down IDU

or connection of cable.before disconnection

Do not disconnect I/F cable between the IDU and the ODU in operation condition, to avoid damaging the IDU and the ODU.

The −48 V DC power is superimposed on the center conductor of the I/F cable between the IDU and the ODU. Connecting a test equipment directly to this terminal may damage it and touching the coaxial cable core may cause electrical shock.

CAUTION

HOT SURFACE

Avoid contact.

!

CAUTION

HOT SURFACE

Avoid contact.

!


Be careful that top surface of the IDU is hot.

Caution that the Non-ionizing radiation from the equipment may effect on health.

CLASS 1LASER PRODUCT

In a system using the OPT INTFC module, do not stare at the laser beam or look at it directly with optical instruments. Otherwise, it may hurt your eyes (Does not apply to PDH).

The mark on the electrical and electronic products only applies to the current European Union Member States.

SAFETY INFORMATION ROI-S05747

-2-

ROI-S05747 WARNING

-3-

WARNING

WARNING

The –48 V DC power is superimposed on the center conductor of the coaxial cable between the IDU and the ODU. Connecting a test set equipment directly to this terminal may damage it and touching the coaxial cable core may cause electrical shock.

WARNING

Do not touch the I/F cable jack core before turning off the power switch. If touching the coaxial cable core may cause electrical shock.

WARNING

In a system using the OPT INTFC module, do not stare nor use optical instruments to look at the laser beam directly as this may cause eye damage. (Class 1 Laser Product).

WARNING

This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

CAUTION ROI-S05747

-4-

CAUTION

CAUTION

While the power supply is ON, do not connect/disconnect the power supply connector. Otherwise, the DC-DC CONV may break down.

CAUTION

Locate the ODU within the area protected by lightning rod. To avoid surge currents caused by lightning circulating in the equipment earth system, connect the equipment earth system (frame ground) to ground of the lightning rod at ground level.

CAUTION

Interrupt operation and turn off the power switch on the IDU, if in the event of an emergency situation with appearance such as smoking, burning smell, and strange sound. Continuation of operation may cause burning or resulting in electric shock. As there is risk, do not attempt to repair.

CAUTION

Introduction of spilling liquid, piece of metal, smoke, corrosive gas or dust into the equipment, or approach of birds or animals may cause burning or break-down.

CAUTION

Do not perform overhaul, modification or repairing of the equipment. As it may cause burning or resulting in electric shock.

ROI-S05747 NOTICE (PLACING)

-5-

NOTICE (PLACING)

1. When the ODU is installed in the indoor, as the ODU generates Non-ionizing radiation and it may cause health effect, then, it is required to take adequate measures.

2. Do not block the vents of the equipment. It may cause break down due to heating up of inner equipment in stuffy condition. Ensure to follow the set up and usage rules as follows.

Do not set up the equipment on the carpet, heating floor or bare concrete.

Do not cover or wrap the equipment with table cloth, lace, rubber or plastic material.

Do not set up the equipment in the bookshelves or rocker or in a stuffy place.

Do not put anything like books or paper on and against the equipment.

3. The equipment must be installed in correct place. Do not install turning sideways or slanting. If not properly installed, it may cause break down due to rise of inner temperature.

4. Do not install the equipment in the following locations. If installed, it may cause harmful influence for the equipment.

The equipment must be installed and maintained in a clean, and dry place where temperature and humidity remain stable, non-condensing into dew and within the ranges specified by the manufacturer.

5. Because of the equipment is an indoor type, do not install the equipment in the location where it could be caused harm influence by salt-air, sand-dust, sulphuric acid gas etc..

If the equipment will be installed necessarily in such location, the following must be heeded.

(a) Construction of the Equipment RoomInstall the equipment in the airtight room or shelter where it could not be suffered by external influence mentioned above.

NOTICE (PLACING) ROI-S05747

-6-6 Pages

(b) Environmental Temperature Impact for the EquipmentIn the airtight room, it may be caused rising in temperature with the heat generation of the equipment. Furnish an air-conditioner for industrial use in accordance with the situation. Do not apply air directly from the air-conditioner to the equipment. When the equipment is located in face of the air from the air-conditioner, it could be condensed into dew by temperature variation.

(c) In the case of using at marine and coastal areas (within 3 km from the seaside), it is necessary to make measures against the damage from salt water. For measures against the damage from salt water to an ODU, request them to NEC.

6. The place of installation is restricted to Telecommunication Center and similar environment.

ROI-S05755-054E ABBREVIATIONS April, 2007

-1-

ABBREVIATIONS

The following abbreviations are used in the manual for the NLite E equipment.

ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION

A

AIS Alarm Indication Signal

ALM Alarm

ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown

ANT Antenna

APC Automatic Phase Control

APS Automatic Protection System

ASYNC Asynchronization

ATPC Automatic Transmitting Power Control

ATT Attenuator

AUX Auxiliary

B

BBE Background Block Error

BER Bit Error Rate

BNC Bayonet Navy Connector

BPF Band Pass Filter

C

CAS Channel Associated Signaling

CBL Cable

CD Compact Disk

CH Channel

CKT Circuit

CLK Clock

CMI Coded Mark Inversion

COM Common

COMB Combiner

CONN Connection

CONT Control

ABBREVIATIONS ROI-S05755

-2-

CONV Converter

CPU Central Processing Unit

CTRL Control

CW Carrier Wave

D

DADE Differential Absolute Delay Equalizer

DC Direct Current

DCCr Data Communication Channel in RSOH

DCK Drop Clock

DDT Drop Data

DEM Demodulator

DFP Drop Frame Pulse

DMR Digital Microwave Radio

DSC Digital Service Channel

E

E Electrical

E/O Electrical/Optical

E-BER Excessive-Bit Error Rate

EMC Electro Magnetic Compatibility

EOW Engineering Orderwire

EP Earthing Point

EQL Equalizer

ERR Error

ES Errored Seconds

EXT External


ROI-S05755 ABBREVIATIONS

-3-

F

FAS Frame Alignment Signal

FEC Forward Error Correction

FG Frame Ground

FIL Filter

FPGA Field Programable Gate Array

FREQ Frequency

F/W Firmware

G

G Ground

GND Ground

H

HD Hard Disk

HK House Keeping

I

ICK Insert Clock

ID Identification

IDT Insert Data

IDU Indoor Unit

IE Internet Explorer

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers

IF Intermediate Frequency

I/F Inter Facility

IFL Inter Facility Link

IN Input

INTFC Interface

I/O Input/Output

IP Internet Protocol

ITU International Telecommunication Union



-4-

L

LAN Local Area Network

LB Loop Back

LCD Liquid Crystal Display

LCT Local Craft Terminal

LED Light Emitting Diode

LLF Link Loss Forwarding

LEV Level

LO Local

LOF Loss of Frame

LOS Loss of Signal

M

MAC Media Access Control

MAINT Maintenance

MD Modulator Demodulator

MDI Media Dependent Interface

MDIX Media Dependent Interface with Crossover

MFAS Multi Frame Alignment Signal

MIX Mixer

MII Media Independent Interface

Mib Management Information Base

MLC Multi-Level Coding

MMC Memory Card

MOD Modulator

MODEM Modulator-Demodulator

MON Monitor

MPX Multiplexer

MS-AIS Multiplexer Section Alarm Indication Signal

MTPC Manual Transmitter Power Control

MUX Multiplexing Equipment



-5-

N

NC Normal Closed

NE Network Element

NMS Network Management System

NO Normal Open

NORM Normal

NRZ Nonreturn to Zero

O

O Optical

O/E Optical/Electrical

ODU Outdoor Unit

OFS Out of Frame Second

OH Overhead

OMT Orthogonal Mode Transducer

OPT Optical

OS Operating System

OUT Output

OW Orderwire

P

P Protection

PC Personal Computer

PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

PH Phase

PKG Package

PM PASOLINK Management

PMON Performance Monitor

PNMS PASOLINK Network Management System

PNMT PASOLINK Network Management Terminal

PROT Protection

PS Power Supply

PWR Power



-6-

Q

QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation

QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying

R

RAM Random Access Memory

REC Rectifier

LO REF Local Reference Frequency

RF Radio Frequency

RFCOH Radio Frame Complementary Overhead

RL Relay

RMON Remote Network Monitoring

ROM Read Only Memory

RS Reed Solomon

RSOH Regenerator Section Overhead

RST Regenerator Section Termination

RSL Received Signal Level

RX Receive

S

SC Service Channel

SD Signal Degrade

SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage

SES Severely Errored Seconds

SEP Separation

SEP Severely Errored Period

SOH Section Overhead

SONET Synchronous Optical Network

STM Synchronous Transport Module

SV Supervisory

SW Switch

SYNC Synchronizer

SYNTH Synthesizer



-7-

SYS System

T

TCN Threshold Crossing Notification

TRP Transmitter-Receiver Equipment

TX Transmit

U

UAE Unavailable Event

UAS Unavailable Second

URL Uniform Resource Locator

USB Universal Serial Bus

V

VF Voice Frequency

V/H Vertical/Horizontal

VOL Volume

Vo-p Volt zero (0) to Peak

W

W Working

Web World Wide Web

WG Waveguide

X

XC Cross Connect

XIF IFof Cross Polarization

XPIC Cross Polarization Interference Canceller

XPD Cross Polarization Discrimination



-8-8 pages


1-1

APPENDIX

FCC STATEMENT INFORMATION .................................. 1-1

1-2

1.0 FCC INFORMATION

The NLite E 5.8 GHz radios will be used for fixed Point to Point applications. The NLite L radio utilizes a parabolic antenna that requires professional installers for path alignment. The maximum RF transmit power of the NLite E 5.8 GHz radios is less than 0.3162 watts (+25 dbm). Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The peak RF transmit power of the NLite E 5.8 GHz radios is less than 1.0 watts (+30 dbm). This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to the part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

The device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference. (2) This device must accept any interference received. This device must be professionally installed.

MADE IN JAPAN

Safety Information

Pasolink NLiteN FULL Manual

Documents

Transcript of Pasolink NLiteN FULL Manual